CNC Series

KND—1000M CNC system

— drilling boring and milling machines

USER’S MANUAL

Beijing KND CNC Technique Co. Ltd.

C12B-T00N-0101
C KND LTD,2006
 CONTENTS

I GENERAL…………………………………………………………………………………… 1-0
1. GENERAL …………………………………………………………………………………… 1 - 1
1.1 GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC MACHINE TOOL …………………… 1 - 1
1.2 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL………………………………………………… 1 - 1
II PROGRAMMING ……………………………………………………………………… 1-0
1. GENERAL …………………………………………………………………………………… 1 - 1
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION… 1 - 2
1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION………………………………………………………………… 1 - 3
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT ………………………………………… 1 - 3
1.4 CUTTING FEED─SPINDLE FUNCTION……………………………………………… 1 - 8
1.5 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING-TOOL FUNCTION… 1 - 8
1.6 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS-MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION …… 1 - 9
1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ………………………………………………………… 1 - 9
1.8 TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MACHINE-TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION……… 1 - 11
1.9 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE –STROKE ……………………………………………… 1 - 13
2. CONTROLLED AXES …………………………………………………………………… 2 - 0
2.1 CONTROLLED AXES …………………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
2.2 INCREMENT SYSTEM ………………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
2.3 MAXIMUM STROKE……………………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ……………………………………… 3 - 0
4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS………………………………………………………… 4 - 0
4.1 POSITIONING (G00) …………………………………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) ……………………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02,G03) …………………………………………… 4 - 2
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02,G03) ……………………………………………… 4 - 6
5. FEED FUNCTIONS………………………………………………………………………… 5 - 0
5.1 GENERAL ………………………………………………………………………………… 5 - 1
5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE ……………………………………………………………………… 5 - 3
5.3 CUTTING FEED ………………………………………………………………………… 5 - 3
5.4 DWELL (G04) …………………………………………………………………………… 5 - 4
6. REFERENCE POSITION ………………………………………………………………… 6 - 0
6.1 REFERENCE POINT RETURN(G28,G29) …………………………………………… 6 - 1
7. COORDINATE SYSTEM ………………………………………………………………… 7 - 1
7.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING (G92) …………………………… 7 - 1
7.2 PLANE SELECTION (G17,G18,G19) ………………………………………………… 7 - 3
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION…………………………………………… 8 - 1
 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) ………………… 8 - 1
8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20,G21) …………………………………………… 8 - 1
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING …………………………………………………… 8 - 2
9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) …………………………………… 9 - 0
9.1 SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND ………………………………………………………… 9 - 1
9.2 SPINDLE ANOLOG OUTPUT…………………………………………………………… 9 - 1
9.3 AUTOMATIC SHIFTING OF ANALOGUE SPINDLE (HI/LOW GEAR) …………… 9 - 2
10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) …………………………………………………… 10- 1
10.1 CONTROLLING THE UNCLAMPING/CLAMPING OF TOOLS …………………… 10- 2
11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION ………………………………………………………………… 11- 0
11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION) …………………………………………… 11- 1
11.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION PARAMETER ……………………………………………… 11- 4
11.3 NOTES ON AUXILIARY FUNCTION ………………………………………………… 11- 5
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ……………………………………………………… 12- 1
12.1 GENERAL ……………………………………………………………………………… 12- 1
12.2 PROGRAM END………………………………………………………………………… 12- 8
12.3 FILE END ……………………………………………………………………………… 12- 9
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING …………………………………… 13- 1
13.1 CANNED CYCLE (G73,G74,G76.G80-G89) ………………………………………… 13- 1
14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION………………………………………………………… 14- 1
14.1 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION(G43,G44,G49) ………………………………… 14- 1
14.2 CUTTER COMPENSATION B(G39,G40-G42) ……………………………………… 14- 4
14.3 CUTTER COMPENSATION C(G40-G42) …………………………………………… 14-13
14.3.1.CUTTER COMPENSATION FUNCTION …………………………………… 14-13
14.3.2 OFFSET AMOUNT(H code) …………………………………………………… 14-13
14.3.3 OFFSET VECTOR ……………………………………………………………… 14-14
14.3.4 PLANE SELECTION AND VECTOR ………………………………………… 14-14
14.3.5 G40,G41 and G42 …………………… ………………………………………… 14-14
14.3.6 DETAILS OF CUTTER COMPENSATION C ………………………………… 14-17
14.4 OFFSET AMOUNT INPUT BY PROGRAM(G10)…………………………………… 14-49
15. MEASURE FUNCTION ………………………………………………………………… 15- 1
15.1 SKIP FUNCTION (G31)………………………………………………………………… 15- 1
16. WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SELECTION ………………………… 16- 1
16.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM(G54-G59) ………………………………… 16- 1
17. CUSTOM MACRO………………………………………………………………………… 17- 1
17.1 CUSTOM MACRO COMMAND ……………………………………………………… 17- 1
17.2 CUSTOME MACRO BODY …………………………………………………………… 17- 1
17.3 CUSTOM MACRO EXAMPLES ……………………………………………………… 17-12
18. RIGID TAPPING…………………………………………………………………………… 18- 1
18.1 RIGID TAPPING………………………………………………………………………… 18- 1
III OPERATION……………………………………………………………………………… 1-0
1. GENERAL……………………………………………………………………………………… 1 - 1
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION ………………………………………………………………… 1 - 1
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING-AUTOMATIC OPERATION……………… 1 - 2
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION……………………………………………………………… 1 - 3
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM ………………………………………………………………… 1 - 4
1.5 PROGRAM EDITING …………………………………………………………………… 1 - 6
1.6 DATA DISPLAY AND SETTING ……………………………………………………… 1 - 7
1.7 DISPLAY ………………………………………………………………………………… 1 - 10
1.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ………………………………………………………………… 1 - 12
2. OPERATOR’S PANEL …………………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
2.1 LCD／MDI PANEL ……………………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
2.2 ADDITIONAL PANEL …………………………………………………………………… 2 - 5
3. POWER ON AND OFF …………………………………………………………………… 3 - 1
3.1 POWER ON ……………………………………………………………………………… 3 - 1
3.2 POWER OFF……………………………………………………………………………… 3 - 1
4. MANUAL OPERATION …………………………………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.2 JOG FEE ………………………………………………………………………………… 4 - 2
4.3 INCREMENTAL FEED…………………………………………………………………… 4 - 4
4.4 HANDLE FEED…………………………………………………………………………… 4 - 5
4.5 MANUAL PROGRAM ZERO RETURN………………………………………………… 4 - 6
4.6 MANUAL ABSOLUTE SWITCH………………………………………………………… 4 - 6
4.7 MANUAL AUXILIARY FUNCTION OPERATION …………………………………… 4 - 9
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION ……………………………………………………………… 5 - 1
5.1 OPERATION MODE……………………………………………………………………… 5 - 1
5.2 START-UP………………………………………………………………………………… 5 - 4
5.3 AUTO OPERATION EXECUTION……………………………………………………… 5 - 4
5.4 STOP ……………………………………………………………………………………… 5 - 5
6. DRY RUN ……………………………………………………………………………………… 6 - 1
6.1 MACHINE LOCK ………………………………………………………………………… 6 - 1
6.2 AUXILIARY FUCTION LOCK …………………………………………………………… 6 - 1
6.3 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ………………………………………………………………… 6 - 1
6.4 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ……………………………………………………… 6 - 2
6.5 ANALOGUE SPINDLE OVERRIDE …………………………………………………… 6 - 2
6.6 DRY RUN ………………………………………………………………………………… 6 - 3
 6.7 SINGLE BLOCK ………………………………………………………………………… 6 - 4
6.8 RESTART AFTER FEEDHOLD OR STOP …………………………………………… 6 - 4
6.9 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ……………………………………………………………… 6 - 5
7. SAFTY OPERATION ……………………………………………………………………… 7 - 1
7.1 EMERGENCY STOP …………………………………………………………………… 7 - 1
7.2 OVERTRAVEL …………………………………………………………………………… 7 - 1
8. 8-1
ALARM …………………………………………………………………………………………
9. PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING………………………………………………… 9 - 1
9.1 PREPARATION…………………………………………………………………………… 9 - 1
9.2 PROGRAM STORAGETO MEMORY ………………………………………………… 9 - 1
9.3 FILE INCLUDING MANY PROGRAMS STORED INTO MEMORY ……………… 9 - 2
9.4 PROGRAM SEARCH …………………………………………………………………… 9 - 2
9.5 DELETING PROGRAM ………………………………………………………………… 9 - 3
9.6 ALL DELETING PROGRAMS…………………………………………………………… 9 - 3
9.7 PROGRAM OUTPUT …………………………………………………………………… 9 - 3
9.8 ALL PROGRAMS OUTPUT …………………………………………………………… 9 - 4
9.9 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ……………………………………………………… 9 - 4
9.10 PROGRAM COMPARATION BETWEEN IN MEMORY AND IN
PROGRAMMER ……………………………………………………………………………… 9 - 5
9.11 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD ……………………………… 9 - 5
9.12 SEQUENCE NUMBER TO BE INSERTED AUTOMATICALLY…………………… 9 - 11
9.13 NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS ………………………………………… 9 - 12
9.14 STORAGE CAPACITY ………………………………………………………………… 9 - 12
10. DATA DISPLAY AND 10- 1
SETTING ………………………………………………………
10.1 OFFSET ………………………………………………………………………………… 10- 1
10.2 SETTING THE SET PARAMETE …………………………………………………… 10- 3
10.3 CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES DISPLAY AND SETTING ……………………… 10- 5
10.4 PARAMETER …………………………………………………………………………… 10- 6
10.5 PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA …………………………………………… 10- 9
10.6 DIAGNOSE AND PLC PARAMET …………………………………………………… 10- 9
10.7 DISPLAY AND SET MACHINE SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL …………… 10-10
11. DISPLAY …………………………………………………………………………………… 11- 1
11.1 STATUS INDICATION ………………………………………………………………… 11- 1
11.2 DATA DISPLAYING …………………………………………………………………… 11- 1
11.3 DISPLAYING THE SEQUENCE No. AND THE PROGRAM No. ………………… 11- 1
11.4 DISPLAY PROGRAM MEMORY USUAGE ………………………………………… 11- 2
 11.5 DISPLAY THE COMMAND VALUE…………………………………………………… 11- 3
11.6 DISPLAY THE CURRENT POSITION ……………………………………………… 11- 4
11.7 DISPLAY OF RUN TIME AND PARTS COUNT …………………………………… 11- 7
11.8 DISPLAY ALARM ……………………………………………………………………… 11- 7
12. DATA OUTPUT AND FLASH 12- 1
MEMORY ……………………………………………
12.1 DATA OUTPUT ………………………………………………………………………… 12- 1
12.2 FLASH MEMORY ……………………………………………………………………… 12- 2
13. GRAPH FUNCTION ……………………………………………………………………… 13- 1
13.1 GRAPH PARAMETER SETTING …………………………………………………… 13- 2
13.2 GRAPH PARAMETER ………………………………………………………………… 13- 3
13.3 TOOL PATH …………………………………………………………………………… 13- 5
13.4 EXAMPLES ……………………………………………………………………………… 13- 6
14. DESCRIPTION ON DRIVER DEVICE………………………………………………… 14- 1
14.1 UPPER LIMIT OF CUTTING FEED…………………………………………………… 14- 1
14.2 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE SETTING ………………………………………………… 14- 1
14.3 ELECTRIC GEAR RATIO……………………………………………………………… 14- 1
14.4 AC/DECELERATION TIME CONSTANT …………………………………………… 14- 2
14.5 PARAMETER SETTING ……………………………………………………………… 14- 2
14.6 DRIVER ALARM ……………………………………………………………………… 14- 5
15. DESCRIPTION …………………………………………………………………………… 15- 1
15.1 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING AND MEMORY CLEARING ……………… 15- 1
15.2 NO CHECK ON OVERTRAVEL ……………………………………………………… 15- 1
15.3 BACKLASH COMPENSATION ……………………………………………………… 15- 1
15.4 INPUT SIGNAL FILTER………………………………………………………………… 15- 1
15.5 NOT ENTERED NORMAL SCREEN ………………………………………………… 15- 2
15.6 ROM PARITY ALARM AND RAM CHECK…………………………………………… 15- 2
IV CONNECTION ………………………………………………………………………… 1-0
1. SYSTEM STRUCTURE…………………………………………………………………… 1 - 1
1.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION…………………………………………………………… 1 - 1
1.2 INSTALLATION DIMENSION OF CNC CONTROL UNIT…………………………… 1 - 2
1.3 ADDITIONAL OPERATORS PANEL DIMENSION ………………………………… 1 - 3
2. INTERNAL CONNECTION……………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
2.1 SYSTEM INTERNALCONNECTION DIAGRAM……………………………………… 2 - 1
2.2 POWER OUTLET SIGNAL ARRANGEMENT………………………………………… 2 - 3
2.3 CNC MAINBOARD SWITCH DESCRIPTION ………………………………………… 2 - 3
3. EXTERNAL CONNECTION …………………………………………………………… 3 - 1
3.1 SYSTEM EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM…………………………………… 3 - 1
 3.1.1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM (STEPPER MOTOR) …………………………… 3 - 1
3.1.2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM (DIGIT AC SERVO MOTOR) …………………… 3 - 2
3.2 INTERFACE SIGNAL FROM CNC TO DRIVER……………………………………… 3 - 3
3.2.1 INTERFACE SIGNAL DIAGRAM ……………………………………………… 3 - 3
3.2.2 CONNECTOR SIGNAL LIST …………………………………………………… 3 - 4
3.2.3 SIGNAL DESCRIPTION ………………………………………………………… 3 - 4
3.2.4 DESCRIPTION OF CABLE MAKING ………………………………………… 3 - 8
3.3 RS232-C STANDARD SERIE PORT ………………………………………………… 3 -10
3.4 ANALOGUE SPINDLE INTERFACE CONNECTION………………………………… 3 -10
3.5 CONNECTION OF ADDITIONAL OPERATOR’S PANEL ………………………… 3 -11
3.5.1 SIGNAL LIST OF CONNECTOR （XS56：DB15 PIN MALE） …………… 3 -11
3.5.2 SIGNAL DESCRIPTION ………………………………………………………… 3 -11
3.5.3 SIGNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMMATIC …………………………………… 3 -12
3.6 SPECIAL OPERATOR’S PANEL ……………………………………………………… 3 -13
3.6.1 CONNECTOR SIGNAL LIST (XS61: DB15M) ………………………………… 3 -13
3.6.2 SIGNAL DESCRIPTION ………………………………………………………… 3 -13
3.7 CONNECTING WITH SPINDLE ENCODER（G93） ……………………………… 3 -14
4. MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE ……………………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.1 DESCRIPTION OF INPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE …………………………………… 4 - 1
4.1.1 DC INPUT SIGNAL A …………………………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.1.2 DC INPUT SIGNAL B …………………………………………………………… 4 - 1
4.2 DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE ………………………………… 4 - 3
4.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS OF DARLINGTON OUTPUT……………………………… 4 - 3
4.2.2 OUTPUT DRIVER RELAY CIRCUIT …………………………………………… 4 - 4
4.2.3 OUTPUT DIRVER INDICATOR LAMP ………………………………………… 4 - 5
4.3 THE TABLE OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNAL …………………………………… 4 - 6
4.3.1 THE DIAGNOSE TABLE OF INPUT SIGNAL………………………………… 4 - 8
4.3.2 OUTPUT SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS TABLE ……………………………………… 4 - 9
4.3.3 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ARRANGEMENT BETWEEN SOCKET XS54
AND XS57………………………………………………………………………………… 4 -10
4.4 DESCRIPTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNAL ………………………………… 4 -11
4.4.1 INPUT SIGNAL …………………………………………………………………… 4 -11
4.4.2 OUTPUT SIGANL ………………………………………………………………… 4 -14
4.4.3 DESCRIPTION OF M CODE VOLTAGE LEVEL / PULSE OUTPUT ……… 4 -16
V APPENDIX ………………………………………………………………………………… 1-0
APPENDIX1 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ………………………………… 1 - 1
APPENDIX2 G FUNCTION TABLE …………………………………………………………… 2 - 1
APPENDIX3 RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE TABLE ……………………………………… 3 - 1
APPENDIX4 BINARY AND DECIMAL CONVERSION……………………………………… 4-1
APPENDIX5 ALARM LIST……………………………………………………………………… 5 - 1
APPENDIX6 STATUS OF POWER-ON AND RESET ……………………………………… 6 - 1
APPENDIX7 PARAMETER LIST ……………………………………………………………… 7 - 1
APPENDIX8 PLC PARAMETER LIST ………………………………………………………… 8 - 1
APPENDIX9 OPERATION TABLE…………………………………………………………… 9 - 1
APPENDIX10 SPECIFICATION TABLE ………………………………………………………… 10- 1
APPENDIX11 CNC STATUS DIAGNOSE MESSAGE………………………………………… 11- 1
APPENDIX12 ADDITIONAL DESCRIPTION FOR K1000M4………………………………… 12- 1
APPENDIX13 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION …………………………… 13- 1
Ⅰ Overview －1(General) 1 － 0

I. Overview
 Ⅰ Overview －1(General) 1 － 1

Section I. Overview
1. General
K1000M achieves hi-speed and hi-accuracy control by using a 32-bit processor.

The screen is a color/monochrome 7.5″ LCD with resolution 640×480.

The main board is a 6-layer circuit board, with surface-mounted elements, and customized FPGA,
so that it is highly integrated, the whole unit has a reasonable process structure, high interference
immunity and reliability.

Full-Chinese operation interface, complete Help info, easy to operate.

Using G commands from international standard, compatible with FANUC system.

Completely new molded panel in internationally popular color, with elegant appearance.

Super-strong program command processing capability, up to 10000 pieces/18sec, can achieve hi-
speed mini-line cutting.

With function for lead screw error compensation.

Hi-speed DNC machining, transmission rate is up to 115200BPS, meanwhile it is with program

buffer of high capacity.
Employing electronic disk, data will be saved in several positions, can restore rapidly at an error.
Program memory with high capacity (640k byte).

DI/DO can be expanded freely by CAN bus.(Under development)

The system has a port for disk U, through which it is possible to save programs to and fro system
and U disk, and read programs from disk U to carry out cutting. (Under development)
This manual introduces the programming, operation and connection of KND 1000M
CNC system for drilling, boring, milling machines and machining centers.
This manual describes all optional functions of KND 1000M, in “specification list”
under appendices it has also introduced varied functions of the CNC system. Look up the
options incorporated into your system in the manual written by the machine tool builder.
Also look up the manual written by the machine tool builder for the specification,
operation for the operator’s panel.

1.1 General Flow of Operation of CNC Machine Tool

When machining a part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program, then
operate the CNC machine by using the program.

(1) First, prepare the program from a part drawing for cutting. How to prepare the
program is described in “II. PROGRAMMING”.
(2) The program is to be read into the CNC system. Then, mount the work pieces and
tools on the machine, and operate the tools according to the programming. Finally,
execute the machining actually.
How to operate the CNC system is described in “III. OPERATION”.
 Ⅰ Overview －1(General) 1 － 2

MDI/LCD
Part Cutting

drawing program Machine

CNC

system
Disk

Refer to‘Programming’ Refer to‘Operation’

1.2 Notes On Reading This Manual
The function of a CNC machine tool system depends not only on the CNC, but on
the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, and driving system, etc. And
details about the function, programming, and operation relating to all combinations can
be determined only based on a concrete machine.
option

function
Option function
1 . . .
N

Interface
CNC basic function

CNC system
From figure above one can see, a CNC system consists of basic function, optional
functions and interfaces, etc., different machines will have different optional functions and
interface designs. Please look up the manual from the machine builder.
(2) As mentioned above, KND 1000 CNC system is a universal system. This manual
provides a general description about various functions of the CNC system. For a machine
designer, in addition to read this manual, he shall also read the connection manual, only in
this way can he understand in an all-sided way the functions of the system. And only
based on above, can he give play to these functions optimally so that the machine tool can
reach its optimal performance. In addition, this manual is only a description about functions,
for a certain function, it is different on different machines, and it’s impossible to present all
examples for concrete use, so please do refer to the manual from the machine builder.
(3) K1000M has the following variations:
K1000MA ：Universal 3-axis system, using 7.4″ monochrome LCD.
K1000MB ：Universal 3-axis system, using 7.5″ color LCD.
K1000M4A ：Universal 4-axis system, using 7.4″ monochrome LCD.
K1000M4B ：Universal 4-axis system, using 7.5″ color LCD.
The order cost will be different depending on functions, for details, please refer to
the order list from KND.
(4) This manual is prepared based on system main board version 0012I-W01Z-0106,
and system software version K1000MI0601 05.12.22.
(5) As for the differences of systems with other software versions, please refer to
“Additional Description”.
(6) For additional description for K1000M 4-axis system, refer to “Appendix –12”.
(7) For preparing PLC programs by oneself, please read carefully the PLC User
 Ⅰ Overview －1(General) 1 － 3
Manual.

★ Important:
K1000M system is of electronic disk function. After commissioning the machine,
please save current data of the system into the electronic disk. In this way, it is possible to
restore the system rapidly when current data of system is lost and becomes disorder
hence can’t work. As for the operating way please refer to “Operation 12-2”.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-０

II PROGRAMMING
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-１

1
GENERAL

1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-

INTERPOLATION
The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure
(See II-4).

EXPLANATIONS
● Tool movement along a straight line

Program
G01 X_ _ Y_ _ ;
X_ _ ;
Workpiece
Tool
Fig.1.1 (a) Tool movement along a straight line

●Tool movement along an arc

Program
G03 X_ Y_ R_ ；

Workpiece Tool

Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc

The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts is
called the interpolation function.
Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called the preparatory
function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-２

Control unit

(a) Movement along straight

line X-axis(motor)
G01 Y__; interpolation
X__Y__;
Y-axis(motor)
(b) Movement along arc
G03X__Y__R__; a)Movement along
straight line
b) Movement along
arc Tool movement

Fig. 1.1 (c) Interpolation function

NOTE:
Some machines move tables instead of tools but this manual assumes that tools are
moved against workpieces.

1.2 FEED- FEED FUNCTION(See II-5)

Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed.

F
mm/min Tool

Workpiece

Table
Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function

Feedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example, to feed the tool
at a rate of 150 mm/min, specify the following in program: F150.0
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed function (See II-5).

1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT

1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific position)
A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and
programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this
position. This position is called the reference position.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-３

Reference position

Tool
Workpiece

Table

Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Reference position

EXPLANATIONS
The tool can be moved to the reference position in two ways:
(1) Manual reference position return
Reference position return is performed by manual button operation.

(2) Automatic reference position return

In general, manual reference position return is performed first after the power is
turned on. In order to move the tool to the reference position for tool change
thereafter, the function of automatic reference position return is used.

1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System

Specified by CNC Coordinate System
Tool

Y Y
Z Z
Program Y
Z

command workpiece
X X
X
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC Machine tool

Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system

 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-４

EXPLANATIONS
● Coordinate system
The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:
(1) Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data,
the coordinate values on this coordinate system are used.
(2) Coordinate system specified by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared on the actual machine tool table. This
can be achieved by programming the distance from the current position of
the tool to the zero point of the coordinate system to be set.

200
Present tool position

Program zero point 300

Distance to the zero point of a
0 coordinate system to be set

Fig. 1.3.2 (b) Coordinate system specified by the CNC

The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is determined when
a workpiece is set on the table.
Y Tool
Y

Workpiece Coordinate system on part drawing

established on the workpiece
X
Coordinate system specified by the
X CNC established on the table
Table

Fig. 1.3.2 (c) Coordinate system specified by CNC and coordinate system on
part drawing
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with
the command program generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part
drawing, and cuts a workpiece into a shape on the drawing. Therefore, in order to
correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems
must be set at the same position.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-５

• Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position

To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, simple methods shall be
used according to workpiece shape, the number of machining.
(1) Using a standard plane and point of the workpiece.

Workpiece’s standard point

Fixed distance

Bring the tool center to the workpiece standard point. And set the coordinate
system specified by CNC at this position.

(2) Mounting a workpiece directly against the jig

Program zero point

Jig

Meet the tool center to the reference position. And set the coordinate system
specified by CNC at this position. (Jig shall be mounted on the predetermined
point from the reference position.)

(3) Mounting a workpiece on a pallet, then mounting the workpiece and pallet on
the jig

pallet

Jig (Jig and coordinate system shall be

Workpiece specified by the same as (2)).
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-６

1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool –

Absolute, Incremental instructions
EXPLANATIONS
Coordinate values of command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute or
incremental designation (See II-8).
• Absolute coordinates
The tool moves to a point at ”the distance from zero point of the coordinate system”
that is to the position of the coordinate values.

Tool

Z
A (15，60，40)

B (10，30，20)
Y

X
Command specifying movement from point A to point B
G90 X10.0 Y30.0 Z20.0;
Coordinates of point B

• Incremental coordinates
Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position.

Tool
Z
A 10
30

40

B
Y

X
Command specifying movement from point A to point B
G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 Z-10.0;
Distance and direction for movement along each axis
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-７

1.4 CUTTING SPEED – SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(see II-9)

The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is
called the cutting speed. As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the
spindle speed in rpm unit.
Tool
Diameter

RPM

V (mm/min)

Workpiece

EXAMPLES

<When a workpiece should be machined with a tool 100 mm in diameter at a

cutting speed of 80 mm/min. >
The spindle speed is approximately 250 rpm, which is obtained from N=1000v/πD.
Hence the following command is required: S250;
Commands related to the spindle speed are called the spindle speed function (See
II-9).

1.5 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING

(TOOL FUNCTION) (see II-10)
When drilling, tapping, boring, milling or the like, is performed, it is necessary to
select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool and the number is
specified in the program, the corresponding tool is selected.

Tool number

01

ATC magazine
02
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-８

EXAMPLES
<When No.01 is assigned to drilling tool>
When the tool is stored at location 01 in the ATC magazine, the tool can be
selected by specifying T01. This is called the tool function (See II-10)

1.6 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS

–MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
When machining is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle, and feed
coolant. For this purpose, on-off operations of spindle motor and coolant valve
should be controlled (See II-11).

Spindle rotate

Tool coolant

Workpiece

The function of specifying the on-off operations of the components of the machine
is called the miscellaneous function. In general, the function is specified by an M
code. For example, when M03 is specified, the spindle is rotated clockwise at the
specified spindle speed.
1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the
program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an
arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. In the program, specify the
commands in the sequence of actual tool movements.

Block
Block
Tool movement
Block
Program
sequence
Block

Block

Fig. 1.7 (a) Program configuration

 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-９

A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The
program consists of a group of blocks for a series of machining. The number for
discriminating each block is called the sequence number, and the number for
discriminating each program is called the program number (See II-12).
EXPLANATIONS
• Block
The block and the program have the following configurations.
1 Block
NOOOO GOO XOO.O YOO.O MOO SOO TOO;

N: Sequence number
G: Preparatory function
X, Y: Dimension word
M: Miscellaneous function
S: Spindle function
T: Tool function
; : End of block
Fig. 1.7 (b) Block configuration
A block has a sequence number at its head, which identifies the block, and an
end-of-block code at the end, indicating the end of the block. This manual indicates
the end-of-block code by ;.
• Program
Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block (;) code at the
beginning of the program, and a program end code (M02 or M30) is specified at the
end of the program.

；
O□□□□； Program number
Block
Block
Block

M30； End of program

Fig. 1.7 (c) Program configuration

• Main program and subprogram

When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a program, a
program for the pattern is created. This is called the subprogram. On the other
hand, the original program is called the main program. When a subprogram
execution command appears during execution of the main program, commands of
the subprogram are executed. When execution of the subprogram is finished, the
sequence returns to the main program.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-１０

Main program subprogram#1

O1001
program for
M98P1001
pole #1
M99
M98P1002
subprogram#2
M98P1001 O1002 program for
pole#2
M99

Pole #1 Pole #1

Pole #2Pole #2

1.8 TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM

EXPLANATIONS
• Machining using the end of cutter-Tool length compensation function (See II-14.1)
Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The tools have different
tool length. It is very troublesome to change the program in accordance with the tools.
Therefore, the length of each tool used should be measured in advance. By setting
the difference between the length of the standard tool and the length of each tool in
the CNC (data display and setting: see III-11), machining can be performed without
altering the program even when the tool is changed. This function is called tool length
compensation.

H2 H3
H1 H4

Workpiece
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-１１

• Machining using the Side of cutter-Cutter compensation function (See II-14.2)

Because a cutter has a radius, the center of the cutter path goes around the
workpiece with the cutter radius deviated.

Tool

Cutter path using cutter compensation

Machined part figure

Workpiece

If radius of cutters are stored in the CNC (Data Display and Setting: see III-11), the
tool can be moved by cutter radius apart from the machining part figure. This
function is called cutter compensation.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-1（GENERAL） 1-１２

1.9 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE-STROKE

Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent
tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can move is called
the stroke.

Table

motor

Reference position

Besides strokes defined with limit switches, the operator can define an area which
the tool cannot enter using a program or data in memory (see III-11). This function
is called stroke check.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-2 (CONTROLLED AXES) 2-0

2 CONTROLLED AXES

2.1 CONTROLLED AXES

K1000M4:4 axes
Number of controlled axes K1000M:3 axes（X,Y,Z）
（X,Y,Z,4th）
Simultaneously controlled axes K1000M:3 axes K1000M4:4 axes

2.2 NAME OF AXES

Names of the three basic axes are fixed as X, Y, and Z. Names of
additional axes can be optionally selected from A, B, C, U, V, and W.
They can be set by parameter No. 008 #2, #3, #4.

2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM

Least command increment Least input increment Maximum stroke

0.001mm 0.001mm 9999.99mm

0.0001inch 0.0001inch 999.9999inch

Combined use of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed.
There are functions that cannot be used between axes with different unit
systems (circular interpolation, cutter compensation, etc.). For the
increment system, see the machine tool builder’s manual.

2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE

Maximum stroke = Least command increment x 99999999
See 2.3 Increment System.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-3（PREPARATORY FUNCTION） 3 -０

3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION（G FUNCTION）

3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION（G CODES）

A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the
concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types.

Type Meaning
The G code is effective only in the block in which it
One-shot G code is specified.
The G code is effective until another G code of the
Modal G code
same group is specified.

Example:
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01X _;
Z _; G01 is effective in this range.
X _;
G00 Z_;

Explanations

1. Modal G codes have the following initial conditions when the power is turned on
or the system is reset to the clear state (bit 6 of parameter No. 045).
1) Those G codes marked* in Table 3 are specified automatically.
2) G20 and G21 retain their original conditions.
3) G00 or G01 is automatically selected according to parameter setting.

2. The G codes of group 00 are one-shot G codes.

3. If a G code that does not appear in the G code list is specified, or a G code
whose options are not supported is specified, alarm No. 010 is displayed.

4. Multiple G codes of different groups can be specified in a single block. When

multiple G codes of one group are specified in a block, the G code specified last
is effective.

5. If any G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle mode, the canned cycle
is automatically cancelled and the G80 condition is entered. However, a G code
of group 01 is not affected by any of the canned cycle G codes.
6. A G code is displayed from each group.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-3（PREPARATORY FUNCTION） 3 -１

Table 3 G code list (1/2)

G code Group Function
G00 Positioning
*G01 Linear interpolation
01
G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
00
G10 Offset value setting
*G17 XY plane selection
G18 02 ZX plane selection
G19 YZ plane selection
G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Return to reference position
G29 00 Return from reference position
G31 Skip function
G39 Corner circular interpolation
*G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 07 Cutter compensation left
G42 Cutter compensation right
G43 Tool length compensation + direction
G44 08 Tool length compensation - direction
*G49 Tool length compensation cancel

*G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection

G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
05
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection

G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection

G65 00 Macro call

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-3（PREPARATORY FUNCTION） 3 -２

Table 3 G code list(2/2)

G code Group Function
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle

*G80 Canned cycle cancel

G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle or external operation function

G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle

09
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G93 01 Tapping cycle
G90 Absolute command
03
G91 Increment command
G92 00 Setting for work coordinate system
G98 Return to initial point in canned cycle
10
G99 Return to R point in canned cycle
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-4(INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS) 4 - 0

4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

4.1 POSITIONING (G00)

The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified
with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the
absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. In the
incremental command the distance the tool moves is programmed.
Format
G00 IP _;
IP _: For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end position, and for
an incremental command, the distance of the tool moves.
Explanations
Tool path generally does not become a straight line.
Start position

on linear position

End position

NOTE:
1 The rapid traverse rate in the G00 command is set by the parameter No. 038 to 040
for each axis independently by the machine tool builder. The rapid traverse rate
cannot be specified in the address F. Feed rate specified by address F is valid.
2 The above parameter is in 3-axis NC system. When 4-axis is selected, parameter
number is in APPENDIX 7 note2 and 3. Parameter number without special
description in this manual is in 3-axis CNC system.

4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)

Format
G01 IP _F_;
IP _: For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end position, and for
an incremental command, the distance of the tool moves.
F_; Speed of tool feed (Feedrate)

Explanations
A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F. The
feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be
specified for each block. It is set by the parameter of No.65. The feedrate commanded
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-4(INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS) 4 - 1

by the F code is measured along the tool path. If the F code is not commanded, the
feedrate is regarded as zero. The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows.
G01 Xα Yβ Zγ F f
α
Feed rate of X-axis direction: Fx = × f
L
β
Feed rate of Y-axis direction: FY = ×f
L
γ
Feed rate of Z-axis direction: Fz = ×f
L
L = α 2 + β2 + γ 2
Examples:
• Linear interpolation
G91 G01 X200.0 Y100.0 F200.0

Y
End position
100.0

0 X
start position 200.0

4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

The command below will move a tool along a circular arc.
Arc in the X Y plane
G02 R_
G17 X_ Y_ F_;
G03 I_ J_

Arc in the Z X plane

G02 R_
G18 G03 X_ Z_ I_ K_ F_;

Arc in the Y Z plane

G02 R_
G19 F_;
G03 Y_ Z_ J_ K_
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-4(INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS) 4 - 2

Command Description
G17 Specification of arc on XY plane
G18 Specification of arc on ZX plane
G19 Specification of arc on ZY plane
G02 Circular Interpolation Clockwise direction (CW)
G03 Circular Interpolation Counterclockwise direction (CCW)
X_ Command values of X axis or its parallel axis
Y_ Command values of Y axis or its parallel axis
Z_ Command values of Z axis or its parallel axis
I_ X axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
J_ Y axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
K_ Z axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
R_ Arc radius with sign fixed to radius designation.
F_ Feedrate along the arc

Explanations

•Direction of the circular interpolation

“Clockwise”(G02) and “counter clockwise”(G03) on the XY plane (ZX plane or YZ
plane) are defined when the XY plane is viewed in the positive-to-negative
direction of the Z-axis (Y axis or X axis, respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate
system. See the figure below.

Y X Z

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

X
Z Y
G17 G18 G19

•Distance moved on an arc

The end point of an arc is specified by address X, Y or Z, and is expressed as an
absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value,
the distance of the end point, which is viewed from the start point of the arc, is
specified.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-4(INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS) 4 - 3

•Distance from the start point to the center of arc

The arc center is specified by addresses I, J and K for the X, Y, and Z axes,
respectively. The numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is a vector
component in which the arc center is seen from the start point, and is always
specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and G91, as shown below. I,
J and K must be signed according to the direction.

End point(X，Y) End point(Z，X) End point(Y，Z)

Start point Start point

Start point

center J I K
center center

I K J

I0, J0, and K0 can be omitted. When X, Y, and Z are omitted (the end point is the
same as the start point) and the center is specified with I, J and K, a 360°arc
(circle) is specified. G02I; Command for a circle

•Arc radius
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can
be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case,
one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180°are considered. When
an arc exceeding 180 ° is commanded, the radius must be specified with a
negative value. If X, Y, and Z are all omitted, if the end point is located at the same
position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of 0°is programmed G02R ;
(The cutter does not move.)

EXAMPLE:
For arc (1) (less than 180°)
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP20.0 R50.0 F300.0;
For arc (2) (greater than 180°
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP20.0 R-50.0 F300.0;

R=50
End point

2
Start point R=50
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-4(INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS) 4 - 4

•Feedrate
The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feed rate specified by the F
code, and the feedrate along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the arc) is
controlled to be the specified feedrate. The error between the specified feedrate
and the actual tool feedrate is ±2% or less. However, this feed rate is measured
along the arc after the cutter compensation is applied.

•Restrictions
If I, J, K and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by
address R takes precedence and the other are ignored. If an axis not comprising
the specified plane is commanded, an alarm is displayed. When an arc having a
center angle close to 180° is specified using its radius R, the system may fail to
calculate the center of the arc correctly. Therefore, specify the arc with I, J and K.

EXAMPLES:
Y

100
R50

60
R60
40

90 120 140 200

The above tool path can be programmed as follows:

(1) In absolute programming
G92 X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ；
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 I-60.0 F300.0 ；
G02 X120.0 Y60.0 I-50.0 ；
or
G92 X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ；
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300.0 ；
G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ；

(2) In incremental programming

G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 I-60.0 F300.0 ；
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 I-50.0 ；
or
G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 R60.0 F300.0 ；
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 R50.0 ；
 ⅡPROGRAMMING-4(INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS) 4 - 5

Note：
1、 In circular interpolation,the I0, J0, or K0 can be omitted.
2、 By omitting X, Y and Z , when the end of an arc si equal to the start point, and
commanding an arc center by I, J and K, an arc of 360°(a complete circle) is
programmed.
G02 I_ ； (A complete circle)
In radius programming, an arc of 0°is programmed. Namely, the cutter does
not move.
G02 R_ ； (no movement)

3、 The error between the specified feed rate and the actual cutter feed rate is ±2%
or less. In cutter radius compensation, the actual cutter feed rate is measured on
the cutter center path.
4、 If the address I，J，K and R are specified in the same block, the arc specified by
address R is effective and the others are ignored.
5、 If an additional axis is specified in the commanded plane, an alarm is displayed.

4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION

Format

G17 G02/G03 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ;
G17 ：Specification of arc on XY plane, G18 or G19 can be selected
G02/G03 ： ：rotation direction
X_ Y_ ： ：end point position
R_ ： ：radius of arc center
Z_ ： ：end point position of the additional axis
F_ ： ：feed rate
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－5（FEED FUNCTION） 5-0 5-0

5 FEED FUNCTION

5.1 GENERAL
The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions
are available:

•Feed functions
1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid
traverse feedrate set in the CNC (parameter No. 038 to 040).

2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.

•Override
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using the switch
on the machine operator’s panel.

•Automatic acceleration/ deceleration

To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied
when the tool starts and ends its movement.
Rapid traverse: Linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration) (№.041～
043)
Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (constant time constant)
(№.047)
Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (constant time constant)(№.047)

feedrate after interpolation feedrate after acceleration/deceleration

acceleration/
Pulse distribution driver control
CNC deceleration
stepper motor
（interpolation） acceleration/
command driver control
deceleration
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－5（FEED FUNCTION） 5-1 5-1

feedrate

interpolation

acceleration/deceleration

time

Rapid traverse rate

TR：: Acceleration/deceleration timeconstant for rapid

(parameterNo.041, No.042, No.043)

time
TR TR

cutting feed, jog feed

TC ：Acceleration/deceleration time constant for
feedrate. （parameter047）

time
TC TC

•Tool path in a cutting feed

If the direction of movement changes between specified blocks during cutting feed,
a rounded-corner path may result. Because of automatic acceleration and
deceleration, corners are not cut sharply. The dwell command (G04) must be
inserted between the two blocks to cut a sharp corner.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－5（FEED FUNCTION） 5-2 5-2

At the point, insert the dwell command

X Programmed path

Tool path

If the dwell command is inserted, the actual tool path matches the programmed
path. The faster the feedrate and the larger the acceleration/deceleration time
constant, the larger the error at the corner. In circular interpolation, the actual arc
radius is smaller than that of the programmed arc. This error can be minimized by
making the acceleration/deceleration time constant of feedrate small.

NOTE:
The following chart shows feedrate changes between blocks of information
specifying different types of movement.
previous block
Positioning Feed Not moving
Next block
Positioning × × ×
Feed × ○ ×
Not moving × × ×
×: The next block is executed after commanded rate has decreased to zero.
○: The next block is executed sequentially so that the feedrate is not changed by
very much.

5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE

Format
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)
IP_ ; Dimension word for the end point
Explanations
The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse. In rapid
traverse, the next block is executed after the specified feedrate becomes 0 and the
servo motor reaches a certain range set by the machine tool builder (in-position
check). (In-position check can be disabled for each block by setting bit 5 of
parameter No. 020 to 1.) A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－5（FEED FUNCTION） 5-3 5-3

038to 040, so no rapid traverse feedrate need be programmed.

The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the switch on
the machine operator’s panel:
F0, 25, 50, 100%
F0: Allows a fixed feedrate to be set for each axis by parameter No. 051
For detailed information, refer to the appropriate manual of the machine tool
builder.

5.3 CUTTING FEED

Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. re
commanded with numbers after the F code. In cutting feed, the next block is
executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block is minimized.

EXPLANATIONS
•Tangential speed constant control
Cutting feed is controlled so that the tangential feedrate is always set at a specified
feedrate.
X
X Start point
FZ

F End point FX F

FX End point
FZ
Z
Start point Z
Linear interpolation Arc interpolation
Tangential feedrate (F)

F: tangential feedrate F = FX 2 + FZ 2
FX: X-axis feedrate
FZ: Z-axis feedrate

• Cutting feedrate clamp

A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis with
parameter No. 045. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override applied) exceeds
a specified upper limit, it is clamped to the upper limit. An upper limit is set in
mm/min or inch/min. CNC calculation may involve a feedrate error of ±2% with
respect to a specified value. However, this is not true for acceleration/deceleration.
To be more specific, this error is calculated with respect to a measurement on the
time the tool takes to move 500 mm or more during the steady state.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－5（FEED FUNCTION） 5-4 5-4

• Feedrate override
Feedrate can be overridden by a switch located on operator’s panel, from 0 to
150% (step 10%).

5.4 DWELL (G04)

FORMAT
Dwell G04 X_ ; or G04 P_ ;
X_ : Specify a time (decimal point permitted)
P_ : Specify a time (decimal point not permitted)

EXPLANATIONS
By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified
time. When neither P nor X is specified, exact stop is performed.

Command value range of the dwell time (Command by X)

Command value range Dwell time unit

0.001 to 99999.999s s

Command value range of the dwell time (Command by p)

Command value range Dwell time unit

1 to 99999999 0.001s
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-6(REFERANCE POSITION) 6-0 6-0

6 REFERENCE POSITION

6．General
•REFERENCE POSITION
The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can
easily be moved by the reference position return function. For example, the
reference position is used as a position at which tools are automatically changed.
Up to two reference positions can be specified by setting coordinates in the
machine coordinate system in parameters. The first reference position must be the
machine zero point.

workpiece

Reference position

• Reference position return and movement from the reference

position
Tools are automatically moved to the reference position via an intermediate
position along a specified axis. Or, tools are automatically moved from the
reference position to a specified position via an intermediate position along a
specified axis. When reference position return is completed, the lamp for indicating
the completion of return goes on.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-6(REFERANCE POSITION) 6-1 6-1

Reference position return A→B→R R (Reference position)

Return from the reference position R→B→C

B intermediate

A (Start position for reference position return)

C (Destination of return from the reference position)

Reference position return and return form the reference position

•Reference position return check

The reference position return check (G27) is the function which checks whether the
tool has correctly returned to the reference position as specified in the program. If
the tool has correctly returned to the reference position along a specified axis, the
lamp for the axis goes on.

• Reference position return

G28 IP_; Reference position return
IP: Command specifying the intermediate position (Absolute/incremental
command)

•Return from reference position

G29 IP_;
IP: Command specifying the destination of return from reference position
(Absolute/incremental command)

•Reference position return check

G27 IP_;
IP: Command specifying the reference position (Absolute/incremental command)

EXPLANATION

•Reference position return (G28)

Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the rapid
traverse rate of each axis. Therefore, for safety, the cutter compensation, and tool
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-6(REFERANCE POSITION) 6-2 6-2

length compensation should be cancelled before executing this command. The

coordinates for the intermediate position are stored in the CNC only for the axes
for which a value is specified in a G28 block. For the other axes, the previously
specified coordinates are used.
EXAMPLE:
N1 G28 X40.0 ; Intermediate position (X40.0)
N2 G28 Y60.0 ; Intermediate position (X40.0, Y60.0)
•Return from reference position(G29)
In general, it is commanded immediately following the G28 command or G30. For
incremental programming, the command value specifies the incremental value
from the intermediate point. Positioning to the intermediate or reference points are
performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis. When the workpiece coordinate
system is changed after the tool reaches the reference position through the
intermediate point by the G28 command, the intermediate point also shifts to a
new coordinate system. If G29 is then commanded, the tool moves to the
commanded position through the intermediate point which has been shifted to the
new coordinate system.

•Reference position return check(G27)

G27 command positions the tool at rapid traverse rate. If the tool reaches the
reference position, the reference position return lamp lights up. However, if the
position reached by the tool is not the reference position, an alarm is displayed.

RESTRICTIONS
•Status the machine lock being turned on
The lamp for indicating the completion of return does not go on when the machine
lock is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference
position. In this case, it is not checked whether the tool has returned to the
reference position even when a G27 command is specified.

•First return to the reference position after power on (without an absolute position
detector)
When the G28 command is specified when manual return to the reference position
has not been performed after the power has been turned on, the movement from
the intermediate point is the same as in manual return to the reference position. In
this case, the tool moves in the direction for reference position return specified in
parameter ( No. 006 ZMX ZMY ZMZ). Therefore the specified intermediate position
must be a position to which reference position return is possible.

EXAMPLES
G28G90X1000.0Y500.0 ; (Programs movement from A to B)
T1111 ; (Changing the tool at the reference position)
G29X1300.0Y200.0 ; (Programs movement from B to C)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING-6(REFERANCE POSITION) 6-3 6-3

The tool is changed at the reference position R

Y
Reference position

700 B
Intermediate position

500
A
300 C

300 1300 1800 X（mm）

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－7（COORDINATE SYSTEM） 7-1

7. COORDINATE SYSTEM
By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position.
Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system.
Coordinates are specified using program axes.
When three program axes, the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, are used, coordinates
are specified as follows:
X_Y_Z__
This command is referred to as a dimension word
Z

20.0

Y
30.0

40.0
. X
Tool Position Specified by X40.0Y50.0Z25.0

Coordinates are specified in one of following three coordinate systems:

(1)Machine coordinate system
(2)Workpiece coordinate system
(3)Local coordinate system
The number of the axes of a coordinate system varies from one machine to another.
So, in this manual, a dimension word is represented as IP_.

7.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece
coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the NC
beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system). A machining program sets a
workpiece coordinate system (selecting a workpiece coordinate system). A set
workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin (changing a
workpiece coordinate system).

7.1.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System

A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
(1) Method using G92
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value after G92 in the
program.

(2) Automatic setting

If bit APRS of parameter No. 012 is set beforehand, a workpiece coordinate
system is automatically set when manual reference position return is
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－7（COORDINATE SYSTEM） 7-2

performed.

(3) Input using the CRT/MDI panel

Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set beforehand using the CRT/MDI
panel.
To use absolute programming, establish a workpiece coordinate system by
applying one of the methods described above.
•FORMAT
Setting a workpiece coordinate system by G92
G92 _ IP；

EXPLANATIONS
A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool
tip, is at specified coordinates. If a coordinate system is set using G92 during tool
length offset, a coordinate system in which the position before offset matches the
position specified in G92 is set. Cutter compensation is cancelled temporarily with
G92.
Example:
If setting the value of parameter № .076 ～ 078 α、β、γ , then reference zero
return, the tool base-point coordinate is X=α,Y=β,Z=γ. Work coordinate is set.
We can auomatic set work coordinate using the commanding G92.
G92 _ IP

Z tool

Setting the coordinate system by the

23.0 G92X25.2Z23.0; command
(The tool tip is the start point for the
program.)

X
25.3
G92 X25.3 Z23.0 *
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－7（COORDINATE SYSTEM） 7-3

Z Setting the coordinate system by

Base point the G92 command (The base point
1200 on the tool holder is the start point
for the program.) If an absolute
command is issued, the base point
moves to the commanded position.
In order to move the tool tip to the
commanded position, the
difference from the tool tip to the
600 X
base point is compensated by tool
length offset.
G92X600.0Z1200.0;
7.2 PLANE SELECTION
Select the planes for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and drilling by G-
code. The following table lists G-codes and the planes selected by them.

EXPLANATIONS
Plane selected by G code
Selected
G code X Y Z
plane
G17 X Y plane y-axis or an z-axis or an
X-axis or an
G18 Z X plane axis parallel to axis parallel to
axis parallel to it
G19 Y Z plane it it

X, Y, Z are determined by the axis address appeared in the block in which G17,
G18 or G19 is commanded. When an axis address is omitted in G17, G18 or G19
block, it is assumed that the addresses of basic three axes are omitted.The plane
is unchanged in the block in which G17, G18 or G19 is not commanded.

EXAMPLES
G17 X_Y_; XY plane,
G18 X_Z_ ; ZX plane
X_Y_; Plane is unchanged (ZX plane)
G17 XY plane
G18 ZX plane
G18 Y_ ; ZX plane, Y axis moves regardless without any relation to the
plane.

NOTE:
When the system is turned on or placed in the clear state by a reset, G17, G18 or
G19 is selected according to the setting parameter.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－8（COORDINATE AND DIMENSION） 8 - 1

8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91)
There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute command, and
the incremental command. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the
end position is programmed; in the incremental command, move distance of the
position itself is programmed. G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or
incremental command, respectively.

FORMAT
G90 IP _ ; Absolute command
G91 IP_ ; Incremental command

EXAMPLES
Y

End point
70.0

30.0 Start point

X
40.0 100.0
G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; Absolute command
G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ; Incremental command

8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION(G20,G21)

Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.

unit G code Least command increment

inch G20 0.0001inch
metric G21 0.001 mm

This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the

coordinate system at the beginning of the program. After the G code for
inch/metric conversion is specified, the unit of input data is switched to the least
inch or metric input increment of increment system. The unit of data input for
degrees remains unchanged. The unit systems for the following values are
changed after inch/metric conversion:
(1) Feedrate commanded by F code
(2) Positional command
(3) Work zero point offset value
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－8（COORDINATE AND DIMENSION） 8 - 2

(4) Unit of scale for manual pulse generator

(5) Movement distance in incremental feed
(6) Some parameters
When the power is turned on, the G code is the same as that held before the
power was turn off.

WARNING
1 G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program.
2 When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, the
tool compensation value must be reset according to the least input
increment.

NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems
are different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment.
This error is not accumulated.
2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using settings.

8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be
used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be
specified with the following addresses: X, Y, Z, I, J, K, Q, R, and F

EXAMPLES:
Pocket calculator type Standard type
Program command decimal point decimal point
programming programming
1mm
X1000
1000mm Unit : Least input
Command value without
Unit : mm increment (0.001
decimal point
mm)

X1000.0
1000mm 1000mm
Command value with decimal
Unit : mm Unit : mm
point

NOTE
1 In the dwell command, decimal point can be used with address X but not with
address P.(This is because P is also used for a sequence number.)

2 In a single block, specify a G code before entering a value. The position of

decimal point may depend on the command.
Examples:
G20; Input in inches
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－8（COORDINATE AND DIMENSION） 8 - 3

X1.0 G04; X1.0 is considered to be a distance and processed as X10000.

This command is equivalent to G04 X10000. The tool dwells for 10
seconds.
G04 X1.0; Equivalent to G04 X1000. The tool dwells for one second.

3 There is great difference in values with and without the decimal point.
G21; (millimeter dimensions)
X1. X 1mm
X1 X 0.001mm
G20; (inch dimensions)
X1. X 1inch
X1 X 0.0001inch

4 Values with and without a decimal point can be specified together.

X1000 Z23.7;
X10. Z22359;

5 Fractions less than the least input increment are truncated.

Examples:
X1.2345; Truncated to X1.234 when the least input increment is 0.001 mm.
Processed as X1.2345 when the least input increment is 0.0001 inch.

6 When more than eight digits are specified, an alarm occurs. If a value is entered
with a decimal point, the number of digits is also checked after the value is
converted to an integer according to the least input increment.
Examples:
X1.23456789; Alarm 003 occurs because more than eight digits are specified.
X123456.7; If the least input increment is 0.001 mm, the value is converted to
integer 123456700. Because the integer has more than eight
digits, an alarm occurs.

7 A decimal point is default setting or not by using parameter P013 PODI.

PODI: When the addresses that decimal points can be specified in a program
haven’t decimal point, a decimal point is conformed to exit.
X100=X100. (X100mm)
8 A decimal point is necessary or not by using parameter P014 PODI, in order to
prevent a decimal point omitting in absolute programming.
POD 0: a decimal point is optional
1: a decimal point is necessary, or an alarm occurs (No.007).

SPECIAL EXAMPLE:
1 Though F100.=F100, when parameter POD=1, a decimal point is
necessary.(F100.)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－8（COORDINATE AND DIMENSION） 8 - 4

2 Address Q can specify with the decimal point, when macro variables DO=1, 1. or
0.01 must be specified in address Q. If the low eight-bit of macro variables #1132
are 1: G65 H01 #1132 Q0.255
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－9（SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION） 9 - 0

9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)

The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value

following
address S.
This chapter contains the following topics.
9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE
9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY
(S4-DIGIT COMMAND)

9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A BINARY CODE

A 2-digit S code can be specified in a block. We can provide eight-level spindle
speed function. For a description of the use of S codes, such as their execution
sequence in a block in which a spindle speed, move command, and S code are
specified, see the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
S1~S8
S code’s execution time is set by the donors No.209.
Setting value: 0~255 (128ms~32.640ms)
Setting time=setting value x 128ms

Setting time

S code execution start Execute the next block

Note:
When more than S code is specified, an alarm occurs and execution stops.
02：S code error
A 2-digit S code is effective, if a 4-digit S code is specified, the last 2-digit is
effective.
S code setting time’s parameter (see 11.2)
9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY
(S4-DIGIT COMMAND)
The spindle speed can be specified directly by address S followed by a four-digit
value (rpm). The unit for specifying the spindle speed may vary depending on the
machine tool builder. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine
tool builder for details.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－9（SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION） 9 - 1

9.2.1 JOG MODE

1 JOGS＝1, S code specifies analogue spindle speed.
2 JOGS＝0, Analogue spindle speed is set by the following parameter in JOG mode.
P61/71(4-axis)：power-on initial value of analogue spindle speed in JOG mode.
unit：rpm
P62/72(4-axis)：incremental value or decrement of analogue spindle speed.
P56/66 is upper limit in increment.
Spindle rotates at the speed to be set by parameter after spindle start-up in Jog
mode. When pressing the spindle override key + or -, each incremental value or
decrement of spindle speed is the increment set by parameter P62/72. Manual
spindle rotational speed is displayed on the address S of POS screen in JOG mode.
In other mode, spindle rotates at the speed specified by S code.

NOTE:
1 Rotational speed specified by parameter is not spindle motor rotational speed but
spindle speed. Spindle analogue voltage is determined by spindle shift inside CNC.
2 If mode shifts between manual and non- manual, spindle speed will change during
rotation.
3 Standard parameter setting: P061＝100 P062＝50
4 JOG mode includes jog feed, handle/step or zero return mode(machine or program
zero return).

9.3 Automatic shifting of analogue spindle (hi/low gear)

The analogue spindle can shift automatically high and low gear. The max. speed of
high gear of the spindle is set at parameter 056, the min. speed of that is at parameter
057, the max. speed of low gear of the spindle is set at parameter 058.
At initial stage after turning on, the system defaults low gear (but it has no output
from the low-gear output interface). When the specified analogue spindle speed
exceeds the max. speed of the low gear, it shifts gear automatically.
Gears-shifting procedure:
（1） Axis stops movement, the analogue spindle outputs speed set by
parameter 021.
（2） After delaying a time set by diagnosis parameter 160, it outputs shifting
signal HIG (or LOW).
（3） Check whether the gear signal HIGI (LOWI) is in position.
（4） After it is in position, delay a time set by diagnosis parameter 161.
（5） The spindle rotates in programmed speed.
（6） After delaying a time set by diagnosis parameter 162, axis stop is cancelled,
the gears-shifting ends.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－9（SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION） 9 - 2

When the analogue spindle rotates at high gear, and the newly specified speed is
lower than the lowest speed of the high gear of the spindle, it will automatically shift
from high gear to low gear. The shifting procedure is same with above mentioned.

NOTE:
When the parameter setting P056≤P058, the system has no automatic shifting
function, it will output in speed set by P056.
 ⅡPROGRAMMING－10（TOOL FUNCTION） 10 - 1

10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)

10. TOOL FUNCTION

10.1 Controlling the unclamping/clamping of tools
(1) Parameter setting: SOLA of DGN201 selects whether it has function to control the
unclamping/clamping of tools.
Diagnosis 201 SOLA
SOLA 1: will control the unclamping/clamping of tools.
0: will not control the unclamping/clamping of tools.

（2） Input signal

Parameter 000 X13
D201 SOLA=1 SOLAI

SOLAI: unclamping/clamping ON/OFF signal.

003 X36
D201 SOLA=1 SLINI
SLINI: Clamping to Position signal.

(3) Output signal

050 S3
D201 SOLA=1 SOLAO
SOLAO: unclamping output signal.

（3） Description about controlling the unclamping/clamping of tools

When spindle is rotating:
● Clamping to Position signal must be (SLINI) 1.
● Tool is clamped (SOLAO＝0).
Otherwise, the spindle stops and the system is paused. Or it’s impossible to start the
spindle as condition is not available. Meanwhile it issues alarm:
014: Song-la tool error.
With spindle stopped, pressing Unclamping the unclamping output will be 1, turning off
Unclamping switch the unclamping output will be 0.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－11（AUXILIARY FUNCTION） 11 - 0

11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION

The auxiliary function: miscellaneous function (M code) for specifying spindle
start, spindle stop program end, and so on, When a move command and
miscellaneous function are specified in the same block, the commands are
executed in one of the following two ways:
i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and miscellaneous
function commands.
ii) Executing miscellaneous function commands upon completion of move
command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder’s
specification. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for
details.

EXAMPLES:
N1 G91 G01 X50.0 Y-50.0 M05 ；(spindle stop)
Y Th e com m ands of m otion and
spind le stop execu te sim ultan eously.

50

50
X

11.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

When a two-digit numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a
strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on
or off its functions. Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block.
Which M code corresponds to which machine function is determined by the
machine tool builder.
M code：
M03 ：spindle CW
M04 ：spindle CCW
M05 ：spindle stop
M08 ：coolant on
M09 ：coolant off
M10 ：clamp
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－11（AUXILIARY FUNCTION） 11 - 1

M11 ：unclamp
M32 ：lubricant on
M33 ：lubricant off
M00 ：program stop
M30 ：end of program
M code’s execution time can be set by diagnose №208 except M00 and M30.
Setting value: 0~255 (128ms~32.640s)
Setting time=setting value×128 ms

Setting time
M code execution start Next block execution start

Sequence diagram and setting time

Spindle CW/CCW

Stop command T1

Interlock signal

Spindle stop T2

Spindle brake
T3
T1: When spindle stop command (automatic or jog) sends as it is rotating, axes
interlock signal is effective at first, spindle stop signal is sent after delaying T1.
(see diagnose №214.)
T2: the delay time from sending spindle stop signal to spindle brake signal is set
by diagnose №215/216.
T3: spindle brake time is set by diagnose №217/218.
NOTE:
1. Other M code expect mentioned is specified in program, an alarm occurs and
execution stops.
01: M code error.
2. M code will be held from beginning, even if mode changed, it can’t be cancelled
in jog mode. “RESET’ is on, M code will be disabled.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－11（AUXILIARY FUNCTION） 11 - 2

EXPLANATIONS
The following M codes have special meaning.
(1) M30
① This indicates the end of the main program.
② Automatic operation is stopped and the CNC unit is reset.
③ After a block specifying the end of the program is executed, control
returns to the start of the program.
④ The number of workpiece will increase one.

(2) M00
① Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is
executed.
② When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains
unchanged as in single block operation.
③ The automatic operation can be restarted by actuating the cycle
operation.

(3) M98
① This code is used to call a subprogram.
② See the subprogram section Ⅱ-12 for details .

NOTE:
1 The block following M00 and M30, is not read into the input buffer register,
2 The code and strobe signals are not sent when M98 and M99 is actuating.
External buzzer output signal:
1 When gear shift or tool exchange in manual mode is set by parameter, a
block including S code or T code actuates in automatic mode, external
buzzer output signal will be sent automatically.

T
T 4T
after advance command finishing, press “CAN” key, external buzzer output
signal stop. If “cycle start” is pressed, the next block will be executed
continuously.
Parameter 012.5 = 0/1 :S code auto/manual execution.
Parameter 012.6 = 0/1 :T code auto/manual execution
.
2 External buzzer output signal will be sent automatically when an alarm
occurs.

T T

T
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－11（AUXILIARY FUNCTION） 11 - 3

Canceling the alarm or pressing “CAN” key external buzzer output stops. T
is set by diagnose №219.

11.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS PARAMETER

Diagnose №160~223 is memorable (using battery) PLC parameter. The user can
define them using the BCD codes under concrete conditions.

SETTING METHOD

(1) Setting
(A) Open program protection
(B) Select the MDI mode.
(C) Press the function button [DGNOS] to display the diagnose parameter
screen.
(D) Move the cursor to the item to be changed.
(E) Input a binary data and press the key INPUT, the data will be changed .

(2) Method of cursor moving

(A) Press PAGE or CURSOR key.
(B) Using index:
P→the desired diagnostic number→INPUT.

№208: M code process time

setting unit: 128ms
setting code: 0~255
setting value: (№208+1) x 128ms
setting field: 128ms~32.768s

№209: S code process time

setting unit: 128ms
setting code: 0~255
setting value: (№209+1) x 128ms
setting field: 128ms~32.768s

№214: Delay time T1 from spindle stop command sending to spindle stop signal
sending
setting unit: 16ms
setting code: 0~255
setting value: №214 x 16ms
setting field: 0~4.096s

№215,216: Delay time from spindle stop signal sending to spindle brake signal
sending
setting unit: 16ms
setting code: 0~65535
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－11（AUXILIARY FUNCTION） 11 - 4

setting value: (№216x256+№215) x 16ms

setting field: 0~1048.560s

№217,218: Spindle brake time

setting unit: 16ms
setting code: 0~65535
setting value: (№218x256+№217) x 16ms
setting field: 0~1048.560s

№219: External buzzer output signal sending time

setting unit: 32ms
setting code: 0~255
setting value: №219 x 32ms
setting field: 0~8.192s

11.3 ALARM RELATED TO AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS

The alarm related to auxiliary functions can display by external information screen.
A alarm occurs, the external information screen will display automatically, on top
of it the alarm details will display, and “ALARM” will flash at the end of the screen.

01：M code error.

Illegal M codes are specified in program.
02：S code error.
Illegal S codes are specified in program.
03：T code error.
Illegal T codes are specified in program.
06：M03，M04 code error.
Spindle is specified rotary CW/CCW without spindle stop while it is rotating.
07：S code is specified as spindle rotating
S code for gear shift is specified while spindle is rotating.
09：Pressing “cycle start” key after gear shift in jog mode.
（parameter P012 BIT5 SMANL=1）
10：Pressing “cycle start” key after tool exchange in jog mode.
（parameter P012 BIT6 TMANL=1）
11：Spindle unit alarm.
12：Pressing “CAN” and “cycle start” key after low gear in jog mode.
（choose analog spindle）
15：Pressing “CAN” and “cycle start” key after high gear in jog mode.
（choose analog spindle）
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 1

12 PROGRAM CONFIGRATION

12.1 General
12.1.1 Main program and subprogram
There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the
CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command
calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program, control is passed to
the subprogram. When a command specifying a return to the main program is
encountered in a subprogram, control is returned to the main program.

Main program subprogram

Instruction 1 Instruction 1
Instruction 2 Instruction 2
...
... ...
... ...
Follow the direction of ...
the subprogram

Instruction N

...
... Return to main
... program

The CNC memory can hold up to 63 main programs and subprograms as

standard. A main program can be selected from the stored main programs to
operate the machine. See Chapter 9 in OPERATION for the methods of
registering and selecting programs.

(2) SUBPROGRAM
If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a
sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the
program. A subprogram can be called from the main program. A called
subprogram can also call another subprogram.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 2

Main program subprogram subprogram

O0001； O1000； O2000；

... ... ...
... ... ...
... ... ...
M98P1000; M98P2000; M98P3000;
... ... ...
... ... ...
... ... ...
... ... ...
M30; M99; M99;

One-level nesting Two-level nesting

When the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one-level

subprogram call. Thus, subprogram calls can be nested up to two levels. When
custom macro is chosen, subprogram calls can be nested up to four levels. A
single call command can repeatedly call a subprogram up to 999 times.

FORMAT

● Subprogram configuration
O ; subprogram number (or the colon (:) optionally in the case of ISO)
.................
....................
................
...
...
... subprogram
...................
.......... .;
M99 ; Subprogram end M99 need not constitute a separate block as
indicated below.

For how to enter subprogram into memory, see Chapter 9 in OPERATION.

NOTE:
For compatibility with other devices, ‘Nxxxx’ is also used as a subprogram number
instead of O(:).

● Subprogram Execution
A subprogram is executed when called by the main program or another
subprogram.
A subprogram call has the following format:
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 3

M98 ○○○○ □□□□

Subprogram number

Number of times the subprogram is to be repeated.

When no repetition data is specified, the subprogram is called just once.

EXAMPLES:
★ M98 P51002 ；
This command specifies “Call the subprogram (number 1002) five times in
succession.” A subprogram call command (M98P_) can be specified in the
same block as a move command.

★ X1000 M98 P1200 ；

This example calls the subprogram (number 1200) after an X movement.

★ Execution sequence of subprograms called from a main program.

Main program subprogram

N0010 ......... ; 2 1 3 O1010 ;
N0020 ......... ; N1020 ...... ;
N0030 M98 P21010 ; N1030 ...... ;

N0040 ......; N1040 ..... ;

N1050 ........ ;
N0050 M98 P1010 ;
N0060 ..... ; N1060 ...... M99 ;

A subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main

program calls a subprogram.

NOTE:
1 If the subprogram number specified by address P can not be found, alarm PS
078 is generated.
2 The subprogram call command ‘M98_;’ can not be input from the MDI. In this
case, prepare the main program in EDIT mode as follows:
Oxxxx;
M98Pxxxx;
M02;
Then execute it in the memory mode.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 4

● Notes on Subprogram Control

1) If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is terminated,
control does not return to the block after the calling block, but returns to the
block with the sequence number specified by P. Note, however, that P is
ignored if the main program is operating in a mode other than memory operation
mode. This method consumes a longer time than the normal return method to
return to the main program.

Main program subprogram

N0010 ………………..; O1010;

N0020………………….; N1020………………..;
N0030………………….; N1030…………… ;
N0040 M98 P1010; N1040……………… ;
N0050…………………..; N1050…………………;
N0060………………… ; N1060………………….;
N0070…………………..; N1070 M99 P0070;

2) If M99 is executed in a main program, control returns to the start of the main
program. For example, M99 can be executed by placing /M99 ; at an
appropriate location of the main program and setting the optional block skip
function to off when executing the main program. When M99 is executed,
control returns to the start of the main program, then execution is repeated
starting at the head of the main program. Execution is repeated while the
optional block skip function is set to off. If the optional block skip function is set
to on, the /M99 ; block is skipped ; control is passed to the next block for
continued execution.

If/M99Pn ; is specified, control returns not to the start of the main program, but to
sequence number n. In this case, a longer time is required to return to sequence
number n.

Main program
N0010……..…;
N0020……..…;
N0030……..…;
N0040……..…;
Optional block N0050……..…;
skip OFF N0060……..…;
Optional
/N0070 M99 P0030;
block
N0080……..…;
skip ON
N0090 M02;
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 5

12.1.2 Program number

A program number consisting of address O followed by a four-digit number is
assigned to each program at the beginning registered in memory to identify the
program.
O □□□□
program number (1～9999, leading zero suppression)
address O
A program begins with a program number and ends with M30; or M99;.

12.1.3 Sequence Number and Block

A program consists of several commands. One command unit is called a block.
One block is separated from another with a“ ;” or “ *” as end of block code.

At the head of a block, a sequence number consisting of address N followed by a

number not longer than four digits (1 to 9999) can be placed.

Sequence numbers can be specified in a random order, and any numbers can be
skipped.

Sequence numbers may be specified for all blocks or only for desired blocks of the
program. In general, however, it is convenient to assign sequence numbers in
ascending order in phase with the machining steps (for example, when a new tool
is used by tool replacement, and machining proceeds to a new surface with table
indexing.)

NOTE:
Program number 0 cannot be used. So“0”must not be used for a sequence
number regarded as a program number.

12.1.4 Optional block skip

When a slash is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip switch on
the machine operator panel is set to on, the information contained in the block is
ignored in memory operation.
When optional block skip switch is set to off, the information contained in the block
for which /is specified is valid. This means that the operator can determine
whether to skip the block containing.
This function is ignored when programs are loaded into memory. Blocks
containing / are also machine operator panel is set to on, the information
contained in the block is ignored in memory operation.
When optional block skip switch is set to off, the information contained in the block
for which /is specified is valid. This means that the operator can determine
whether to skip the block containing.
This function is ignored when programs are loaded into memory. Blocks
containing / are also stored in memory, regardless of how the optional block skip
switch is set.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 6

Programs held in memory can be output, regardless of how the optional block skip
switches are set.
Optional block skip is effective even during sequence number search operation.
The following range is ignored when the optional block skip switch is ON.

/N123 G01 X4…………； N7890

│← range ignored → |
Example:
N100 X100.0 ；
/N101 Z100.0 ；
N102 X200 ；
In the above example, the block of N101 is skipped when switch is ON.

NOTES:
(1) A slash (/) must be specified at the head of a block. If a slash is placed
elsewhere, the information from the slash to immediately before the EOB code
is ignored.

(2) Optional block skip operation is processed when blocks are read from memory
into a buffer. Even if a switch is set to on after blocks are read into a buffer, the
blocks already read are not ignored.

(3) This function is also effective during a sequence number search.

(4) When storing the program in memory, this function is ineffective. A block with a
slash (/) is also stored in the memory regardless of the position of the
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch.

(5) When output the program from memory, the program is output regardless of
the position of the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP switch.

12.1.5 Block configuration (word and address)

A block consists of one or more words. A word consists of an address followed by
a number some digits long. (The plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) may be prefixed to
a number.)
Word = Address + number (Example : X-1000)
For an address, one of the letters (A to Z) is used ; an address defines the
meaning of a number that follows the address. The following table indicates the
usable addresses and their meanings.
The same address may have different meanings, depending on the preparatory
function specification.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 7

Major functions and addresses

Function Address Meaning

Program number O* Program number

Sequence number N Sequence number

Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc, etc.)

X,Y,Z Coordinate axis move command

Dimension word R Arc radius

I,J,K Coordinate of the arc center

Feed function F Rate of feed per minute

Spindle speed function S Spindle speed

Tool function T Tool number

Auxiliary function M On/off control on the machine tool

Offset number H Offset number

Dwell P,X Dwell time

Program number designation P Subprogram number
Number of repetition P Number of subprogram repetitions

Parameter P，Q，R Canned cycle parameter

NOTE:
In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a program number.
If an attempt is made to execute % when M30 is not placed at the end of the
program, and the reset state is set to CNC.

12.1.6 Major addresses and ranges of command values

Major addresses and the ranges of values specified for the addresses are shown
below. Note that these figures represent limits on the CNC side, which are totally
different from limits on the machine tool side. For example, the CNC allows a tool
to traverse up to about 100 m (in millimeter input) along the X axis.
However, an actual stroke along the X axis may be limited to 2 m for a specific
machine tool.
Similarly, the CNC may be able to control a cutting federate of up to 100 m/min,
but the machine tool may not allow more than 3 m/min. When developing a
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 8

program, the user should carefully read the manuals of the machine tool as well
as this manual to be familiar with the restrictions on programming.

Major addresses and ranges of command values

Function Address Input in mm Input in inch

Program number O 1～9999 1～9999

Sequence number N 1～9999 1～9999

Preparatory function G 0～99 0～99

Dimension word X,Y,Z,I,J,K,Q,R ±9999.999mm ±999.9999inch

Feed per minute F 1～15.000mm/min 0.01～600.00inch/min

Spindle speed 0～9999 0～9999

S
function
Tool function T 0～99 0～99

Auxiliary function M 0～99 0～99

Dwell X,P 0～9999.999s 0～9999.999s

Designation of a
program number P 1～9999 1～9999
Repetition count

Offset number H 0～32 0～32

12.2 Program end

The end of a program is indicated by commanding one of the following codes at

the end of the program:

EIA ISO Meaning usage

M30 CR M30 LF For main program

M99 CR M99 LF For subprogram
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－12（PROGRAM CONFIGRATION） 12 - 9

If one of the program end codes is executed in program execution, the CNC
terminates the execution of the program, and the reset state is set. If M30CR or
M30LF is at the end of the program, the program will return its beginning(in AUTO
mode).
When the subprogram end code is executed, control returns to the program that
called the subprogram.

12.3 File end

A file end is indicated by ER(EIA) or %(ISO) specified at the end of the program.

EIA ISO Meaning

ER % Program End

NOTE:
If M30 is not at the end of the program, and ER(EIA) or %(ISO) is about to be
executed, the NC will enter a reset status.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 1

13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

13.1 Canned Cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80～89)

Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a
canned cycle, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single
block with a G function; without canned cycles, normally more than one block is
required. In addition, the use of canned cycles can shorten the program to save
memory.

Table 13.1 (a) lists canned cycles.

Drilling(-Z Operation at the Retraction(+Z
G code bottom of a hole Application
direction) direction)
Rapid
G73 Intermittent feed ── High-speed peck drilling cycle
traverse
G74 Cutting feed Dwell→Spindle CW Cutting feed Left-hand tapping cycle
Rapid
G76 Cutting feed Spindle Orientation Fine boring cycle
traverse
G80 ── ── ── Cancel
Rapid Drilling cycle, spot drilling
G81 Cutting feed ──
traverse cycle
Rapid Drilling cycle, counter boring
G82 Cutting feed Dwell cycle
traverse
Rapid
G83 Intermittent feed ── Peck drilling cycle
traverse
Dwell→Spindle
G84 Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping cycle
CCW
G85 Cutting feed ── Cutting feed Boring cycle
Rapid
G86 Cutting feed Spindle stop Boring cycle
traverse
Rapid
G87 Cutting feed Spindle CW Back boring cycle
traverse
Dwell→ spindle
G88 Cutting feed Manual Boring cycle
stop
G89 Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle

Explanations
A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations (Fig. 13.1 (a))
Operation 1— Positioning of axes X and Y (including also another axis)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 2

Operation 2— Rapid traverse up to point R level

Operation 3— Hole machining
Operation 4— Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5— Retraction to point R level
Operation 6— Rapid traverse up to the initial point

Operation ①
Initial point level

Operation ②
Operation ⑥

R point level

Operation ③ Operation ⑤

Z point
Operation ④
Fig. 13.1 (a) Canned cycle operation sequence

Positioning is performed on the XY plane and drilling is performed on the Z axis.

Positioning and drilling cannot be performed on any other than this plane and axis
combination, this is indifferent to the plane selection G command. Three canned
cycle operations, to be more strict, consists of these three modes, each of which
are specified in a particular modal G code, as shown below.
1) Data format
G90 Absolute;
G91 Incremental.

2) Return point level

G98 Initial point level;
G99 R point level.

3) Drilling mode
G73, G74, G76, G80～89
NOTE:
The initial level means the absolute value of the Z-axis at the time of changing
from the canned cycle cancel mode into the canned cycle mode.

(A) The travel distance along the drilling axis varies for G90 and G91 as follows:
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 3

G90 G91

Z=0

R
R

Point R Point R
Z

Point Z Point Z
Absolute mode Incremental mode

Fig.13.1 (B) Absolute and Incremental programming

(B) When the tool reaches the bottom of a hole, the tool may be returned to point
R or to the initial level. These operations are specified with G98 and G99. The
following illustrates how the tool moves when G98 or G99 is specified.
Generally, G99 is used for the first drilling operation and G98 is used for the
last drilling operation. The initial level does not change even when drilling is
performed in the G99 mode.

G98 (return to the initial level) G99 (return to point R)

Initial level Initial level

R point level

Fig.13.1 (C) Initial point level and R point level

(C) Data related to drilling operation specified subsequent to these

G73,G74,G76,G81 to G89, G98 and G99 constitute one block. This command
permits the data to be stored in the control unit as a modal value. The data
related to drilling operation is commanded as follows:
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 4

G○○ X＿ ＿Y＿ ＿ Z＿ ＿R＿ ＿Q＿ ＿P＿ ＿F＿ ＿;

Hole machining data

Hole positioning data

Hole machining mode

Specified command address specification

Hole machining mode G Refer to table 13.1
Specifies the hole position by an absolute or
Hole positioning data X，Y incremental value. The control mode is the same as
positioning G00.
Specifies the distance from point R to the hole bottom in
increment or the coordinate values of the hole bottom in
absolute. Feed rate in operation 3 depends on the F
Z
code. Feed rate in operation 5 depends on the drilling
mode. (G73,G74,G76,G81 to G89).
R indicates a distance from the initial point to point R in
increment, or the coordinate values of R point position
R
in absolute. Feed rate in operation 2 and 6 is rapid
Hole machining data
traverse.
Specifies a depth of cut at each time in G73 or G83
Q mode, and shift value in G76 or G87 mode (this is
always in incremental value).
Specifies a dwell time in the hole bottom position.
P Relation between actual dwell time and command value
accords with a G04 command.
F Specifies a feed rate in cutting feed.

Because the hole machining mode (G00), if once specified, does not change until
other hole machining mode is specified or until the canned cycle canceling G code
is specified, it is not required to specify the hole machining mode in each block to
execute the same hole machining. The canned cycle canceling G codes are G80
and G codes in the 01 group.
The hole machining data, once specified, remains unchanged until the data is
altered or the canned cycle is cancelled. Accordingly, specify all the required hole
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 5

machining data when starting the hole machining and specify the altered data, if
necessary, during canned cycle.

NOTE:
1 The cutting feed specified by F code is always valid regardless of canceling the
canned cycle.
2 When press the “RESET” key in canned cycle, all commanded data will be
erased.

EXAMPLES:
Sequence specified data description
① G00 X-M3 ；
② G81 X- Y- Z- R- F-； Initial data of canned cycle parameter “Z,R,F” must
be specified.
③ Y-； As drilling mode and drilling data are same as in
program②, G81 Z,R and F can be neglected. After
the positioning motion specified by the address Y,
the drilling is executed by G81mode.
④ G82 X- P-； After the positioning motion specified by the
address X, the drilling is executed by G82 mode.
At this time, the drilling data used are as follows.
Z,R and F …….specified in the block ②
P……………… specified in the block ④

⑤ G80 X- Y- M5 ； The drilling motion is not performed. All drilling

data except F is cancelled.

⑥ G85 X- Z- R- P-； The address Z and R must be specified because

these data have been cancelled in block ⑤. The F
code is the same as that in block②, and is omitted.
The address P is not required in this block but is
stored.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 6

⑦ X- Z- ； After the positioning motion specified by the

address X and Z, the drilling is executed. At this
time, the drilling data used are as follows.
Z……………………….specified in the block ⑦
P…… ……………… specified in the block ⑥
F……… …………… specified in the block ②

⑧ G89 X- Y-； After the positioning motion specified by the

address X and Y, the drilling is executed in G89
mode. At this time, the drilling data used are as
follows.
Z………… ……………….specified in the block ⑦
R,P……………………… specified in the block ⑥
F………………………… specified in the block ②

⑨ G01 X- Y- ； The hole machining mode and the hole machining

data are cancelled.
Each machining mode is described in the followings.
(1) G73 (High-speed Peck Drilling Cycle )

G73 (G98) G73 (G99)

Initial level

Point R Point R

q q
d d

q q

q q

Point Z
Point Z
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 7

The “d” value is set by a parameter (№.049/058). Highly efficient hole machining
can be performed, making removal of chips easier and keeping relief motions to a
minimum. The relief motion is effected at the rapid traverse rate.

(2) G74 Left-handed Tapping Cycle

G74 (G98) G74 (G99)

Initial level

Spindle CCW Spindle CCW

Point R Point R

Spindle CW Spindle CW

Point Z
P P Point Z

This command specifies the spindle to rotate clockwise at the hole bottom, and
then a left-handed tapping cycle to be performed.
NOTE:
During tapping by G74, feed rate override is ignored and the motion doesn’t stop
until completion of the cycle even if the feed hold is effected.

(3) G76 (FINE BORNING CYCLE)

G76 (G98) G76 (G99)

Spindle CW Spindle CW
Initial level

Point R Point R

Spindle Spindle
orientation orientation
q q
Point Z
Point Z
P Dwell P dwell

Shift (rapid traverse) Shift (rapid traverse)

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 8

tool
When the bottom of the hole has been
Spindle orientation
reached, the spindle is stopped at the fixed
rotation position, and the tool is moved in
the direction opposite to the tool tip and
retracted. This ensures that the machined
surface is not damaged and enables
precise and efficient boring to be
performed.
Shift amount q

NOTE:
Be sure to specify a positive value in Q. If Q is specified with a negative value, the
sign is ignored. Set the direction of shift in parameter №.005 PMXY . Q (shift at the
bottom of a hole) is a modal value retained within canned cycles. It must be
specified carefully because it is also used as the depth of cut for G73 and G83.

(4) G80 Canned Cycle Cancel

All canned cycles are canceled to perform normal operation. Point R and point Z
are cleared. This means that R = 0 and Z = 0 in incremental mode. Other drilling
data is also canceled (cleared).

(5) G81 Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling

G81 (G98) G81 (G99)

Initial level

Point R Point R

Point Z
Point Z
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 9

(6) G82 Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring Cycle)

G82 (G98) G82 (G99)

Initial level

Point R Point R

P Dwell
P Point Z
Dwell Point Z

This command is equal to G81 except that the tool moves up after dwell is
performed at the bottom (specifies the dwell time with an address P). Since dwell
is performed at the bottom of the hole, the precision of the hole depth is improved.

(7) G83 Peck Drilling Cycle

G83 (G98) G83 (G99)

Initial level

Point R Point R

q q

q q

q d q d

Point Z Point Z
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 10

G83 X- Y- Z- Q- R- F-；
Q represents the depth of cut for each cutting feed. It must always be specified as
an incremental value. In the second and subsequent cutting feeds, rapid traverse
changes to cutting feed at the distance “d” mm above the position where the
immediately proceeding cut ended. Specify the amount of retraction in parameter
№.050/059. Be sure to specify a positive value in Q. Negative values are ignored.

(8) G84 Tapping Cycle

G84 (G98) G84 (G99)

Initial level

Spindle CW Spindle CW
Point R P dwell Point Z P Dwell

P Dwell P Dwell
Spindle CCW Spindle CCW
Point Z Point Z

This command specifies that the spindle rotates in the counterclockwise direction at
the hole bottom, and a tapping cycle is performed.

NOTE:
Feedrate overrides are ignored during tapping. A feed hold does not stop the
machine until the return operation is completed.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 11

(9) G85 Boring Cycle

G85 (G98) G85 (G99)

Initial level

Point R Point R

Point Z
Point Z

This command is equal to G84 except that the spindle does not reverse at the hole
bottom.
(10) G86 Boring Cycle

G86 (G98) G86 (G99)

Spindle CW
Initial level
Initial level

Spindle CW

Point R R点

Spindle stop Spindle CCW

Point Z Point Z

This command is equal to G81 except that the spindle stops at the hole bottom,
and returns in rapid traverse.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 12

(11) G87 Boring Cycle /Back Boring Cycle

G87 (G98) G87 (G99)

Spindle orientation Not used.

Initial level

Spindle CW

Spindle orientation
Point Z

Spindle CW
q
Point R

Shift(rapid traverse)

After positioning along the X- and Y-axes, the spindle is stopped at the fixed
rotation position. The tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip,
positioning (rapid traverse) is performed to the bottom of the hole (point R). The tool
is then shifted in the direction of the tool tip and the spindle is rotated clockwise.
Boring is performed in the positive direction along the Z-axis until point Z is reached.
At point Z, the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position again, the tool is
shifted in the direction opposite to the tool tip, then the tool is returned to the initial
level. The tool is then shifted in the direction of the tool tip and the spindle is rotated
clockwise to proceed to the next block operation.
For details of the shift amount and direction, refer to the explanation of the canned
cycle G76.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 13

(12) G88 Boring Cycle

G88 (G98) G88 (G99)

Initial level Initial level

Spindle CW

Spindle CW
Point R
Manual feed Point R

Manual feed
P Spindle stop P Spindle stop

After dwell Point Z After dwell Point Z

When boring is completed, a dwell is performed, then the spindle is stopped. The
tool is manually retracted from the bottom of the hole (point Z) to point R. At point R,
the spindle is rotated clockwise, and rapid traverse is performed to the initial level.
(13)G89 Boring Cycle

G89 (G98) G89 (G99)

Initial level

Point R Point R

Dwell Dwell Point Z

Point Z

This command is equal to G85 expect that dwell is made at the hole bottom.

(14) Notes on Canned Cycle

1 Canned cycle commands must be specified in spindle-on condition (using M
code).
M03 ； Spindle CW
:
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 14

G□□…… ； Correct
:
M05 ； Spindle stop
:
G□□……； Incorrect (M03 or M04 must have been specified before this
block.)

2 In the canned cycle mode, if one of the position data in X,Y,Z,R axis is specified
in the block, the drilling operation can be performed. However, when they are not
specified, it is not performed. When the dwell command (G04 X _;) is
programmed, the drilling operation is not performed.
G00 X-；
G81 X__ Y__ Z__ R__ F__ K__ ；
; (No drilling)
F-； (No drilling, F code is updated)
M-； (No drilling, M function is performed)
G04 P-； (No drilling, drilling data P is not updated by this command)
3 Specify Q and R in blocks that perform drilling, that is to say, Q and R can be
specified in a block including the address X,Y,Z or R. If they are specified in a
block that does not perform drilling, they cannot be stored as modal data.
4 In a canned cycle which controls spindle motion, for example G74,G84, G86, it
may sometimes occurs, because drilling is performed continuously under such
conditions that the interval between two holes is short and the distance from
initial point level to R point level is short, that the aimed rotation speed of the
spindle is not attained before the next drilling begins. In such case, some period
of time should be inserted between two drilling operations by specifying a G04
(dwell).

EXAMPLES:
Provide here dwell time enough for the
spindle to revolve normally

G00 M__ ;
G86 X__ Y__ Z__ R__ F__ ;
G04 P__ ; (Dwell is performed, and no drilling)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 15

X__ Y__ ;
G04 P__ ; (Dwell is performed, and no drilling)
X__ Y__ ;
G04 P__ ; (Dwell is performed, and no drilling)

This note may not be necessary depending on the machine tool. Refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder.

5 A canned cycle is cancelled by G00,G01,G02 or G03. when G00,G01,G02 or

G03 is designated in the canned cycle mode, the following motions are
performed. ( The mark # represents 0,1,2 or 3; □□ represents canned cycle
code)
G# G□□ X- Y- Z- R- Q- P- F- K-； (canned cycle is performed)
G□□ G# X- Y- Z- R- Q- P- F- K-； (The tool is moved along X,Y,Z axes
according to group 01 G code, R,P,Q,K
values are neglected and F code is stored.)

6 When both canned cycle and an M code are specified in the same block, the M
code and signal MF are sent out at the first positioning operation and when the
signal FIN is received at the end of a cycle, the next drilling is performed.

7 In the canned cycle mode, the tool offset commands are ignored.

8 If a tool length compensation (G43,G44 or G49) is commanded in the canned

cycle mode, the tool length compensation is effected at the time of positioning at
point R (at operation ②).

9 Operator’s notes.
(A) Single block
When canned cycles are performed in single block mode, the motion is
stopped at the end point of an operation ①,② and ⑥.
Three cycle starts are necessary for a canned cycle in this mode.
Feed hold lamp lights at the end point of operation ① and ②, and it stops in
the stop state.

(B) Feed Hold

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed during operation ③ to ⑤ in G74 or
G84 mode, Feed Hold lamp is lit at once, but the motion is stopped at the end
point of operation ⑥. If the feed hold is effected during motion ⑥, motion
stops at once.

(C) Feedrate override

Feedrate override is fixed at 100% during canned cycle G74 or G84.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 16

(15) Program example using tool length offset and canned

cycles
Reference point

350

#6
#1 #11
100
#7 #10
100
Y #2 #5
100 #12
#8 200
100 #9
#4
X #3 #13

400 150 250 250 150

# 11 to 16 Drilling of a 10mm diameter hole

# 17 to 10 Drilling of a 20mm diameter hole
# 11 to 13 Boring of a 95mm diameter hole(depth 50 mm)
R e tra c tio n p o s itio n

Z 250

In itia l p o in t le v e l
X
50

50

30
20

T11 T15 T31

200 190 150

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－13（FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING） 13 - 17

Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.11, +190.0 is set in offset No.15, and +150.0 is
set in offset No.31

Program example:
N001 G92X0Y0Z500.0; Coordinate setting at reference position
N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6; Tool change
N003 G43 Z0 H11; Initial level, tool length offset
N004 S30 M3; Spindle start
N005 G99 G81 X400.0 Y-350.0
Z-153.0 R-97.0 F120; Positioning, then #1 drilling
N006 Y-550.0; Positioning, then #2 drilling and point R level
return
N007 G98 Y-750.0; Positioning, then #3 drilling and initial level
return
N008 G99 X1200.0; Positioning, then #4 drilling and point R level
return
N009 Y-550.0; Positioning, then #5 drilling and point R level
return
N010 G98 Y-350.0; Positioning, then #6 drilling and initial level return
N011 G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference position return, spindle stop
N012 G49 Z250.0 T15 M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change
N013 G43 Z0 H15; Initial level, tool length offset
N014 S20 M3; Spindle start
N015 G99 G82 X550.0 Y-450.0; Positioning, then #7 drilling, point R level return
Z-130.0 R-97.0 P300 F70;
N016 G98 Y-650.0; Positioning, then #8 drilling, initial level return
N017 G99 X1050.0; Positioning, then #9 drilling, point R level return
N018 G98 Y-450.0; Positioning, then #10 drilling, initial level return
N019 G00 X0 Y0 M5; Reference position return, spindle stop
N020 G49 Z250.0 T31 M6; Tool length offset cancel, tool change
N021 G43 Z0 H31; Initial level, tool length offset
N022 S10 M3; Spindle start
N023 G85 G99 X800.0 Y-350.0; Positioning, then #11 drilling, point R level
return
Z-153.0 R47.0 F50;
N024 G91 Y-200.0; Positioning, then #12,13 drilling. point R level
return
N025 G28 X0 Y0 M5; Reference position return, spindle stop
N026 G49 Z500.0; Tool length offset cancel
N027 M30; Program stop
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 1

14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.1 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (G43, G44, G49)
14.1.1 Tool length offset A
G43 G43
G44 Z_ H_ ; or G44 Z_ ;
By the above command (G43 and G44), the position of the terminal point of the
movement command in the Z axis can be shifted + or – by the value set in the
offset memory. This function can be used by setting the difference between the
tool length assumed during programming and the actual tool length of the tool
used when the work is performed into the offset memory. It is now possible to
apply the compensation without changing the program. Assign the offset direction
with a G43 or G44, and design the offset amount that has been set in the offset
memory with an H code.

1 Direction of the Offset

G43: + side offset
G44: - side offset
In any case of a absolute or incremental commands, the offset amount that
has been set into the offset memory assigned by H code is in G43, added to,
and in G44, subtracted from the coordinate value of the terminal point of the Z
axis movement command. The coordinate value after the calculation becomes
the terminal point.
When the movement command for the Z axis was omitted, it is taken in the
same way as:
G43 G91 H_ ;
G44
and it moves by the offset amount in the + direction in G43 and in the –
direction in G44. G43 and G44 being modal codes, are effective until another
G code in the same group is programmed.

2 Specification of the tool length offset value

The tool length offset value assigned to the number (offset number) specified
in the H code is selected from offset memory and added to or subtracted from
the command value for the Z axis specified by a command in the program.
The offset number can be assigned by H00 to H32. however, these offset
numbers are used jointly with the cutter compensation.
The tool length offset value may be set in the offset memory through the
LCD/MDI panel.
The range of values that can be set as the tool length offset value is as follows

mm input inch input

Offset amount 0～±999.999 0～±99.9999

The offset amount value corresponding to offset No.00 or H00 always means 0.
It is impossible to set H00 to any other offset value.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 2

3 Tool length offset cancel

To cancel tool length offset, specify G49 or H00. After G49 or H00 is specified,
the system immediately cancels the offset mode.

4 Example of the tool length compensation

(A) Tool length offset (in boring holes No.1, 2, and 3)

H1=-4.0 ( tool length offset value)

N1 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0 ；.....…. ⑴
N2 G43 Z-32.0 H01 ； ...........……… ⑵
N3 G01 Z-21.0 ；.........................… ⑶
N4 G04 P2000 ；............................ ⑷
N5 G00 Z21.0 ；..........................…. ⑸
N6 X30.0 Y-50.0 ；.......................…. ⑹
N7 G01 Z-41.0 ；.........................….. ⑺
N8 G00 Z41.0 ；..........................….. ⑻
N9 X50.0 Y30.0 ；........................….. ⑼
N10 G01 Z-25.0 ；........................…. ⑽
N11 G04 P2000 ；….......................… ⑾
N12 G00 Z57.0 H00 ；. ..................... ⑿
N13 X-200.0 Y-60.0 ； .................... ⒀
N14 M30 ；

NOTE:
When the tool length offset value is changed due to a change of the offset
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 3

number, the offset value changes to the new tool length offset value, the new
tool length offset value is not added to the old tool length offset value.
H01 : tool length offset value 20.0
H02 : tool length offset value 30.0
G90 G43 Z100.0 H01 ; Z will move to 120.0
G90 G43 Z100.0 H02 ; Z will move to 130.0

14.1.2 Tool length offset B

G17 Z_
G43
G18 Y_ H_ ；
G19 G44 X_
or
G17 G43
G18 H_ ；
G19 G44
By the above command (G43 and G44), the position of the terminal point of the
movement command in the X,Y or Z axis can be shifted + or – by the value set in
the offset memory. Assign the offset axis with G17,G18 or G19, and assign the
offset direction with a G43 or G44, and design the offset amount that has been set
in the offset memory with an H code.

1 Offset axes
Assign an axis that perpendicular to the specified plane specified by the
command G17,G18,G19 as an offset axis.

Specified plane Offset axis

G17 Z axis
G18 Y axis
G19 X axis

Tool length offset B can be executed along two or more axes when the axes
are specified in two or more blocks.
Offset in X and Y axes.
G19 G43 H _ ; Offset in X axis
G18 G43 H _ ; Offset in Y axis
(Offsets in X and Y axes are performed)

2 Offset Direction
G43: + side offset
G44: - side offset
(This is equal to tool length compensation A except that X,Y and Z are all
offset axes).
3 Specification of the tool length offset value
Refer to the tool length compensation A.
4 Tool length offset cancel
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 4

To cancel tool length offset, specify G49 or H00. After G49 or H00 is specified,
the system immediately cancels the offset mode. After tool length offset B is
executed along two or more axes, offset along all the axes is canceled by
specifying G49. If H0 is specified, only offset along an axis perpendicular to
the specified plane is canceled.

NOTE:
1 Specifying the parameter of №.006 TLCP for selecting the tool length offset
A or B.
2 In the case of the offset in three axes or more , if the offset is canceled by
G49 code, the P/S alarm 015 is generated. Cancel the offset by using G49
and H00.

14.2 CUTTER COMPENSATION B(G39～G42)

14.2.1 CUTTER COMPENSATION FUNCTION
In order to cut a workpiece with an R-radius tool, the path for the center of the
tool must be separated R distance from the workpiece surface. This is called
cutter compensation function. This command can be specified by G code. The
offset number can be assigned by H code, H code is a modal code, the offset
number is no more than 32. The tool cutter offset value may be set in the
offset memory through the LCD/MDI panel.

The G codes responding to offset is as follows:

G code Group Function

G39 00 Cutter compensation corner offset
G40 07 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 07 Cutter compensation left
G42 07 Cutter compensation right

A G41 or G42 command causes the equipment to enter the offset mode, and
a G40 command causes the equipment to enter the cancel mode. At the
beginning when power is applied the control is in the cancel mode. This tool
cutter compensation mode is not influenced by one-shot G code(G39).
G41 and G42 are G code in group 07, they are commanded simultaneously
with G00,G01,G02 and G03 to define a mode which determines the mode of
the tool motion.
Cutter compensation must be cancelled at the program end.

14.2.2 Offset amount (H code)

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 5

The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to 32 offsets (for tool
length compensation and cutter offset). The offset amount depends on the two
digit number following the H code commanded on the program, and has been
set via the MDI&LCD.
The range of values in which the offset amount can be set is as follows:

mm input inch input

Offset amount 0～±999.999 0～±99.9999
The offset amount value corresponding to offset No.00 or H00 always means
0. It is impossible to set H00 to any other offset value.

14.2.3 offset vector

In the figure below, in order to cut a workpiece indicated as A with an R-
radius tool, the path for the center of the tool must be the B which is separated
R distance from the A. The tool being separated some distance like this is
called offset. By the cutter compensation function, the tool path being
separated some distance (namely, offset) is computed.
The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the cutter
compensation value assigned by H code. It is calculated inside the control unit,
and its direction is up-dated in accordance with the progress of the tool in
each block.
The offset vector (hereinafter called vector) is produced inside the control unit
in order to find out how much the tool motion should be offset, and is used to
compute a path offset from the programmed path by the tool radius.
This vector always follows the tool as its progress, and it is very important,
when making a program, to understand the state of the vector.
The offset vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector is on
the workpiece side and the head positions to the center of the tool.

R
Vector

Offset and Vector B

A

14.2.4 Plane selection and vector

Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and G19,
(G codes for plane selection). This plane is called the offset plane. For
instance, when the XY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 6

carried out using (X,Y) in the program and the vector is computed.
Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is not in
the specified plane. The programmed values are used as they are.
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is
compensated.
The offset plane is changed during the offset cancel mode.

14.2.5 Corner offset circular interpolation G39

This command is specified in the block including G01,G02 or G03.
G39 X__ Y__I__ J__ H__ ；
Offset circular interpolation (using tool radius as an R) is valid at the corner. In
addition, it can form a new vector which is perpendicular to the XY plane. The
tail of the vector is on the workpiece side and the head positions to the center
of the tool. G41 is on the left of the vector, and G42 is on the right. Tool motion
is from the old vector’s tip to the new vector’s tip. The coordinate word can be
specified in absolute(G90) or incremental (G91) mode.
This command is only effective in the compensation mode and G41 or G42 is
specified. The circular direction is determined by G41 or G42.
G39 is not a modal G code, it cannot destroy the G codes of group 01.

14.2.6 Cutter compensation cancel (offset mode cancel) G40

At the beginning when power is applied the control is in the cancel mode. In
the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool center path coincides
with the programmed path.
Specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) for start-up.
G40 X__ Y__ ；

The tool motion is as follows, moving from start point’s old vector to aimed
point in liner mode. In positioning G00 mode, coordinates axes move to aimed
point in rapid traverse. Specifying this command, causes the equipment from
offset mode to enter the cancel mode.

Tool center path

（X，Y）

Programmed path
Old vector
Start point
If the command G40 without coordinate word X and Y, tool will move to the
start point following the direction of the opposite of the old vector.

14.2.7 Cutter Compensation Left G41

A positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 7

G41 X__ Y__ I__ J__ H__ ；

A new vector perpendicular to the plane IJ formed at the end point of the block,
when this command is specified. Tool motion is from the tip of the start point’s
old vector to the tip of the new vector.

（I，J） When the old vector is 0,

Newvector
Tool center path
specifying this command causes
the equipment to enter the offset
（X，Y） mode. The offset amount is set
Old vector by H code. In positioning G00
mode, coordinates axes move to
Programmed path
Start point aimed point in rapid traverse. I
and J are an incremental
distanced from the aimed point, if it is omitted, the new vector will be perpendicular to
the plane XY.

B circular interpolation (G02, G03)

G41……;
·
·
G02 /G03 X__ Y__ R__ ；

A new vector can be calculated using the above blocks, it exits in the line from
the arc center to the aimed point, it points to left or right (seeing from the
direction of the arc motion). The tool center path is from the tip of the old
vector to the tip of the new vector. However, the most important is the old
vector can be formed correctly at first. The direction of offset vector is from
start point or the aimed point to the arc center, and vice versa.

Tool center path

（X，Y）
（X，Y） tool center path R

R programmed path
programmed
start point old vector path
old vector start point

14.2.8 Cutter Compensation Right G42

This command is equal to G41 except that the vector direction is in reverse.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 8

A positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01)

G42 X__ Y__ I__ J__ H__ ；
In positioning G00 mode, coordinates axes move to aimed point in rapid
traverse.

(I,J)

(X,Y)
New vector
Programmed path

Start point

Old vector Tool center path

G42 X__ Y__ ；

(X,Y)
Programmed path
New vector
Start point

Old vector Tool center path

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 9

B circular interpolation (G02, G03)

（ X， Y） programmed path new vector
programmed path
new vector （ X， Y）

R
R
tool center
old vector
start point tool center path
old vector start point
EXAMPLE: (A)

Tool center path

Programmed path

15.0
20.0
5.0

35.0
25.0
25.0

15.0 25.0

G91 G17 G41 G01 X15.00 Y25.00 F180 H06 ；

G39 X35.00 Y15.00 ；
X35.00 Y15.00 ；
G39 X25.00 Y-20.00 ；
X25.00 Y-20.00 ；
G39 X5.00 Y-25.00 ；
G03 X25.00 Y-20.50 R25.00 ； (in incremental mode)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 10

(B)

tool center path

programmed path

R56.57
40.0 40.0
50.0

50.0 40.0
40.0

unit: mm
G91 G17 G01 X50.00 Y50.00 F150 H06 ；
G02 X96.57 Y-40.00 R56.57 ；
G01 -Y40.00 ； (in incremental mode)

14.2.9 Notes on Offset

(A) Offset Number
Assign a offset number values to the H codes on the CRT/MDI panel. It can be
specified in optional time from offset cancel mode to cutter compensation
mode.
The H code is valid until another H code is specified.

(B) from Offset Cancel to Cutter Compensation

When performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not
available. Specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) for start-up.

(C) from Cutter Compensation to Offset Cancel

Specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) for start-up. If circular
interpolation (G02, G03) is specified, an alarm occurs.

(D) Cutter Compensation Left and Right

Offset direction turns over between left and right via offset cancel mode
performing in general. But specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation
(G01) can take the place of offset cancel mode.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 11

new vector （I，J）

（X，Y） tool center path

tool center path
（not line in general） （X，Y）
new vector

programmed path

old vector programmed path

old vector

G41 ...... ; G42 ......;

G00 G42 X__ Y__ ； G01 G41 X__ Y__ F__ ；

(E) Alter Offset Amount

Offset amount usually changes in the offset cancel mode. However, specify
positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) can take the place of offset
cancel mode during tool exchange.

new vector new vector

tool center path
tool center path （X，Y） （X，Y）

programmed path programmed path

old vector old vector

Alter Offset Amount

(F) Positive/negative cutter compensation value and tool center path

If the offset amount is negative ( - ), distribution is made for a figure in which

G41’s and G42’s are all replaced with each other on the program.
Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of the workpiece,
it will pass around the inside, and vice versa. The figure below shows one
example. Generally, the offset amount is programmed to be positive (+). When
a tool path is programmed as in ((A)), if the offset amount is made negative ( -
), the tool center moves as in ((B)), and vice versa.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 12

tool center path

tool center path

(A) (B)

Generally a figure with a sharp corner (with a sharp corner circular

interpolation) is major. If the offset amount is made negative ( - ), the inner
side arc can not be machined. When cut the inner side sharp corner, insert a
appropriate radius there, cutting can perform after a smooth transition.
14.2.10 Example

5 7

4 20 Y
40.0
R40.0

3 40
20 R20

2
10 8 X
1 20
11 9

(1) G91 G17 G00 G41 Y20.00 H08 ；

(2) G01 Z-25.00 F100 ； Offset number H08, specified cutting
(3) Y40.00 F25.00 ； compensation value corresponding to
(4) G39 X40.00 Y20.00 ； H08 in the offset memory beforehand
on the CRT/MDI panel.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 13

(5) X40.00 Y20.00 ；

(6) G39 X40.00 ；
(7) G02 X40.00 Y-40.00 R40.00 ；
(8) X-20.00 Y-20.00 R20.00 ；
(9) G01 X-60.00 ；
(10) G00 Z25.00 ；
(11) G40 Y-20.00 M02 ；

14.3 CUTTER COMPENSATION C (G40～G42)

14.3.1 Cutter Compensation Function
In the figure below, in order to cut a workpiece indicated as A with an R-
radius tool, the path for the center of the tool must be the B which is separated
R distance from the A. The tool being separated some distance like this is
called offset. By the cutter compensation function, the tool path being
separated some distance (namely, offset) is computed.
Therefore, the workpiece shape is programmed with the cutter compensation
mode by a programmer, and in machining, if the cutter radius (offset amount)
is measured and set to the CNC, the tool path is offset (path B) regardless of
the program.

B（ Offset tool center path ）

A

vector

Offset and vector

14.3.2 Offset Value (H code)

The offset amount can be set in the offset memory up to 99 offsets. ( However,
they are 99 offsets in total for tool length compensation and tool offset.) The offset
amount depends on the two digit number following the H code commanded on the
program, and has been set via the LCD/MDI.

The range of values in which the offset amount can be set as follows:

ｍｍ input Inch input

Offset amount 0 to ±999.999ｍｍ 0 to ±99.9999 inch
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 14

NOTE:

The cutter compensation value corresponding to offset No. 00, that is, H00 always
means 0. It is impossible to set H00 to any other offset amount.

14. 3.3 Offset vector

The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the cutter
compensation value assigned by H code. It is calculated inside the control unit,
and its direction is up-dated in accordance with the progress of the tool in
each block.
The offset vector (hereinafter called vector) is produced inside the control unit
in order to find out how much the tool motion should be offset, and is used to
compute a path offset from the programmed path by the tool radius.
This vector always follows the tool as its progress, and it is very important,
when making a program, to understand the state of the vector.
The offset vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector is on
the workpiece side and the head positions to the center of the tool.

14.3.4 Plane selection and vector

Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and G19,
(G codes for plane selection). This plane is called the offset plane. For
instance, when the XY plane has been selected, the offset calculations are
carried out using (X,Y) in the program and the vector is computed.
Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is not in
the specified plane. The programmed values are used as they are.
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is
compensated.
The offset plane is changed during the offset cancel mode. If it is performed
during the offset mode, an alarm (P/S40) is displayed and the machine is
stopped.

Ｇcode Offset plane

G17 X - Y plane
G18 Z - X plane
G19 Y - Z plane

14.3.5 G40，G41 and G42

Using G40,G41 and G42,the deletion and generation of cutter radius

compensation vectors is commanded. They are commanded simultaneously
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 15

with G00,G01,G02 and G03 to define a mode which determines the mode of
the amount and direction of offset vectors, and the direction of tool motion.
The G codes responding to offset is as follows:

G code Group Function

G40 07 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 07 Cutter compensation left
G42 07 Cutter compensation right
A G41 or G42 command causes the equipment to enter the offset mode, and
a G40 causes the equipment to enter the cancel mode.

The offset procedure, for example, is explained in the figure below:

The block (1) is called the start-up. In this block, the offset cancel mode is
changed to the offset mode (G41). At the end point of this block, the tool
center is translated by the cutter radius in the direction being vertical to the
next block path(from P1 to P2). The cutter compensation value is specified by
H07, namely the offset number is 7, and G41 means the cutter compensation
left.
After being start-up, when the workpiece shape is programmed as P1 →
P2……P8→P9→P1, the cutter compensation is performed automatically.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 16

EXAMPLE:

5
250R

C1(700,1300)

P5(900,1150)
650R 650R
P4(500,1150)

4 6 C2(1550,1550)
3 7
P4(950,900)

P2(250,900) P3(450,900) P7
(1150,900)

2 8
P9(700,650) (1150,550)
(250,550)
P8
P1
10 9
1 Y
11

X
Start point

G92 X0 Y0 Z0；
(1) N1 G90 G17 G00 G41 H07 X250.0 Y550.0 ； （the offset amount must be
set with the offset number
beforehand.）
(2) N2 G01 Y900.0 F150 ；
(3) N3 X450.0 ；
(4) N4 G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0 ；
(5) N5 G02 X900.0 R-250.0 ；
(6) N6 G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0 ；
(7) N7 G01 X1150.0 ；
(8) N8 Y550.0 ；
(9) N9 X700.0 Y650.0 ；
(10) N10 X250.0 Y550.0 ；
(11) N11 G00 G40 X0 Y0 ；
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 17

14.3.6 DETAILS OF CUTTER COMPENSATION C

This section provides a detailed explanation of the movement of the tool for cutter
compensation C.

1） Offset Cancel mode

At the beginning when power is applied, after reset has been performed or
when the program has been terminated by execution of M02 and M30, the
control is in the cutter compensation cancel mode.
In the cancel mode, the vector is always 0, and the tool center path coincides
with the programmed path. The cancel mode (G40) should be programmed
before the end of a program.]

2） Start-up
In the cancel mode, when a block which satisfied all of the following conditions
is executed, the equipment enters the offset mode, this is called the start-up
block.
(a) G41 or G42 has been commanded. Or, they had been commanded, and
the control enters the G41 or G42 mode.
(b) The offset number for cutter compensation is not 0.
(c) A move in any of the axes (I,J,K are excluded.) in the offset plane has
been commanded, and its commanded move is not 0.
In the start-up block, arc commands (G02,G03) are not allowed, as the alarm
（P/S34）is generated and the NC stops. At start-up , two blocks are read.
After the first block is read and executed, the next block enters the cutter
compensation buffer. In the meantime, in the case of single block mode, two
blocks are read and the machine stops after the first block execution.
Thereafter, 2 blocks are read in advance normally, inside the NC, there are
three blocks, the block under execution, and the two blocks which are entered
into buffer.

NOTE:
The meaning of “inner side” and “outer side” encountered later are as follows:
An angle of intersection created by two blocks of move commands, is referred
to as “inner side”, when over 180° and as “outer side”, when 0° to 180°, as
measured at the workpiece side.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 18

1 Inner side
Workpiece side

Programmed path
α≥180°

2 Outer side
Programmed path

α
Workpiece side
0°≤α＜180°
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 19

（a）Tool movement around an inner side of a corner（α≥180°）

( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Linear→Circular
α Programmed path
α

r : Offset amount
G42
r
S L Tool center path G42
L hereafter, in thefigures: C
S
S：a singleblock stop point
L：Linear L Programmed pat
Tool center path
C：arc

（b） Tool movement around the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle（180°＞α≥90

°）
Tool path in start-up or cancel has two types A and B, and they are selected by
parameter.
( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : L in ea r→ C irc u la r
Type A

G 42
G42
α
α
L L
r
Programmed path

S
C P rogra m m e d p a th
S L Tool center path
T ool ce n te r p a th

( i i) : Linear→Circular
Type B ( i ) : Linear→Linear
G42
G42 α
α
L
L
Programmed path r
r r
S
S L L
L
Tool center path
Intersection Intersection
The intersection is the point where two offset paths Programmed path

calculated by continuous two blocks are intersected. Tool center path

（C）Tool movement around the outside of an acute angle（α＜180°）

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 20

Type A ( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Linear→Circular

G42
L
α
G42
L
α Programmed path ｒ

S
ｒ
C
Programmed path
S L Tool center path Tool center path

Type B ( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Linear→Circular

S G42
L
G42
S α
L
α L r
Programmed path
r L

L Tool center path Programmed path

Tool center path

（ｄ）Tool movement around the outside of an acute angle α＜1°

Tool center path
L
S

L
r
G41 Programmed path

G41
αless than 1 deg

3）Tool movement in offset mode

In the offset mode, offset is performed correctly, if non-positioning commands such
as auxiliary functions or dwell would not be programmed in two or more successive
blocks. Otherwise overcutting or undercutting will occur. During the offset mode,
offset plane change-over should not be carried out. If it does, the alarm is
generated and the NC stops.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 21

（a）Tool movement around the inside of the corner（α≥180°）

( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Linear→Circular
α α

Programmed path
Programmed path

Intersection S
S L Tool center path C
L L Intersection

Tool center path

( iii ) : Circular→Linear (iv) : Circular→Circular

α α

Programmed path
Programmed path

S L
Tool center path C
c S
Intersection
L Intersection

Tool center path

（v）Tool movement around the inside (α∠1°) with an abnormally long vector

（i）Linear→Linear

S
Tool center path

r
Offset vector

Programmed path

The reader should infer in the same procedure:

（ii）Circular→Linear
（iii）Linear→Circular
（iv）Circular→Circular
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 22

（b）Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle（180°＞α≥90°）

( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Linear→Circular

α
α
L
L
Programmed path r
Programmed path
S
S L Tool center path C
Intersection L
Tool center path

（iii）：Circular→Linear （IV）：Circular → Circular

α α
C C ｒ
ｒ
Programmed path
S L ｒ
L
L Tool center path
S L
Intersection
Programmed path
Tool center path
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 23

（c）Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle（α＜90°）

( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Linear→Circular
L

L L
r r
α α
S S
Programmed path
r L r
L

L Tool center path L

Tool center path

Programmed path

(iv) : Linear→Circular
(iii) : Linear→Linear C
C S
S r
α
L
r
α Programmed path
L
Programmed path
r
L L C

L Tool center path

Tool center path
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 24

(ｄ) When it is exceptional

（i）End position for the arc is not on the arc
If the end of a line leading to an
arc is programmed as the end of
Imaginary circle
the arc by mistake as illustrated,
the system assumes that cutter
compensation has been executed
with respect to an imaginary circle
End the arc that has the same center as the
Programmed path
arc and passes the specified end
Leading of the arc position. Based on this
assumption, the system creates a
vector and carries out
ｒ R ｒ compensation. The resulting tool
ｒ center path is different from that
S created by applying cutter
C compensation to the programmed
R L
Tool center path path in which the line leading to
Center of the arc L the arc is considered straight.

（ii）no inner intersection

Alarmoccurs and the tod stops

When the cutter compensation value is large Center of the arc B

If the cutter compensation value is
When the cutter compensation Center of the arc A sufficiently small, the two circular
value is small tool center paths made after
compensation intersect at a
position (P) Intersection P may
Programmed path ｒ ｒ not occur if an excessively large
value is specified for cutter
P
compensation. When this is
A B predicted, alarm P/S33 occurs at
the end of the previous block and
the tool is stopped.

（iii）The center of the arc is identical with the start point or the end position

alarm P/S38 is displayed, and

stop the tool will stop at the end
Tool center path position of the preceding block.
（G41）
Programmed path N5 G01 X1000；
N6 G02 X1000 I0 J0;
N7 G03 Y-1000 J-1000.;
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 25

（4）Offset mode

In the offset mode, when a block that satisfies any one of the following
conditions is executed, the equipment enters the offset cancel mode, and the
action of this block is called the offset cancel.

1. G40 has been commanded.

2. 0 has been commanded as the offset number for cutter compensation.

When performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not
available. If a circular arc is commanded, an alarm (P/S34) is generated and
the tool stops.

In the offset cancel, the control executes the instructions in that block and the
block in the cutter compensation buffer. In the meantime, in the case of a
single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and stops.
By pushing the cycle start button once more; one block is executed without
reading the next block.

Then the control is in the cancel mode, and normally, the block to be executed
next will be stored in the buffer register and the next block is not read into the
buffer for cutter compensation.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 26

（a）Tool movement around the inside corner（α≥180°）

( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Circular→Linear
α α

Programmed path
r r
Tool center path G40 G40
C
L S S
L Tool center path L
Programmed path

（ｂ）Tool movement around the inside corner（90°≤α<180°）

Type A ( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Circular→Linear
G40
α
G40
G40 α L
r
Programmed path G42 L G42
r S
C
L
Tool center path
Tool center path Programmed path

Type B ( i ) : Linear→Linear ( i i) : Circular→Circular

G40 G40
α α
L L
Programmed path r r
r r

S Programmed path
L L
Tool center path S
Intersection
C
Intersection
Tool center path
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 27

（a）Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle（α< 90°）

Type A ( i ) : Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Circular→Linear

G40

L α
G40

α r
Programmed G42
L r C
S
Tool center path

L S Programmed path
Tool center path

（i） ： Linear→Linear ( ii ) : Circular→ Linear

L
L G40
L
G40 r
α
L
r
α
L
Programmed path
Programm ed path S L
L

L Tool center path

Tool center path S

（d）Tool movement around the outside of an acute angle，Linear→Linear。（α＜1

°）

L
S Tool center path

L
r Program m ed path
G42
α less than 1 deg
G40
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 28

（5）Change in the offset direction in the offset mode

The offset direction is decided by G codes (G41 and G42) for cutter radius and the sign
of cutter compensation value as follows.

sign
+ -
G code
G41 Left side offset Right side offset

G42 Right side offset Left side offset

In a special case, the offset direction can be changed in the offset mode. If the
offset direction is changed in a block, a vector is generated at the intersection of
the tool center path of that block and the tool center path of a preceding block.
However, the change is not available in the start-up block and the block following it.
When the offset direction is changed, the conception of inside and outside
disappears to common for all cases.

（i）Linear→Linear （ii）Linear→Circular
S
L C
G42
ｒ
ｒ Programmed path ｒ G41
G41
Programmed path L ｒ G42

L Tool center path S

Tool center path

（iii）Circular→Linear Tool center path （iv）Circular→Circular

G42
G42 Tool center path
C
ｒ L
G41 ｒ
ｒ
C ｒ
C Programmed path
S Programmed path
S G41

（v）Tool center path without an intersection

When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41 and G42, if
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 29

intersection with the offset path is not required, the vector normal to block B is
created at the start point of block B.
1： Linear-----Linear

S L

Block A Block B
(G42) (G42) (G41)
Programmed path

L Offset vector
Tool center path
L S

Block A (G42)
Programmed path

(G41)

Tool center path Block B

S
L

2： Linear-----Circular

S
Tool center path
L

(G41)
Program m ed path Block A
(G42)
Block B

C
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 30

3： Circular-----Circular
S C
r
Block B

Block A (G41)
(G42)
(G42)
r An arc whose end
position is not on the
r
Programmed arc
L
path S L
C

Center Center
Tool center path

（iv）The length of tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle

Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation. However, when

G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was commanded with address I, J and
K this situation can occur.

Programmed path
（G42）
G41 N5 G02G91X5000Y-7000；
N5 G42
N7 N6 G41G02J-5000；
Tool center path
N7 G42G01X5000Y7000；
P1
P2
In this case of the figure, the cutter
compensation is not performed with more
N6 G41 than one circle circumference: an arc is
formed from P1 to P2 as shown. Depending
on the circumstances, an alarm may be
displayed due to the “ interference Check”
described later. To execute a circle with
more than one circumference, the circle
must be specified in segments.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 31

（6）Temporary cutter compensation cancel

If the following command is specified in the offset mode, the offset mode is
temporarily canceled then automatically restored. About the details of this
operation, refer to the offset cancel and the offset start-up.

a） G28 automatic return to the reference position

If G28 is specified in the offset mode, the offset mode is canceled at an

intermediate position. If the vector still remains after the tool is returned to the
reference position, the components of the vector are reset to zero with respect
to each axis along which reference position return has been made.

G28
Intermediate position
S
r
r
S
G00
(G42 G00)

S
Reference position
ｂ) G29 automatic return from the reference position

If G29 is commanded in the offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at the
intermediate point, and the offset mode will be restored automatically from the
subsequent block.

G29 specified immediately after G28

G28 Intermediate position G00

G42 G00 S S

S S

G29

S
Reference position
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 32

G29 specified not immediately after G28

G29 Intermediate position

G42 G00 S
ｒ

S
ｒ G00
S

（7）Cutter compensation G code in the offset mode

The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the
previous block, irrespective of machining inner or outer side, by commanding the
cutter compensation G code (G41, G42) in the offset mode, independently. If this
code is specified in a circular command, correct circular motion will not be
obtained. When the direction of offset is expected to be changed by the command
of cutter compensation G code (G41, G42), refer to (5).

Linear-----Linear

A block specified by G42

（G42 mode）
r L

L S
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 33

Circular-----Linear

A block specified by G42

r
（G42 mode） L

S
C

（8） Command for temporary cancel of offset vector

During offset mode, if G92 (absolute zero point programming) is commanded, the
offset vector is temporarily cancelled and thereafter offset mode is automatically
restored.
In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from the
intersecting point to the commanded point where offset vector is canceled. Also
when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the intersecting point.

Tool center path

S （Intersection） S （Intersection）

L
L
r L r
（G41 mode）
N5 G91G01X3000Y7000；
N9
N6 X-3000Y6000；
N5 N6 SS N8
N7 G92X1000Y2000；

Programmed path N8 G01X4000Y8000；

G50 block N7

NOTE:
SS indicates the point where the tool stops twice in the single block mode.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 34

（9）A block without tool movement

The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the tool will not
move even if cutter compensation is effected.
(1) M05 ； ……………………… M code output
(2) S21 ； …………………… S code output
(3) G04 X10000 ； …………… Dwell Commands (1)
(4) (G17) Z100 ；……………… Move command not included to (6) are of no
in the offset plane. movement.
(5) G90 ；………………………… G code only
(6) G01 G91 X0; …………………Move distance is zero.

a） Commanded at start-up
If a block without tool movement is commanded at start-up, the offset vector is
not produced.

SS G40 G91 ．．．．．．．．．

．
N7 ．
．
S
N8 N6 X1000.0 Y1000.0 ；
N6
N7 G41 X0 ；
N8 X-1000.0 ；
N9
N9 X1000.0 Y-1000.0 ；

b）Movement specified in offset mode

When a single block without tool movement is commanded in the offset mode,
the vector and tool center path are the same as those when the block is not
commanded. (Refer to item (3) offset mode). This block is executed at the
single block stop point.

N7 N8
N6 G91X100.0 Y200.0 ；
N7 G04 X100.0 ；
N8 X100.0 ；
SS N8
N6

N6 Block N7 is executed here.

However, when the move distance is zero, even if the block is commanded
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 35

singly, tool motion becomes the same as that when more than one block of
without tool movement are commanded, which will be described subsequently.

N7 N8 N6 G91X1000 Y2000 ；
N7 X0 ；
N8 X1000 ；
N6
SS

Two blocks without tool movement should not be commanded consecutively. If

commanded, a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in
a normal direction to tool motion in earlier block, so overcutting may result.

N7 N8 N9
N6 G91X100.0 Y 200.0 ；
(note 4 )
N7 S21 ；
SSS N8 G04 X1.0 ；
N9 N9 X100.0 ；
N6

N6 Blocks N7 and N8 are executed here.

NOTE:
SSS means that tool stops three times by single block operation.
c） Commanded together with offset cancel
When a block without tool movement is commanded together with an offset cancel,
a vector whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a direction normal
to tool motion in the earlier block, the vector is cancelled in the next move
commanded.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 36

N7 N8
N6 G91X100.0 Y100.0 ；
N7 G40 ；
N8 X100.0 Y0 ；
N6 SS

（10） a block contains a G40 and I-J-K- instruction

ａ) the mode of the previous block is G41 or G42

In this case the NC assumes that the movement from the end point of the
previous block in the direction of (I, J or K) has been commanded.

(I,J) E(X,Y)
Tool comes here by G40 block.
N2

X N1 N1 (G42 mode)；
S
ｒ Center of tool goes to X in G42 block.
N2 G40X□Y□I－J－；
ｒ

(G42) Programmed path

NOTE:
In this case, note that the NC obtains an intersection of the tool path
irrespective of whether inner or outer wall machining is specified.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 37

X Tool center path

ｒ
S
Programmed path
ｒ G42
（I，J）
When an intersection is not obtainable, the tool comes to the position normal to the
previous block at the end of the previous block.

X G40
S Tool center path
ｒ

ｒ （I，J） Programmed path

ｂ) When the length of the tool center path becomes more than a circle.

Tool center path P1

（G41）
Programmed path N7 N5 G01 G91 X10000；
N5 P2 N6 G02 J-6000；
N7 G40 G01 X5000Y 5000 I-100 J-100；
（I, J）
N6

In the above case, the tool center path does not go around a circle but moves only
from point P1 to P2 along an arc.
According to under some circumstance, an alarm (P/S41) may be generated by the
interference check described below. (If it is desired to move a tool around a circle,
a circle must be commanded with partitions.)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 38

（11） Corner movement

When two or more vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves
linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isn’t
performed and the latter vector is ignored.
ΔV ｘ

ΔV ｙ

This vector is ignored,

If ΔV ｘ≤ΔV limit,
ΔV ｙ≤ΔV limit

If ΔVx ≤ΔVlimit and ΔVy ≤ ΔVlimit, the latter vector is ignored. The ΔVlimit
is set in advance by parameter (N0.049CRCDL). If these vectors do not coincide,
a move is generated to turn around the corner. This move belongs to the latter
block.

S
This move belongs to block
N7, thus, the feedrate is equal
to that in block N7. If the block
N7 is G00 mode, the tool is
moved at G00 mode, while if it
is G01, G02, G03, the tool is
moved at G01 mode.
N6 N7

However, if the path of the next block is semicircular or more, the above function is
not performed.
The reason for this is as follows:
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 39

P2 P3,P4 P5

P1 P6
N7
N5 N4 G41G91X1500Y2000；
N5 X1500Y2000；
N4 N8
N6 G02J-6000；
P0 P7
N7 G01X1500Y-2000；
Programmed path N8 G40X1500Y-2000；
P7

Tool center path

If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows:

P0 → P1 → P2 → P3（Circle） → P4 → P5 → P6 → P7 But if the distance between
P2 and P3 is negligible, the point P3 is ignored. Therefore, the tool path is as
follows:
P0 → P1 → P2 → P4 → P5 → P6 → P7 Namely, circle cutting by the block N6 is
ignored.

（12） Interference Check

Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check function checks for
tool overcutting in advance. However, all interference cannot be checked by this
function. The interference check is performed even if overcutting does not occur.

ａ) Criteria for detecting interference

(1) The direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path
(from 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths).

(2) In addition to the condition (1), the angle between the start point and end
point on the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point
and end point on the programmed path in circular machining (more than 180
degrees).
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 40

EXAMPLE①
Tool center path

The directions of these

two paths are different
(180°)
Programmed path

Tool center path

Programmed path

The directions of these two paths are different (180°)

EXAMPLE②
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 41

r2

r1
Tool center path N6

N5
Programmed path
Center N7

(G41)
N5 G01 G91 X8000 Y2000 H01；
N6 G02 Y-1600 X3200 I2000 J -8000 H02；
N7 G01 X2000 Y-5000 ；

(Tool compensation value corresponding to H01: r 1 = 2000)

(Tool compensation value corresponding to H02: r 2 = 6000)

In the above example, the arc in block N6 is placed in the one quadrant. But
after cutter compensation, the arc is placed in the four quadrants.

ｂ) Correction of interference in advance

(1) Removal of the vector causing the interference When cutter compensation
is performed for blocks A, B and C and vectors V1, V2, V3 and V4
between blocks A and B, and V5, V6, V7 and V8 between B and C are
produced, the nearest vectors are checked first. If interference occurs,
they are ignored. But if the vectors to be ignored due to interference are
the last vectors at the corner, they cannot be ignored.
Check between vectors V4 and V5
Interference ——V4 and V5 are ignored.
Check between V3 and V6
Interference ——V3 and V6 are ignored
Check between V2 and V7
Interference ——V2 and V7 are Ignored
Check between V1 and V8
Interference ——V1 and V8 are cannot be ignored
If while checking, a vector without interference is detected, subsequent
vectors are not checked. If block B is a circular movement, a linear
movement is produced if the vectors are interfered.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 42

Example1 The tool moves linearly from V1 to V8

V7 V2
V1 L S V8

C S C
V6
V3

Tool center path

A C
Programmed path V5 V4

B
If the tool stops in the block A
V4 ，V5 ：Interference
using single block operation, the V3 ，V6 ：Interference
tool center will move to V3. V2 ，V7 ：Interference
O1 V1 ，V8 ：No Interference
O2

Example 2 The tool moves linearly as follows:

Tool path ：V1 → V2 → V7→ V8

S
L V2 V7 L
V1 V8 C
Tool center path C
S
V6 V3

Programmed path
A C
V5 V4

If the tool stops in the block A

using single block operation, the B V4 ，V5 ：Interference
tool center will move to V3. V3 ，V6 ：Interference
Then start up, move tool to V7 V2 ，V7 ：No interference
or V8.
O1 O 2
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 43

(2) If the interference occurs after correction (1), the tool is stopped with an
alarm. If the interference occurs after correction (1) or if there are only one
pair of vectors from the beginning of checking and the vectors interfere,
the alarm (P/S41) is displayed and the tool is stopped immediately after
execution of the preceding block. If the block is executed by the single
block operation, the tool is stopped at the end of the block.

Tool center path

Stop

C
A

Programmed path
V1
V2 ，V5 ：Interference
V1 ，V6 ：Interference
V6
V5 V2

B
After ignoring the vector V2 and V5 because of interference, the interference
also occurs between vectors V1 and V6. Then the alarm is generated and the
tool is stopped.
d）When interference is assumed although actual interference does not occur

(1) Depression which is smaller than the cutter compensation value

Tool center path

Programmed path Stop

A C
B
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 44

There is no actual interference, but since the direction programmed in block B

is opposite to that of the path after cutter compensation the tool stops and an
alarm is displayed.
(2) Groove which is smaller than the cutter compensation value
Programmed path Tool center path

Stop

A
B C

In the same way as 1, the programmed path will be opposite to the tool path
after cutter compensation has been applied. This state is determined to
constitute interference. An alarm is issued and the machine stops.

（13） Input Command from MDI

Cutter compensation is not performed for commands input from the MDI. However,
when automatic operation by absolute commands is temporarily stopped by the
single block function, MDI operation is performed, and then automatic operation
starts again, the tool path is as follows:

In this case, the vectors at the start position of the next block are translated and
the other vectors are produced by the next two blocks. Therefore, from point PC,
cutter compensation is accurately performed.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 45

Vc1'

VB2 Vc1

Programmed path in
absolute command PC
VB1 Vc2
PB

PA
PD
MDI operation
V’ B2

V’ B1 PB'

When position PA，PB and PC are programmed in an absolute command, tool is

stopped by the single block function after executing the block from PA to PB and the
tool is moved by MDI operation. Vectors VB1 and VB2 are translated to V'B1 and V'B2
and offset vectors are recalculated for the vectors VC1 and VC2 between block PB→
PC and PC→PD. However, since vector VB2 is not calculated again, compensation is
accurately performed from position PC.

（14） Manual Operation

For manual operation during the cutter compensation, refer to manual operation of
operation.

(15)If the tool length compensation is specified during the cutter

compensation, the cutter compensation value will be looked as
altered.

(16) General precautions on offset

（ａ）Offset value command
The offset value is commanded by an H code which specifies an offset value
number. Once commanded, an H code remains valid until another H code is
commanded or cleared. In addition to specifying the offset value for cutter
compensation, the H code is also used to command offset value for tool offset.

（ｂ）Changing the offset value

In general, the offset value is changed in the cancel mode, when changing
tools. If the offset value is changed in offset mode, the vector at the end point
of the block is calculated for the new offset value.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 46

Calculated from offset value in block 6.

Calculated from offset

value in block 7.
N7

N6 N8

（ｃ）Positive/negative offset amount and tool center path

In the offset amount is negative (-), distribution is made for a figure in which
G41 and G42 are all replaced with each other on the process sheet.
Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of the workpiece,
it will pass around the inside, and vice versa.
The figure below shows one example. Generally, the offset amount is
programmed to be positive (+).
When a tool path is programmed as in (a), if the offset amount is made
negative (-), the tool center moves as in (b), and vice versa. Consequently, the
same tape permits cutting both male and female shapes, and any gap
between them can be adjusted by the selection of the offset amount.
Applicable if start-up and cancel is A type.

（ａ）Tool center path

（b）Tool center path

（ｄ）Overcutting by cutter compensation

(1) Machining an inside corner at a radius smaller than the cutter radius When
the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because the inner
offsetting of the cutter will result in overcutting, an alarm is displayed and
the CNC stops at the start of the block. In single block operation, the
overcutting is generated because the tool is stopped after the block
execution.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 47

Tool center path An alarm is generated

and the operation stops

Programmed path
乔乔Ç

An alarm is generated and

the operation stops here
in single block operation

乔乔Ç

乔If the CNC does not stop, overcutting occurs.

(2) Machining a groove smaller than the tool radius

Since the cutter compensation forces the path of the center of the tool to
move in the reverse of the programmed direction, overcutting will result. In
this case an alarm is displayed and the CNC stops at the start of the block.

An alarm is displayed and

Tool center path
the operation stops

Programmed path

Overcutting if the operation

would not stop

(3) Machining a step smaller than the tool radius

When machining of the step is commanded by circular machining in the
case of a program containing a step smaller than the tool radius, the path
of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes reverse to the
programmed direction. In this case, the first vector is ignored, and the tool
moves linearly to the second vector position. The single block operation is
stopped at this point. If the machining is not in the single block mode, the
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 48

cycle operation is continued. If the step is of linear, no alarm will be

generated and cut correctly. However uncut part will remain.

Linear movement
Stop position after execution of a single block

S
Tool center path

乔乔乔Ç

乔乔乔荺 par Programmed path

Center of the circular

Circular machining
machining
乔乔乔Ç

An overcutting will result if the first

vector is not ignored. The first vector is ignored

(4) Starting compensation and cutting along the Z-axis on the cutter
compensation C

It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z-axis
after the cutter compensation is effected at some distance from the
workpiece at the start of the machining.
In the case above, if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z-axis into
rapid traverse and cutting feed, follow the procedure below.

N1 G91G00X50000Y50000H01； N6：offset mode

N3 G01Z－30000F1；
N6 Y100000F2；

In the program example above, when executing

N3：move command
block N1, blocks N3 and N6 are also entered into
the buffer storage, and by the relationship among in Z axis
them the correct compensation is performed as in
the figure right.
N1：start up
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－14（COMPENSATION FUNCTION） 14 - 49

if the block N3 (move command in Z axis) is N6

divided as follows:
N1 G91G00X50000Y50000H01；
N3 Z－250000； N3，N5; move command
N5 G01Z－5000F1； in Z axis
N6 Y100000F2；

N1

As there are two move command blocks not included in the selected plane
and the block N6 cannot be entered into the buffer storage, the tool center
path is calculated by the information of N1 in the figure above. That is, the
offset vector is not calculated in start-up and the overcutting may result. The
above example should be modified as follows:
In the program example above, when executing block N1, blocks N3 and N6
are also entered into the buffer storage, and by the relationship among them
the correct compensation is performed as in the figure above.

N1 G91G00X50000Y40000H01；
N6
N2 Y10000；
N3 G01Z－25000F1；
N3，N5 move
N5 G01Z－5000F1；
command in Z axis
N6 Y100000F2；
(The direction of the move command N2
N2is same as that of N6.）

N1

14.4 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)

The values of the tool length compensation and the cutter compensation can be
entered by the program.
Format:
G10 P__ R__ ；
P: offset number
R: offset amount
The specified offset amount is in absolute mode or in incremental mode via
G90/G91. The command G90/G91 can be specified in front of the command G10.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－15（MEASURING FUNCTION） 15 - 1

15. MEASURING FUNCTION

15.1 SKIP FUNCTION (G31)

G31 IP__ F__ ；

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31
command, like G01. If an external skip signal (SKP No.001.7) is input during the
execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted and the next
block is executed. The skip function is used when the end of machining is not
programmed but specified with a signal from the machine, for example, in grinding.
It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
G31 is one-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified).
The motion will be changed according to the command G90/G91 in the next block.

15.1.1 The next block to G31 is an incremental command

The incremental motion from SKIP signal interrupt:

Example:
G31 G91 X100.0 F100 ；
Y50.0 ；

Actual motion
50.0
SKIP signal is input here
Motion without
SKIP signal

100.0

15.1.2 The next block to G31 is an absolute command for 1 axis.

The commanded axis moves to the specified position, no commanded axis remains
where the SKIP signal is input.
Example:
G31 G90 X200.0 F100 ；
Y100.0 ；
(***,200.0
)
Actual motion
SKIP signal is input here 50.0
Motion without
SKIP signal
（200.0,0) 时
15.1.3 The next block to G31 is an absolute command for 2 axes.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－15（MEASURING FUNCTION） 15 - 2

The tool will move to the next block specified position wherever the SKIP signal is
input.
Example:
G31 G90 X200.0 F100 ；
X300.0 Y100.0 ；

Actual motion
100.0 SKIP signal is input here

Motion without
SKIP signal
（200.0,0)

x
100.0 200.0 300.0

The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom
macro because they are stored in the custom macro system variable #5041 to
#5044. So it can be used as measuring. In addition, SKIP function is valid when the
motion amount is not definite.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－16（WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM） 16 - 1

16.WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

16.1 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM（G54～G59）
16.1.1 Workpiece Coordinate System

No coordinate systems are determined by G92, but six coordinate systems proper
to the machine tool are set in advance, permitting selecting any of them by G54 to
G59.

G54 ······· Workpiece coordinate system 1

G55 ······· Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 ······· Workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 ······· Workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 ······· Workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 ······· Workpiece coordinate system 6

The six coordinate systems are determined by setting distances (work zero offset
values) in each axis from the reference point to their respective zero points.

Ｚ
Ｚ

Ｙ
Ｘ

Work zero offset Ｘ

Reference point

Example：
N10 G55 G90 G00 X100.0 Z20.0；
N20 G56 X80.5 Z25.5；

In the above example, rapid traverse positioning is made from the position
（X=100.0，Z=20.0）in workpiece coordinate system 2 to the position（X=80.5，
Z=25.5 ） in workpiece coordinate system 3. If G91 is in the block N20, the
incremental movement is generated. When the block N20 is executing, the
absolute coordinate value changes to the coordinate value in workpiece coordinate
system G57 automatically.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－16（WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM） 16 - 2

NOTE:
The parameter №005 PPD determines whether the relative position changes or
not according to the coordinate system setting.
PPD=0 No alternating
PPD=1 alternating
Z

Z N20(G91) (80.5,25.5)
（80.5,25.5) (X2,Z2)
G56
X
N10
N20 (G90)

（100，20）
X
G55

Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference position return

after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, G54 coordinate system
is selected.

NOTE:

When the six workpiece coordinate systems are specified with G54 to G59, the
command G92 is not used to set coordinate system. By specifying G92IP_;, a
workpiece coordinate system (selected with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to
set a new workpiece coordinate system so that the current tool position matches
the specified coordinates (IP_). Then, the amount of coordinate system shift is
added to all the workpiece zero point offset values. This means that all the
workpiece coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount. Don’t specify G92
jointly with G54 to G59.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－16（WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM） 16 - 3

Y
Y'

160 100 Tool position

100
X'
A 100

X
100 200
If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the tool is positioned at (200, 160) in G54
mode, workpiece coordinate system 1 （X＇，Y＇） shifted by vector A is created.

16.1.2 Shift or Change Workpiece Coordinate System (G10)

When workpiece coordinate system are insufficient in spite of the availability of six
ones by G54 to G59, or when workpiece coordinate system are to be moved for
each program, a programmed command shifts or changes them.

G90/G91 G10 L2 Pp IP_;

p=0 to 5 : Workpiece zero point offset value correspond to workpiece
coordinate system 1 to 6
IP: Workpiece zero point offset value of each axis
G90/G91: absolute/incremental

NOTE:
L=1 or is omitted: Tool offset value

16.1.3 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

A coordinate system is established at the referenced point return time after the
power is turned on, according to the preset parameter №076～078.
№076～078 are set to zero: Workpiece coordinate system is specified.
№076～078 are set to non-zero: Workpiece coordinate system shift the specified
value.

16.1.4 Workpiece zero point offset value’s Display and Input

Display:
Under ［Set］menu, workpiece zero point offset value is on the third or the fourth
page. Or, ［Set3］menu under ［Set］menu.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－16（WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM） 16 - 4

O0002 N0010
Set
G54 X30.00 G55 X50.00
Y32.00 Y52.00
Z34.00 Z54.00

G56 X60.00 G57 X70.00

Y62.00 Y72.00
Z64.00 Z74.00

address
Input mode

Alarm Graphic Set Machine Index

Input:
(1) Press cursor key ↓, the cursor moves from G54 to G59. Press cursor key ↑,
the cursor will move in the opposite direction.
(2) Workpiece coordinate system is selected by cursor key
(3) press address key （X/Y/Z ）
(4) Input workpiece coordinate zero point offset value
(5) press the ［INPUT］button

16.1.4 ALARM

The alarm №031 occurs under below circumstance in G10 mode:

(1) Address P is omitted or its value isn’t 0 to 5
(2) Address L is not 0 or 1
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 1

17. CUSTOM MACRO

A function covering a group of instructions is stored in memory as same as a
subprogram. The stored function is presented by one instruction, so that only the
representative instruction need be specified to execute the function. This group of
registered instructions is called a “custom macro body” and the representative
instruction is called a “custom macro instruction” The custom macro body may
simply be called a macro. And the custom macro instruction may be called a macro
call command.

C u s to m m a c ro b o d y
M a in p r o g r a m

A g ro u p o f
in s t r u c t io n s
C u s to m m a c ro f o r a c e r t a in
in s t r u c t io n f u n c t io n .

Programmers need only remember representative macro instructions without

having to remember all the instructions in a custom macro body. The three most
significant points on custom macros are that variables can be used in the custom
macro body, operations can be performed on variables and actual values can be
assigned to the variables in custom macro instructions.

17.1 CUSTOM MACRO COMMAND

The custom macro command is the command to call the custom macro body.
Command format is as follows :
M98 P □□□□ ；
└─── Called macro body program No.
With the above command, the macro body specified by P is called.

17.2 CUSTOM MACRO BODY

In the custom macro body, the CNC command, which uses ordinary CNC
command variables, calculation, and branch command can be used. The custom
macro body starts from the program No. which immediately follows O and ends at
M99.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 2

O8000 ； Program No.

G65 H01 ... ... ; Calculation
G90 G00 X#101 ... .. ; CNC command
... using variables
...
...
G65 H82 ... ; Branch command
...
...
End of custom
M99 ;
macro

Construction of the custom macro

17.2.1 Variables
A variable can be specified to make the macro flexible and versatile by applying
the calculated variable when calling the macro or when executing the macro itself
or via LCD/MDI. Multiple variables are identified from each other by variable
numbers.

(1) How to express variables

Variables are expressed by variable numbers following # as shown below.
#i (i = 1, 2, 3, 4 .....)
(Example) #5, #109, #1005

(2) How to quote variables

A numeral following an address can be replaced by a variable.
Assume that <Address> #i or <Address> -#i is programmed, and it means that
the variable value or its complement serves as the command value of the
address.

(Example)
F#103 F15 was commanded when #103=15
Z-#110 Z-250 was commanded when #110=250
G#130 G3 was commanded when #103=3.
When replacing a variable number with a variable, it is not expressed as
##1000, for example, but express as #9100, That is, “9” next to “#” indicates
the substitute of the variable number, while the lower number to be replaced.
(Example)
If #100=105 and #105=500,
“X#9100” indicates that X500 was commanded,
“X-#9100” indicates that X-500 was commanded.
NOTE:
1 No variable can be quoted at address O and N. Neither O#100 nor N#120
can be programmed.
2 It is not possible to command a value exceeding the maximum command
value set in each address. When #30=120, G#30 has exceeded the
maximum command value.
3 The variable value’s Display and Set:
The variable value can display on the screen of［LCD］, it can be set by
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 3

MDI mode.(refer to macro variable set)

17.2.2 Kind of Variables
Variables are sorted into common variables and system variables according to
variable numbers, and their applications and characters differ from each other.
(1) Common variable #100 to #131 and #500 to #515 Common variables are
common to main programs and each macro called from these main programs.
That is, #i in a macro is equal to #i in another macro. Accordingly the
calculated value of a common variable #I in a certain macro can be used in
another macro.
The use of common variables is not specially determined in the system. The
user can freely use them.
Common variables #100 to #131 are cleared when the power is turned off, and
reset to “0” just after power was turned on. Common variables #500 to #515
are not cleared, even if power is turned off, and their values remain unchanged.

(2) System variable

The system variables are defined as variables whose applications remain fixed.
(a) Tool offset amount #1 to #32
The offset amount can be known by reading system variable #1 to #32
values for tool offset amounts, and these values can be changed by
substituting them into system variables #1 to #32.
Among these offset numbers 1 to 32, those that are not used as offset
amounts can be treated as hold type common variables (#500 to #515).

(b) Interface input signals #1000 to #1015, #1032

Interface signals can be known, by reading system variables #1000 to
#1015 for reading interface signals.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DI UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI09 UI08
#1015 #1014 #1013 #1012 #1011 #1010 #1009 #1008

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DI UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
#1007 #1006 #1005 #1004 #1003 #1002 #1001 #1000

Input signal Variable value

Contact closed 1

Contact opened 0

By reading system variable #1032, all the input signals can be read at once.
15
#1032 = Σ
i=0
#(1000+i) ×2i
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 4

NOTE:
1 No value can be substituted into system variables #1000 to #1032.
2 System variables #1000 to #1015 can be displayed by diagnostic
function.
DGNOS No.110 U10 to U17
DGNOS No.111 U18 to U15

(c) Interface output signals #1100 to #1115, #1132

A value can be substituted into system variables #1100 to #1115 for
sending the interface signals.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
DO UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO09 UO08
#1115 #1114 #1113 #1112 #1111 #1110 #1109 #1108

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DO UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
#1107 #1106 #1105 #1104 #1103 #1102 #1101 #1100

Output signal Variable value

1 Contact closed
0 Contact open
By substituting a value into system variable #1132, all output signals (DO0 to
DO15) can be sent out at once.

15
#1132 = Σ #(1100+i) ×2i
i=0

NOTE:
3 If any other number than “0” or “1” is substituted into system variables
#1100 to #1115, it is treated as “1”.
4 It is possible to read the values of system variables #1100 to #1132.
5 System variables #1100 to #1115 can be displayed by diagnostic function.
（№126，127）
6 K100M CNC macro input and output signal refer to APPENDIX 8.

(d) Position information #5001 to #5083

The position information can be known by reading system variables #5001 to
#5083. The unit of position information is 0.001 mm in metric input and 0.0001
inch in inch input.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 5

System Reading Cutter and tool

Position information while length
variables
moving compensation
#5001 Block end point position of X axis (ABSIO) Not considered.
Position of tool nose
#5002 Block end point position of Y axis Possible (program command
#5003 Block end point position of Z axis position)

#5041 Present position of X axis (ABSOT) Considered.

Position of tool
#5042 Present position of Y axis Impossible reference point
(ABSOLUTE
#5043 Present position of Z axis indication)
#5080 Value of cutter compensation
#5081 Value of tool length compensation (X axis)
#5082 Value of tool length compensation (Y axis) Possible

#5083 Value of tool length compensation (Z axis)

NOTE:
It is not possible to substitute any value into system variables #5001 to #5083.

17.2.3 Calculation and Branch Instructions G65

General Form:

G65 Hm P#i Q#j R#k ；

m: Indicates macro functions at 01 to 99

#i: Variable name to which arithmetic result is loaded.
#j: Variable name 1 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
#k: Variable name 2 to be operated. A constant is also acceptable.
Meaning: #i = #j ○ #k
└─────── Operator (Specified by Hm)
EXAMPLE:
P#100 Q#101 R#102……#100 = #101 ○ #102 ；
P#100 Q#101 R15 ……#100 = #101 ○ 15 ；
P#100 Q-100 R#102……#100 = -100 ○ #102 ；
NOTE:
1 No decimal point can be put to variable values. Therefore, the meaning of
each value is the same as that designated without decimal point when
quoted in each address.
(Example) #100 = 10
X#100……… 0.01 mm (metric input)
2 H code specified by G65 does not affect any selection of offset amount.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 6

G code H code Function Definition

G65 H01 Definition, substitution #i ＝ #j
G65 H02 Addition #i ＝ #j ＋ #k
G65 H03 Subtraction #i ＝ #j － #k
G65 H04 Product #i ＝ #j × #k
G65 H05 Division #i ＝ #j ÷ #k
G65 H11 Logical sum #i ＝ #j OR #k
G65 H12 Logical product #i ＝ #j AND #k
G65 H13 Exclusive OR #i ＝ #j XOR #k
G65 H21 Square root #i = # j
G65 H22 Absolute value #i ＝ ┃#j┃
#i＝#j-trunc(#j÷#k)×#k
G65 H23 Remainder
(see note)
G65 H24 Conversion from BCD to binary #i ＝ BIN(#J)
G65 H25 Conversion from binary to BCD #i ＝ BCD(#J)
G65 H26 Combined multiplication/division #i ＝ (#i×#j) ÷ #k
# i = # j +# k
2 2
G65 H27 Combined square root
G65 H31 Sine #i ＝ #j×SIN(#k)
G65 H32 Cosine #i ＝ #j×COS(#k)
G65 H33 Tangent #i ＝ #j×TAN(#k)
G65 H34 Arctangent #i ＝ ATAN(#j/#k)
G65 H80 Unconditional divergence GOTO n
G65 H81 Conditional divergence 1 IF #j ＝ #k, GOTO N
G65 H82 Conditional divergence 2 IF #j ≠ #k, GOTO N
G65 H83 Conditional divergence 3 IF #j ＞ #k, GOTO N
G65 H84 Conditional divergence 4 IF #j ＜ #k, GOTO N
G65 H85 Conditional divergence 5 IF #j ≥ #k, GOTO N
G65 H86 Conditional divergence 6 IF #j ≤ #k, GOTO N
P/S alarm number 500
G65 H99 P/S alarm occurrence
+n occurrence

NOTE: (trunc : Discard fractions less than 1)

(1) Variable arithmetic command

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 7

(A) Definition and substitution of variable #i = #j

G65 H01 P#i Q#j ;
[Example]
G65 H01 P#101 Q1055 ; (#101=1005)
G65 H01 P#101 Q#110 ; (#101=#110)
G65 H01 P#101 Q-#112 ; (#101=-#112)

(B) Addition #i = #j + #k
G65 H02 P#i Q#j R#k;
[Example]
G65 H02 P#101 Q#102 R15 ; (#101=#102+15)

(C) Subtraction #i = #j -#k

G65 H03 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H03 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102－#103)

(D) Product #I ＝ #J×#K

G65 H04 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H04 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102×#103)

(E) Division #I ＝ #J÷#K

G65 H05 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H05 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102÷#103)

(F) Logical sum #I ＝ #J.OR.#K

G65 H11 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H11 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102.OR.#103)

(G) Logical product #I ＝ #J.AND.#K

G65 H12 P#I Q#J R#K；
［Example］
G65 H12 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102.AND.#103)

(H) Exclusive OR #I ＝ #J.XOR.#K

G65 H13 P#I Q#J R#K；
［Example］
G65 H13 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102.XOR.#103)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 8

(I) Square root # I = # J

G65 H21 P#I Q#J；
［Example］
G65 H21 P#101 Q#102； (#101 ＝ #102 )

(J) Absolute value #I ＝ ┃#J┃

G65 H22 P#I Q#J；
[Example]
G65 H22 P#101 Q3102； (#101 ＝ ┃#102┃)

(K) Remainder #I ＝ #J－TRUNC(#J/#K)×#K TRUNC: Discard fractions less

than 1
G65 H23 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H23 P#101 Q#102 R#103 ； (#101 ＝ #102 － TRUNC(#102/#103) ×
#103)

(L) Conversion from BCD to binary #I ＝ BIN(#J)

G65 H24 P#I Q#J；
[Example]
G65 H24 P#101 Q#102； (#101 ＝ BIN(#102))

(M) Conversion from binary to BCD #I ＝ BCD(#J)

G65 H25 P#I Q#J；
[Example]
G65 H25 P#101 Q#102； (#101 ＝ BCD(#102))

(N) Combined multiplication/division #I ＝ (#I×#J)÷#K

G65 H26 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H26 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ (#101×#102)÷#103)

(O) Combined square root # I = # J 2 + # K2

G65 H27 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H27 P#101 Q#102 R#103； ( #101 = #1022+#1032 )

(P) Sine #I ＝ #J·SIN(#K) (unit: 1‰ deg)

G65 H31 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H31 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101＝#102·SIN(#103))

(Q) Cosine #I ＝ #J·COS(#K) (unit: 1‰ deg)

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 9

G65 H32 P#I Q#J R#K；

[Example]
G65 H32 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102·COS(#103))
(R) Tangent #I ＝ #J·TAM(#K) (unit: 1‰ deg)
G65 H33 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H33 P#101 Q#102 R#103； (#101 ＝ #102·TAN(#103))

(S) Arctangent #I ＝ ATAN(#J/#K) (unit: 1‰ deg)

G65 H34 P#I Q#J R#K；
[Example]
G65 H34 P#101 Q#102 R#103；(#101 ＝ ATAN(#102/#103))
NOTE:
1 Angle in (p) to (s) must be indicated by degree and the least input increment is
1/1000 degree.
2 If either Q or R necessary for each arithmetic operation was not indicated, its
value is calculated as “0”.
3 All figures below decimal point are truncated if each arithmetic result includes
decimal point.

(2) Divergence command

(A) Unconditional branch
G65 H80 Pn； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H80 P120； (Diverge to N120)

(B) Conditional divergence1 #J.EQ.#K (＝)

G65 H81 Pn Q#J R#K； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H81 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
#101＝#102 go to N1000
#101≠#102 go to next

(C) Conditional divergence2 #J.NE.#K (≠)

G65 H82 Pn Q#J R#K； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H82 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
#101≠#102 go to N1000
#101＝#102 go to next

(D) Conditional divergence3 #J.GT.#K (＞)

G65 H83 Pn Q#J R#K； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H83 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 10

#101＞#102 go to N1000
#101≤#102 go to next
(E) Conditional divergence4 #J.LT.#K (＜)
G65 H84 Pn Q#J R#K； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H84 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
#101＜#102 go to N1000
#101≥#102 go to next

(F) Conditional divergence5 #J.GE.#K (≥)

G65 H85 Pn Q#J R#K； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H85 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
#101≥#102 go to N1000
#101＜#102 go to next

(E) Conditional divergence6 #J.LE.#K (≤)

G65 H86 Pn Q#J R#K； n: Sequence number
[Example]
G65 H86 P1000 Q#101 R#102；
#101≤#102 go to N1000
#101＞#102 go to next

(H) P/S alarm occurrence

G65 H99 Pi； Alarm No. = i +500
[Example]
G65 H99 P15；
P/S alarm occurrence 515。

NOTE:

1 If positive numbers were designated as sequence numbers at branch

designations, they are searched forward first and then, backward. If
negative numbers were designated, they are searched backward first and
then, forward.
2 Sequence number can also be designated by variables. (Example) G65 H81
P#100 Q#101 R#102 ; When conditions are satisfied, processing branches
to the block having the sequence number designated with #100.

17.2.4 Warning and Notes on Custom Macro

1 How to input “#”

For standard MDI key, when “#” key is depressed after address G, X, Y, Z, R, I,
J, K, F, H, M, S, T, or P, # code is input.
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 11

2 It is also possible to give a macro instruction in the MDI mode.

However address data other than G65 are not displayed by keying operation.
3 Address H, P, Q and R of macro instruction must always be written after G65.
Address O and N only are writable before G65.
H02 G65 P#100 Q#101 R#102 ; Error
N100 G65 H01 P#100 Q10 ; Correct

4 Single block
Generally, the macro instruction block does not stop even if single block stop is
turned on. However, by setting parameter No. 013 SBKM, it is possible to make
single block effective. This is used for macro testing.

5 Variable values can be taken within a range of -232～+232-1, but they are not
displayed correctly, except for -9999999 to 99999999. If they exceed the above
range, they are displayed as *******.

6 It is possible to nest subprograms up to four times.

7 Since an integer only is employable as the variable value, in case the operation
results with decimal numbers, the figures below decimal point truncated, if an
arithmetic result contains a fraction part. Particularly be careful with the
arithmetic sequence, accordingly.

[Example]
When #100=35, #101=10, #102=5, the following results.
#110=#100 ÷ #101 (=3)
#111=#110 × #102 (=15)
#120=#100 × #102 (=175)
#121=#120 ÷ #101 (=17)
#111=15 and #121=17

8 The executing time of macro instructions are different according to condition, its
average value is considered as 10ms in general.

17.3 Examples of Custom Macro

17.3.1 Bolt hole circle
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 12

with a point, set by the macro for the center of a circle setting as basic point, N
holes equally spaced on the circle are drilled. The first hole is on the line of angle A.

Third hole

Second hole
R First hole

A N-th hole
Basic point X
（X0，Y0）
(N—1)-th hole

X0,Y0 Coordinate value of the bolt hole circle basic point

R Radius
A Start angle
N Quantity
#500: Coordinate value of basic point X (X0)
#501: Coordinate value of basic point Y (Y0)
#502: Radius (R)
#503: Start angle (A)
#504: Quantity N
N＞0 CCW Quantity N
N＜0 CW Quantity N

The following variables is used for macro calculation:

#100: counter to show that the I-th hole machining (I)
#101: counter result value(＝┃N┃)(IE)
#102: degree of angle of I-th hole (θI)
#103: storage of coordinate value of basic point X (Xi)
#104: storage of coordinate value of basic point Y (Yi)

The custom macro body is created as follows.

O9010；
N100 G65 H01 P#100 Q#0； I＝0
G65 H22 P#101 Q#504； IE＝┃N┃
N200 G65 H04 P#102 Q#100 R3600 00；
G65 H05 P#102 Q#102 R#504； θI＝A＋360°×I/N
G65 H02 P#102 Q#503 R#102；
G65 H32 P#103 Q#502 R#102； X I＝X I＋R·COS(θI)
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 13

G65 H02 P#103 Q#500 R#103；

G65 H31 P#104 Q#502 R#102； Y I＝Y I＋R·SIN(θI)
G65 H02 P#104 Q#501 R#104；
G90 G00 X#103 Y#104； positioning I-th hole
M10； bore machining M code output
G65 H02 P#100 Q#100 R1； I＝I＋1
G65 H84 P-200 Q#100 R#101； I＜IE go to N200 to bore hole IE
M99；
The program which call the above macro body is written as follows:
O0010；
G65 H01 P#500 Q100000； X0=100mm
G65 H01 P#501 Q-200000； Y0=-200 mm
G65 H01 P#502 Q100000； R=100 mm
G65 H01 P#503 Q20000； A=20°
G65 H01 P#504 Q12； N=12 CCW
G92 X0 Y0 Z0；
M98 P9010； Macro call
X0 Y0；
M30；
The variables #500 to #504 can be set in MDI mode, thus, the above command
G65 can be ignored.

17.3.2 Pocket Machining

 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 14

In this example a custom macro performs a pocket milling cycle machining an area
as in the figure below. Area machining is performed at a certain depth in Z and
further with a deeper cut-in.
k

Rapid traverse
j
Feedrate 8xe

Feedrate e or f
(e: in Z
f: XY plane）

Start point
i r z
(X，Y）
q
k

The following variables are used:

#500: absolute coordinate value of start point (button left of pocket) (X)
#501: absolute coordinate value of start point (button left of pocket) (Y)
#502: absolute coordinate value of point Z (Z)
#503: absolute coordinate value of point R (R)
#504: one-cut depth (Q) positive
#505: length of area in X (I), positive
#506: length of area in Y (J), positive
#507: finish allowance (K)
#508: take cut width so that machining width may not exceed cutter diameter
×T% (T≤100)
#509: tool radius (D)
#510: feed rate in XY plane (F)
#511: feed rate at cut-in time (E), feed is made at 8xE up to 1mm before cut-in.
#100～#113: work variable use for calculation

The custom macro body is created as follows.

G65 H02 P#100 Q#509 R#507； #100=#509+#507=D+K
G65 H04 P#102 Q#509 R2；
G65 H26 P#102 Q#508 R100； #102=Diameter×#508/100(Diameter×
T/100)
G65 H02 P#102 Q#102 R1； #102=#102+1
G65 H02 P#103 Q#500 R#100； #103=X+D+K
G65 H02 P#104 Q#501 R#100； #104=Y+D+K
G65 H02 P#105 Q#500 R#505；
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 15

G65 H03 P#105 Q#105 R#100； #105=X+I-(D+K)

G65 H02 P#106 Q#106 R#506；
G65 H03 P#106 Q#106 R#100； #106=Y+J-(D+K)
G65 H02 P#107 Q#502 R#507； #107=Z+K cut end point coordinate value in
Z
G90 G00 X#104 Y#104; positioning at point A (XY plane)
Z#503； positioning at point R (in Z)
G65 H01 P#108 Q#503；
N100 G65 H03 P#108 Q#108 R#504； #108=R+Q
G65 H85 P110 Q#108 R#107； if #108≥Z+K go to N110
G65 H01 P#108 R#107； if #108＜Z+K, #108=#107
N110 G1 Z#108 F#511； cut depth Q at the speed of E in Z
X#105 F#510； cut depth up to #105 at the speed of F in X
G65 H01 P#109 Q1； #109=1，cut counter in Y
N120 G65 H04 P#110 Q#109 R#102； #110=#109×#102+#104
G65 H02 P#110 Q#110 R#104;
G65 H86 P130 Q#110 R#106； if #110≤#106 go to N130
G65 H01 P#110 Q#106； then #110=#106
N130 Y#110； cut depth up to #110 at the speed of F in Y
G65 H23 P#111 Q#109 R2； #111 cut counter odd/even in Y(0,1)
G65 H81 P140 Q#111 R0；
X#103； even(2,4,6 ..) cut depth up to #103 at the
speed of F in X
G65 H80 P150；
N140 X#105； odd(1,3,5 ..) cut depth up to #105 at the
speed of F in X
N150 G65 H02 P#109 Q#109 R1； #109=#109+1
G65 H84 P-120 Q#110 R#106； if #110＜#106 go to N120
G00 Z#503； return to point R at the speed of rapid
traverse in Z
X#103 Y#104； rapid traverse positioning in X,Y
#103,#104
G65 H86 P200 Q#108 R#107； if #108≤#107 go to N200 machining end
G65 H02 P#112 Q#108 R1000； #112=#108+1.MM
G65 H04 P#113 Q#511 R8； #113=8×E
G01 Z#112 F#113； Z axis move up to 1mm before cut-in at
the speed of 8xE
G65 H80 P-100； go to N100 continue machining cycle.
N200 M99；
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 16

17.3.3 Interface Signal

Read three digits of BCD data with a sign by address switching to #100.

DI structure

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

10 2
symbol 101 100
Used for other
purposes
Data effective sign

Structure of DO

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Not used Used for other address

purposes Address effective
sign

Function:
Assume that 4-digit DO output as address, by outer logic, they can attain signed 3-
digit BCD data corresponding to address via macro DI port. Output address and
input signal is valid only when effective signal is “1”. In output mode, the bit of no
used may be “0”, data of the bit used for other purposes can’t be changed.
Read data while sending address 7 as following:

O9100；
G65 H12 P#1132 Q#1132 R480； sending address 7
(No used:0 Used for other purposes : no
changed)
G65 H11 P#1132 Q#1132 R23； address effective signal ON
N10 G65 H81 P10 Q#1013 R0； await data effective
G65 H12 P#100 Q#1032 R4095； read 3-digit BCD data
G65 H24 P#100 Q#100； BIN transform
G65 H81 P20 Q#1012 R0；
G65 H01 P#100 Q-#100； signed
N20 G65 H12 P#1132 Q#1132 R495； address effective signal OFF
M99；
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－17（CUSTOM MACRO） 17 - 17

17.3.4 TRIM

h β
x
α

Feed rate
X

l
Tool

#500: workpiece width (L)

#501: start machining allowance (α)
#502: cut-off width (ΔX)
#503: workpiece clamp allowance (β)
#504: distance origin point →tool (H)

The macro body is created as follows:

O9110；
G65 H03 P#100 Q#500 R#501； #100=L-α
N10 G65 H03 P#101 Q#504 R#100； #101=H-#100
G90 G00 X#101； X axis positioning
M20； trim instruction
G65 H03 P#100 Q#100 R#502； #100-ΔX
G65 H85 P-10 Q#100 R#503； if #100≥β go to N10M99；

Example for debugging program:

O0009； (#500～#504 set by MDI mode)
G92 X0；
M98 P9110；
X0；
M30；
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－18（RIGID TAPPING） 18 - 1

18. Rigid Tapping (G93)

Program format:
G93 Z__ F/I __ ；
Process flow is:
z Z-axis feeds toward – direction at feed per rotation (cutting thread).
z After moving to the coordinate specified by program, spindle stops automatically,
after it stops completely, spindle rotates automatically in reverse direction specified,
and Z retracts to the start position.
z Spindle stops, and restores rotation direction specified before the program block.

G93 is a modal G code of group 01.Generally, after G93 it’s necessary to specify
other modal G code of group 01.
Examples G93 Z-100 F5. ; Tapping cycle to Z-100 ;
G00 X50. ; G00 movement.

Parameter will select whether to accelerate/decelerate during G93 tapping.

0 0 7 G93N
G93N 0: No speed-up/down control during G93 tapping.
1: Speed up/down according to exponential acceleration/deceleration
during G93 tapping.
When acceleration/deceleration control is selected, if spindle speed changes, it will
delay the change in thread. Therefore, when it requires high accuracy, you shall select
no speed up/down. However, when stepper is used, the spindle speed shall not be too
high, otherwise, it will be blocked because it has no speed up/down.

Additional description:
z Precaution: if G93 is executed after Z axis runs in positive direction, the system will
first carry out backlash compensation because it is doing reverse movement. In
this case one shall set parameter RVDL=0.If it blocks with stepper, you can set a
lower backlash compensation frequency.
Or first command Z-axis to move in negative direction before executing G93.
z The setting of parameter—spindle braking time will influence the rotating time for
reverse start after stopping, please take care of this in setting.

NOTE:
1、 Z must be in negative movement, otherwise it generates P/S alarm 012 ‘G93
format error’.
2、Don’t program X, Y value, otherwise it generates P/S alarm 012 ‘G93 format
 Ⅱ PROGRAMMING－18（RIGID TAPPING） 18 - 2

error’.
3、must start spindle before executing G93.
4、The spindle braking time of the machine is required to be short. At system
preparation, it is assumed movement ＋50.000. When requiring output spindle to
stop, the movement length shall not be more than 50 mm.
5、spindle speed is required not too high.
6、when I is specified, it is for imperial thread. The unit is no. of teeth per inch.
Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 0

Ⅲ OPERATION
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 1

Ⅲ、OPERATION
1.GENERAL
1.1 Manual Operation
1.1.1 Manual reference position return (See Ⅲ4.1)
The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position.
This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the
coordinate are set. Ordinarily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the
reference position. Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the
reference position using switches and pushbuttons located on the operator’s panel.

Reference point
Machine tool Operator’s panel

Tool

The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.
This operation is called automatic reference position return (See II 6.1).

1.1.2 The tool movement by manual operation

Using machine operator’s panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the
tool can be moved along each axis.

Machine operator’s panel

Manual pulse
generator

Tool

Workpiece
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 2

The tool can be moved in the following ways:

(i) Jog feed (See III 4.2)
The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed.

(ii) Incremental feed (See III 4.3)

The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a button is pressed.
(iii) Manual handle feed (See III4.4)
By rotating the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance corresponding
to the degree of handle rotation.
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING —AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
(see Ⅲ 5)

Program

O1000；
M..S..T..;
G92X..Y..Z..;
G00....;
G01.....;
...
...
... Tool

Workpiece

Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the created program. It

includes memory, DNC, and MDI operations.

1.2.1 Memory Operation

CNC Machine

Memory

Program

Memory operation (automatic operation)

 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 3

After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run
according to the program instructions. This operation is called memory operation.
1.2.2 MDI Operation

Machine
CN

Manual program
CR Key input

MDI operation

After the program is entered, as an command group, from the MDI keyboard, the
machine can be run according to the program. This operation is called MDI
operation.

1.2.3 DNC Operation

In this mode of operation, the program is not registered in the CNC memory. It is
read from the connected I/O unit instead. This mode is useful when the program is
too large to fit the CNC memory.

1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

1.3.1 Program selection

Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for
one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be
used, by searching the program number (III.3).
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 4

Memory
O1001； Program number
G92...;
..... ;
......; Workpiece1 program
M30 ;
Program number Program number search
O1002；
G92...; Automatic Operation
..... ; Workpiece2 program
......;
M30 ;

O1003； Program number

G92...;
..... ; Workpiece3 program
......;
M30 ;

1.3.2 Start and stop

Cycle start Start

Feed hold Stop

Reset
Stop caused Automatic operation
by program
Program stop
Program end

NOTE:
Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By
pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops.
By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program,
the running will stop during automatic operation. When one process machining is
completed, automatic operation stops.

1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM (see Ⅲ、6)

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It
checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This
check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position
display change (without running the machine)

1.4.1 Check by Running the Machine

(1) Dry run (see Ⅲ、6.5)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 5

Remove the workpiece,

check only movement
Tool of the tool. Select the
tool
movement rate using
the dial on the
operator’s panel.

table

(2) Feedrate override (see Ⅲ、6.3)

Feed rate specified by program

60 mm/min
Feed rate after feed rate override tool
12mm/min

Table
3) Single block (see Ⅲ、6.6)

Start

Start Start

Start

Stop

Stop Stop
Table

Stop
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 6

When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation then
stops. By pressing the cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then
stops. The program is checked in this manner.

1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running the
Machine
1) Machine lock (see Ⅲ、6.1)

Tool X 00000
Y 00000
Z 00000
.. ...

The tool remains stopped, and only

the positional displays of the axes
change.
Table

2) Auxiliary function lock (see Ⅲ、6.2)

When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during
the machine lock mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement,
coolant on/off, etc.) are disabled.

1.5 EDITING A PART PROGRAM (see Ⅲ、9)

After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or
modified from the CRT/MDI panel. This operation can be executed using the part
program storage/edit
function.
Program registration Program correction or modification

N1...
N2...

LCD key LCD key

program
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 7

1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal memory by key
operation on the CRT/MDI screen.

Data setting

Data

Data display

LCD key

CNC memory

1.6.1 Offset value (see Ⅲ、10.1)

Tool compensation number1

Setting
Tool compensation number2

Tool compensation number3

Display
Screen key

The tool has the tool dimension (length, diameter). When a workpiece is machined,
the tool movement value depends on the tool dimensions. By setting tool
dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes
that permit any tool to cut the workpiece specified by the program. Tool dimension
data is called the offset value.

Tool path 1

Machined
shape

Tool path 2

Offset value of the tool 1

Offset value of the tool2

1.6.2 Displaying and setting Operator’s setting data (see Ⅲ、10.2)

Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in operation. This
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 8

data causes machine characteristics to change.

For example, the following data can be set:
•Inch/Metric switching
•Selection of I/O devices
•Mirror image cutting on/off
The above data is called setting data.

Setting Mirror image machining

ISO code selecting
MDI absolute/incremental
Automatic sequence
Display number setting
...
LCD key ...
...

CNC
Operational characteristics

Movement of
the machine
Program Automatic
operation

1.6.3 Displaying and setting parameters (see Ⅲ、10.4)

The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of

various machines.
For example, CNC can specify the following:
• Rapid traverse rate of each axis
• Whether increment system is based on metric system or inch system.
• How to set command multiply/detect multiply (CMR/DMR)
Data to make the above specification is called parameters. Parameters differ
depending on machine tool.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 9

Setting Parameter
Rapid traverse rate
Position control
Reference position return
Backlash compensation data
Display Pitch error compensation data
...
LCD key ...
...
CNC
Operational
characteristics
Movement of the
Automatic machine
Program
operation

1.6.4 Data protection key

Program edition

Operator’s panel
LCD key
Protection Key Signal
Registration / modification inhibition Program protection
Key
Program
（CNC memory）

A key called the data protection key can be defined. It is used to prevent part
programs from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 10

1.7 DISPLAY
1.7.1 Program Display(see Ⅲ、11)

Program directory
The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the
programs scheduled next and the program list are displayed.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 11

1.7.2 Current Position Display (see Ⅲ、11.6)

X
Workpiece coordinate

The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. The
distance from the current position to the target position can also be displayed.

1.7.3 Alarm Display (see Ⅲ、11.8)

When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are
displayed on LCD screen.

1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display (see Ⅲ、11.7)

When an option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts are
displayed on the screen.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－1（GENERAL） 1 - 12

1.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT (see Ⅲ、12)

Memory

Program
RS232C Floppy disk
Offset interface
Computer
Parameter
...
...
...

CNC equipment

Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be output to a
floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into
CNC memory.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－2（OPERATIONAL DEVICES） 2 - 1

2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2.1 LCD/MDI PANEL
The LCD/MDI panel attached to KND 1000M is as figure 2-1.

Fig. 2-1
2.1.1 Adjustment of Liquid Crystal Screen Bright
KND 1000 series CNC install 7.5-inch liquid crystal screen, the adjustment of liquid
crystal screen bright is as follows:
1) In Reference Position Return or AUTO mode.
2) The first page on 【POS】 screen—ALL, press key X, Y , Z or 4, and one of
them is scintillation:
CURSOR UP key：change dull
(NOTE: at first, the key will change bright, and then it will change dull
gradually.)
CURSOR DOWN key: change bright by each time
NOTE:
Bright of liquid crystal screen is related to temperature. Under different
environment, it can be adjusted according to reality.

2.1.2 Display Function Keys

【POS】 ：position screen.
【PRGRM】 ：program screen.
【OFSET】 ：offset screen.
【PARAM】 ：parameter screen.
【DGNOS】 ：diagnosis screen.
【ALARM】 ：alarm screen.
【GRAPH】 ：graph screen.
【SET】 ：set screen.
【OPR/INDEX】：machine tool soft operator’s panel/index screen.
(press this key ,two screen can change each other.)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－2（OPERATIONAL DEVICES） 2 - 2

Press a function key on the LCD/MDI panel. The corresponding page will display.

NOTE:
When a function key is pressed twice continuously, the first page of the selected
screen will appear.

2.1.3 Soft Keys

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

The functions of the soft keys are automatically displayed, depending on the
configuration. Each main menu includes some sub-menu. The display content
corresponding to soft keys are displayed at the bottom of LCD.
In main menu, the function keys is the same as 2.1.3.

◄: Return main menu key

►: Continuous menu key

A) main menu:
Main menu has two pages altogether, there are five menus each page. “►” key
can be used to browse.
The first page:
【POS】 ：Display the current position
【PRGRM】 ：Program display and edit
【OFSET】 ：Display/set offset amount and macro variables.
【PARAM】 ：Display/set parameter.
【DGNOS】 ：Display diagnosis data.
The second page:
【ALARM】 ：Display alarm message.
【GRAPH】 ：Display, set graphic parameter, display tool path.
【SET】 ：Display, set parameter and parameter switch.
【MACHINE】：Machine tool soft operator’s panel screen.
【INDEX】 ： Operation and program message.

B) sub-menu:
Press the main menu soft keys twice continuously (or press function key directly),
entering the sub-menu. The peripheral line of the sub-menu is thinner than main
menu in order to distinguish them. Using PAGE key to change screen in main
menu without entering sub-menu.
Sub-menu of each main menu is as follows.
【POS】: [REL]: relative coordinate values
[ABS]: absolute coordinate values (work coordinate system)
[ALL]: coordinate values (all coordinate system)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－2（OPERATIONAL DEVICES） 2 - 3

Each screen also display the contents: feed, spindle, workpiece number, run
time, G code and so on.
【PRGRM】: [MDI/M], [PRGRM], [CUR/M], [CUR/NEXT], [INDEX].
Each screen divide two parts expect [PRGRM] and [INDEX] , display different
content. The sequence of screen is according to soft keys.
① block value/modal value
② program
③ current block/modal value
④ current block/next block
⑤ program catalogue and storage capacity

NOTE:
In edit mode, only [PRGRM] and [INDEX] can be displayed, [INDEX] is selected
only by soft keys, not by PAGE key.

【OFSET】: [OFSET], [MACRO VAL], [MACRO VAL]

[OFSET]: display offset amount
[MACRO VAL]: macro variables (#100～#131)
[MACRO VAL]: macro variables (#500～#515)

【PARAM】: [PARAM], [PITCH ERROR X], [PITCH ERROR Y], [PITCH ERROR
Z], [HELP].
Sub-menu can display each axis pitch error compensation value
directly, help is no used.
【DGNOS】: [MT←→PC],[PC←→NC],[PC],[STATE], [HELP]
Display MT←→PC and PC←→NC data, PC parameter, NC state,
help is no used.

【GRAPH】: [PARAM], [GRAPH].

Display graph parameter and tool path.

【SET】: [SET1], [SET2], [SET3].

Display set parameter and parameter switch state.

【MT】: Three pages screen.

1 mode and program testing switch
2 override, feed rate, automatic start and stop, manual axis selecting
and start.
3 spindle rotate CW/CCW, start/stop, jog, coolant switch, and
machine motion switch. Sub-menu is machine tool operational
button.

【INDEX】: [OPR], [ALARM], [G CODE], [PARAM/DGNOS], [MACRO VAL].

 Ⅲ OPERATION－2（OPERATIONAL DEVICES） 2 - 4

2.1.4 Explanation of the MDI keyboard

Number Name Explanation

1 Reset key (RESET) Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
Output key
2 output data from RS232 port, electric disk save.
(OUTPUT)
Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other
3 Address/Number key
characters.
This key is used to input parameter, offset, etc. input data
4 Input key (INPUT) from RS232 port start.
Block command input in MDI mode.
Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to
the key buffer register. The content of the key buffer register
5 Cancel key (CAN) is displayed by LCD.
Example:
N001, press CAN key, N001 will be cancelled.
There are four different cursor move keys:
CURSOR
↓: move the cursor in a downward direction in small units
↑: move the cursor in a upward direction in small units.
6 Cursor move keys
Press cursor ↓↑sustained, the cursor will move
successively.
←、→: used to set parameter switch ON/OFF. Select the
meaning of parameter bit and diagnose bit.
Two kinds of page change keys are described below.
: This key is used to changeover the page on the LCD
7 Page change keys screen in the forward direction.
: This key is used to changeover the page on the LCD
screen in the reverse direction.
Press theses keys to switch display screens for each
Function keys and
8 function. See 2.2 for details of the function keys. Soft keys
soft keys
is displayed at the bottom of LCD.
9 Edit key
Program edit. (insert, delete, modify)
(INST,DEL,ALT)
Change key
10 The bit data display and change.
(CHANG)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－2（OPERATIONAL DEVICES） 2 - 5

2.2 Machine Tool Operator’s Panel

The switch key on the machine tool operator’s panel is as follows.

X Y Z 4th +Z +Y -4

100% DNC
100%
+X -X X Y Z 4th
M

0.001 0.01 0.1 1

+4 -Y -Z F0 25% 50% 100%

Fig. 2.2 Description of the pushbutton

Name Explanation
CYCLE START button Automatic operation starts and cycle start LED is lit.
Tool stops after deceleration during automatic
FEED HOLD button
operation.
MODE SELECT switch Specify an operational mode.
RAPID TRAVERSE switch Manual rapid traverse, select dry run feed rate.
JOG FEED AXIS Jog feed, step feed, axis motion.
Reference point return switch ON, in zero return
REFERENCE POINT RETURN
mode via JOG.
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE Select rapid traverse override.
STEP increment Select STEP movement amount.
MACHINE LOCK Machine lock.
AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK Auxiliary function lock
SINGLE BLOCK Single block.
DRY RUN Dry run ON/OFF.
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP Optional block skip.
FEED RATE OVERRIDE In automatic operation, feed rate override.
JOG FEED Select jog feed rate.
Handle axis selection Select the movable axis via manual pulse generator.
Using manual pulse generator, select movement
Handle movement amount
amount according to per graduation.
Spindle Start Manual spindle rotate CW/CCW, jog start, stop.
Spindle Override Select spindle override (include spindle analogue
output)
Coolant Start For details, see the description of individual machine
tool.
Lubricant Start For details, see the description of individual machine
tool.
Manual Tool Exchange No used.
Ⅲ OPERATION－2（OPERATIONAL DEVICES） 2 - 6
 Ⅲ OPERATION－3（POWER ON/OFF） 3 - 1

3. POWER ON/OFF
The basic configuration of K1000M CNC system don’t include power switch and
emergency button. If standard K100M machine tool optional operator’s panel is
selected, it is showed as follows:
For details, refer to the description of the individual machine tool builder.

3.1 Turning on the Power

：Power ON
1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example,
check that front door and rear door are closed.)
2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3 After the power is turned on, check that the position screen is displayed. If the
software configuration screen is being displayed, a system failure may have
occurred.

WARNING:
When pressing the <POWER ON> key, do not touch any other LCD/MDI panel keys,
until the positional or alarm screen is displayed. Some keys are used for the
maintenance or special operation purpose.
When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be caused.

3.2 Turning off the Power

：Power OFF
1 Check that the LED indicating the cycle start is off on the operator’s panel.
2 Check that all movable parts of the CNC machine tool is stopping.
3 Refer to the machine tool builder’s manual for turning off the power to the
machine.
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 1

4. MANUAL OPERATION
4.1 Manual Reference Position Return
1 Press the reference position return switch, one of the mode selection switches.
Select manual reference point return mode, its LED is lit.

2 Press the movable axis selection switch. Continue pressing the switch until the
tool returns to the reference position.
+Z +Y -4

+X -X

+4 -Y -Z

When machine tool installs machine origin (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN B):
The tool moves to the deceleration point at the rapid traverse rate, then moves
to the reference position at the FL speed set in a parameter. Rapid traverse
override is valid during rapid traverse. FL is set by parameter.
When machine tool installs machine origin (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN A):
Refer to Ⅲ 14.5.
When machine tool installs machine origin (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN C):
Reference position return refer to APPENDIX 7 - parameter 007.

NOTE:
1 Using parameter P011 ZRNL, during manual reference point return the feed
axis can be set motion hold. So press the movable axis switch one time, the
axis is moving until the tool stops at the reference point.
2 Using PLC parameter D199 MZRNZ~X, whether manual reference point
return axis movement key “+” or “-“ is valid or not can be selected.
3 When the machine has returned to the reference position, the reference
position return completion LED goes on.

X Y Z 4

reference position return completion LED

NOTE:
1 Once the reference position return completion LED lights at the completion of
reference position return, the tool does not move unless the reference position
return switch is turned off.
2 The reference position return completion LED is extinguished by either of the
following operations:
1) Moving from the reference position.
2) Entering an emergency stop state.
3 For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) of return to the reference
position, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
4 For the direction of the reference position, refer to the manual issued by the
machine tool builder.
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 2

4.2 JOG FEED

(1) Press the JOG switch, one of the mode selection switches. LED is lit.

(2) Select the movable axis.

+Z +Y -4

+X -X

+4 -Y -Z

The tool will move towards the selected direction.

NOTE:
Only one axis can move during JOG feed. If two or three axes switch are
selected at the same time, the first selected axis will move. If selecting 2-axis
move simultaneously function, two selected axes will move simultaneously.

(3) Select JOG feed rate

There are two kinds of feed rate in K1000 series CNC system.
1) Panel keys selection

100%

manual feed rate +,-.

2) Select KND 1000 machine tool optional operator’s panel (or install override
switch).

60 70 80 90
50 100
40 110
30 120
20 130
10 140
0 150
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 3

Feed rate
Rotary switch position
Metric input (mm/min) Inch input (inch/min)

0 0 0
1 2.0 0.08
2 3.2 0.12
3 5.0 0.2
4 7.9 0.3
5 12.6 0.5
6 20 0.8
7 32 1.2
8 50 2.0
9 79 3.0
10 126 5.0
11 200 8.0
12 320 12
13 500 20
14 790 30
15 1260 50
NOTE:
1 The feed rate error (about +3%) affects on the feed rate in the table above.
2 Diagnosis No.200 SOVI=0: “+”,”-”,”100%”key is valid.
Diagnosis No.200 SOVI=1: external override switch is valid.

(4) Rapid Traverse

This button is a lock button, it changes as ‘ON→OFF→ON…’. Rapid traverse
LED is lit and the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button
is in ON; Rapid trverse LED will extinguish while it is in OFF.

NOTE:
1 Feed rate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/deceleration
for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmed command.
2 Turning on the power or releasing the emergency button, and reference
position return is not executed:
rapid traverse ON: That feed rate is JOG feed rate or rapid traverse is
determined by parameter P012 ISOT.
3 In JOG mode, this button is valid and LED goes on.
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 4

In AUTO/MDI mode and DRY RUN is ON, this button is valid and LED goes
on.
In EDIT/HANDLE mode, this button is invalid and LED extinguishes.

4.3 STEP FEED

(1) Press the STEP switch, one of the mode selection switches, the LED is lit.

NOTE:
Step mode and handle mode is the same pushbutton, which is set by parameter.

(2) Select the step increment

0.001 0.01 0.1 1

F0 25% 50% 100%

(upper data is valid)

This function is valid when manual pulse generator isn’t selected.

Incremental feed
UNIT 1 10 100
Metric input (mm) 0.001 0.01 0.1
Inch input (inch) 0.0001 0.001 0.01
NOTE:
This button is valid and LED goes on only in HANDLE/STEP mode.

(3) Select the movable axis

Press the movable axis selection switch, the tool will move towards the selected
direction. Each time a switch is pressed, the tool moves one increment. The
LED of selected switch is lit.

+Z +Y -4

+X -X

+4 -Y -Z

axis direction

NOTE:
1) The feed rate is the same as the JOG feed rate.
2) If an axis direction selection switch is pressed after rapid traverse has been
selected, movement is made at the rapid traverse rate. Rapid traverse
override is effective .
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 5

4.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse
generator on the machine operator’s panel. Select the axis along which the tool is
to be moved with the handle feed axis selection switches.
Press the HANDLE switch, one of the mode selection switches, the LED is lit.

NOTE:
1 Step mode and handle mode is the same pushbutton, which is set by
parameter.
2 Manual pulse generator is optional.

(1) Select the movable axis

Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved by pressing a handle feed
axis selection switch.

DNC
X Y Z 4th

NOTE:
This function is valid only in handle mode. (The word at the bottom of the key
is valid)

(2) Rotate the handle of manual pulse generator.

manual pulse generator

CW: + direction
CCW: - direction

(3) Movement amount

0.001 0.01 0.1 1

F0 25% 50% 100%

(Upper data is valid.)

Movement amount per degree
×1 ×10 ×100
Metric input (mm) 0.001 0.01 0.1
Inch input (inch) 0.0001 0.001 0.01
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 6

NOTE:
1 The above data is different corresponding to different machine tool.
2 Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations per second or
lower. If the manual pulse generator is rotated at a rate higher than five
rotations per second, the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is
no longer rotated or the distance the tool moves may not match the
graduations on the manual pulse generator.
3 This button is valid and LED is lit only in HANDLE/STEP mode.

4.5 MANUAL PROGRAM RETURN ZERO MODE

In manual program return zero mode, operation is the same as manual reference
position return. Move to the position specified by G92 at rapid traverse.
1 program zero store:
In program, the position specified by the first G92 command is stored. If another
G92 is specified, the position will not be stored.
2 Program zero isn’t modified until a new program zero is specified. That is to say,
program zero A is specified in program A, when executing program B, program
zero A won’t change if there isn’t G92 command in program B.

EXPLANATION:
After stopped at the middle of the program, the tool can move to machine start
point rapidly in manual mode with this function. The tool compensation values will
be cancelled automatically.
If program zero isn’t stored, alarm No.90 will occur during zero return.

NOTE:
Press address P and key REFERENCE POSITION RETURN simultaneously,
program zero return mode will be specified.

4.6 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF

Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the
coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the
machine operator’s panel. (K1000M is normal open)

(1) When the switch is turned on, the distance the tool is moved by manual
operation is added to the coordinates.
Y

Manual operation
P2

P1
X

Coordinates with the switch ON

 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 7

(2) When the switch is turned off, the distance the tool is moved by manual
operation is not added to the coordinates.

Y2
Y1
P2 Manual operation
P1

X2
O1
O2
X1

Coordinates with the switch OFF

The following describes the relation between manual operation and coordinates
when the manual absolute switch is turned on or off, using a program example.
G01 G90 X100.0 Y100.0 F010； ①
X200.0 Y150.0； ②
X300.0 Y200.0； ③
(A) Coordinates when block (2) has been executed after manual operation (X-axis
+20.0, Y-axis +100.0) at the end of movement of block (1).

Y
(220.0,250.0)

Manual absolute switch OFF

(120.0,200.0) Manual absolute switch ON

(200.0,150.0)

Manual operation

(100.0,100.0)

(B) Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being
executed, manual operation (Y-axis + 75.0) is performed, and the cycle start
button is pressed and released
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 8

Manual absolute switch OFF

(300.0,275.0)
Manual absolute switch ON
(200.0,225.0)

(150.0,200.0) (300.0,200.0)

Manual operation
(200.0,150.0)
(150.0,125.0)

(C) Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being
executed, manual operation (Y-axis +75.0) is performed, the control unit is
reset with the RESET button, and block (2) is read again

(300.0,275.0)

(200.0,225.0)
Manual absolute switch OFF
(150.0,200.0) (300.0,200.0)
Manual absolute switch ON

Manual operation
(200.0,150.0)

(150.0,125.0)
○

(D) When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded
axis returns.
N1 G01 G90 X100.0 Y100.0 F500；
N2 X200.0；
N3 Y150.0；
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 9

Manual absolute switch ON N3

N2
Manual absolute switch OFF
N1

(E) When the following commands are incremental commands, operation is the
same as when the switch is OFF.

4.7 MANUAL AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS OPERATION

*4.7.1 * Manual Tool Exchange （retain）

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, tool carrier will rotate and
exchange the next cutting tool. The LED keeps lighten during tool exchange, it will
extinguish while tool exchange completion. (See the description of machine tool builder
for details.)
NOTE:
This function key is a retained key, it uses for tool exchange or special use. (See the
description of machine tool builder for details.)

4.7.2 Coolant switch

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, it will change ON→OFF→
ON… like a lock pushbutton. The coolant LED goes on only when the coolant switch
turns on regardless of mode.
NOTE:
After start-up in manual mode, if mode select switch changes to non-manual mode, it
will close output. Press ‘RESET’ button or ‘EMERGENCY’ button, it can be closed.
(4.6.3~4.6.5 is the same.)

4.7.3 Lubricant switch

 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 10

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, it will change ON→OFF→
ON… like a lock pushbutton. The lubricant LED goes on only when the lubricant switch
turns on regardless of mode.

4.7.4 Spindle CW

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, Spindle starts to rotate
clockwise. Spindle CW LED goes on only when spindle starts to rotate clockwise
regardless of mode.

4.7.5 Spindle CCW

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, Spindle starts to rotate
counter-clockwise. Spindle CCW LED goes on only when spindle starts to rotate
counter-clockwise regardless of mode.

4.7.6 Spindle Stop

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, Spindle stops to rotate.

4.7.7 Spindle Rotate one step

Press this key in JOG or HANDLE or STEP mode, Spindle starts to rotate
clockwise. Spindle stops after releasing it. Spindle CW LED goes on only when spindle
starts to rotate regardless of mode.

4.7.8 Panel LED

X Y Z 4th
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED:
When the tool has returned to the reference position, the reference position return
completion LED goes on. When the tool moves from the reference position, the
reference position return completion LED is extinguished.

4.7.9 Notes on manual operation keys

The following manual operation keys is valid only in manual mode.
1 spindle CW/CCW key and spindle rotate one step start-up key
2 coolant key
3 lubricant key

Press coolant key or lubricant key without coolant and lubricant output,
 Ⅲ OEPRATION－4（MANUAL OPERATION） 4 - 11

corresponding output signal puts through. On the other hand, pressing coolant key
or lubricant key with coolant and lubricant output, corresponding output signal is
closed. Pressing spindle CCW/CW key while spindle is rotating CW/CCW, spindle
rotation will stop. Pressing spindle rotate one step key while spindle is rotating CCW,
spindle rotate counter-clockwise will continue, but alarm No.06 (M03, M04 code
error) occurs.

Output signal isn’t modified when mode changes after start-up in manual mode.
However, output signal is closed when corresponding M code is executed in
automatic mode. Corresponding M code is executed in automatic mode, output
signal can be closed by pressing relevant key in manual mode.

If M03 or M04 is specified without M05 command during spindle CW/CCW, M03 or
M04 is ignored. Spindle will rotate continuously , but alarm No.06 (M03, M04 code
error) occurs.

Pressing RESET button, whether output signal of M08 ，M32，M03 and M04 are
changed or not is determined by parameter №005 RSJG.

Pressing EMERGENCY pushbutton, spindle, coolant, lubricant and tool exchange

output will be closed.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－5（AUTOMATIC OPERATION） 5 - 1

5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5.1 Operation Mode
5.1.1 Memory Operation
(1) Programs are registered in memory in advance. (Ⅲ－9)
(2) Select a program from the registered programs. (program search)
(3) Press the AUTO mode selection switch.
(4) Press the cycle start switch on the machine operator’s panel. Automatic
operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on. When automatic operation
terminates, the cycle start lamp goes off.

AUTO CYCLE START

5.1.2 MDI Operation

In MDI mode, a program block can be input from LCD/MDI panel, the program can be
executed. But the input block can’t be stored system memory.
(1) Example: X10.5 Y200.5
(A) Press MDI key on the mode select switch.

(B) Press the function key 【PRGRM】to display program.

(C) Press PAGE key to select 【actual block】on the left of the screen. (or press
soft key [MDI/M] in sub-menu.)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－5（AUTOMATIC OPERATION） 5 - 2

(D) Input “X250.” by address/numeric key.

(E) Press INPUT key. The data, X 250., is input and displayed. If you are aware
of an error in the keyed-in number before pressing the INPUT key , press the
CAN key and key in X and the correct number again.

(F) Input “Y550.” by address/numeric key.

(G) Press INPUT key. The data, Y550. is input and displayed. If you are aware
of an error in the keyed-in number before pressing the INPUT key , press the
CAN key and key in Y and the correct number again.

(H) Press the cycle start button on the machine operator’s panel.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－5（AUTOMATIC OPERATION） 5 - 3

NOTE:
In MDI operation, the setting (absolute) determines whether the commands are
absolute or incremental. The G code (G90/G91) is ignored.

(2) Cancel before pressing the START button

To modify X250. Y550. to X250., cancel Y550., by following the steps described
below:
1 Press Y CAN INPUT keys.
2 Press the cycle start button on the machine operator’s panel.
NOTE:
Modal G codes cannot be cancelled. Enter the correct data again.

5.1.3 DNC Operation

1 DNC is an optional function. It is invalid without selecting it.

2 Mode selection.
DNC
X
This is a button with lock. Pressing [DNC] key in automatic mode, it will
change ‘ ON→OFF→ON…’. The DNC LED is lit while it is in ‘ON’, system is in
DNC mode. The DNC LED is extinguished while it is in ‘OFF’.
Press RESET to reset system before pressing CYCLE START when DNC mode
and AUTO mode change each other (press [DNC] mode changes).
 Ⅲ OPERATION－5（AUTOMATIC OPERATION） 5 - 4

NOTE:
This is a compound key. It is X-axis direction key in handle mode.

3 Procedure for DNC Operation

1) Select AUTO mode.
2) Press [DNC] to select DNC mode.
3) Start KND [DNC] communication software to enter output mode.
4) Press CYCLE START button. NC system will machine and read data from
PC computer simultaneously.
NOTE:
1 The program from programmer can’t include the symbol such as ’(,),*,@’ which
isn’t allowed in program, but space key is available.
2 If the power turns off during the workpiece is cutting, the block number executed
in power off will display on the right top of the screen after turning on the power
again in automatic mode.

3 The program pointed by the pointer will be executed in automatic mode with
DNC switch OFF.

4 The operation of the communication software refer to APPENDIX 12.

5.2 AUTOMATIC OPERATION START-UP

1 Memory Operation
(1) Press the AUTO mode selection switch.
(2) Select a program from the registered programs.
(3) Press the CYCLE START button on the machine tool operator’s panel.

5.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION EXECUTION

After automatic operation start-up, executing program is as follows:
(1) A one-block command is read from the specified program.
(2) The block command is decoded.
(3) The command execution is started.
(4) The command in the next block is read.
(5) Buffering is executed. That is, the command is decoded to allow immediate
execution.
(6) Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the next block
can be started. This is because buffering has been executed.
(7) Hereafter, memory operation can be executed by repeating the steps (4) to.(6)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－5（AUTOMATIC OPERATION） 5 - 5

5.4 STOPPING AND TERMINATING AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Automatic operation can be stopped using one of two methods: Specify a stop
command, or press a key on the machine operator’s panel.
•The stop commands include M00 (program stop), M01 (optional stop), and M02
and M30 (program end). (5.4.1～5.4.2)
•There are two keys to stop memory operation: The feed hold key and reset key.
(5.4.3～5.4.4)

5.4.1 Program Stop (M00)

Memory operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the
program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single
block operation. The memory operation can be restarted by pressing the cycle start
button.

5.4.1 Optional Stop (M00)

Similarly to M00, memory operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is
executed. This code is only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the third
page of machine screen is set to ON. Operation may vary depending on the
machine tool builder. Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

5.4.3 Program End (M30)

(A) Main program end.
(B) Memory operation is terminated and the reset state is entered.
(C) Return CNC to the head of the execution program.

5.4.4 Feed hold

When Feed Hold button on the operator’s panel is pressed during memory
operation, the tool decelerates to a stop at a time.

(1) Press Feed Hold button.

When FEED HOLD button is pushed, the FEED HOLD LED lights and the CYCLE
START LED is extinguished.

Machine tool state is as follows after pressing FEED HOLD button.

1) The feed is stopped after deceleration if the machine tool is moving.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－5（AUTOMATIC OPERATION） 5 - 6

2) Dwell is not continued even in a feed hold state if the dwell is being
executed.
3) The machine tool is stopped after the operation of the M,S,T function is
executed.

When CYCLE START button is pushed, the program will execute continuously.

NOTE:
If control system is in feed hold mode without alarm, [DWELL] will replace [ALARM]
at the bottom of the screen.

5.4.5 RESET
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state
by using RESET key on the LCD/MDI panel or external reset signal. When reset
operation is applied to the system during a tool moving status, the motion is slowed
down then stops.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－6（DRY RUN） 6 - 1

6. DRY RUN
6.1 ALL-AXIS MACHINE LOCK
Press the machine lock switch on the operator’s panel. The tool does not move but
the position along each axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving. But
auxiliary function M, S, and T are available, and tool graph path can be displayed.
This is available for checking a program.

This is a button with lock. Press it each time, it will change ‘ON→OFF→ON…’. The
LED is lit when it is in ‘ON’, the LED is extinguished when it is in ‘OFF’.

NOTE:
1 When the G27 or G28 command is specified, the machine is not moved to
reference position and the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN LED is not lit.
2 In general, this button can’t be pressed during program executing.

6.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK

Press the auxiliary function lock switch on the operator’s panel. M, S, and T codes
are disabled and not executed. It is available for checking a program together with
machine lock.
M

This is a button with lock. Press it each time, it will change ‘ON→OFF→ON…’. The
LED is lit when it is in ‘ON’, the LED is extinguished when it is in ‘OFF’.

NOTE:
M00, M30, M98, and M99 commands are executed even in the auxiliary function
lock state.

6.3 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

K1000 series CNC system have two kinds of override selection.
1) Select by operator’s panel.

100%

1〕 Feed rate override ＋，－ and 100﹪ selection. The LED is lit at 100%. The
override can be selected from 0 to 150% (10% steps).
2〕 JOG feed rate ＋，－.

2）Select KND 1000 machine tool optional operator’s panel. (or install external
override switch)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－6（DRY RUN） 6 - 2

Set the feedrate override dial to the desired percentage (%) on the machine
operator’s panel, before or during automatic operation.

60 70 80 90
50 100
40 110
30 120
20 130
10 140
0 150

Feed rate override

The override that can be specified ranges from 0 to 150% (10% steps).
NOTE:
1 The same dial is used for the feedrate override dial and jog feedrate dial.
2 PLC parameter D200 SOVI=0: +, - and 100% are valid.
D200 SOVI=1: Using external override switch.

6.4 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

0.001 0.01 0.1 1

F0 25% 50% 100%

Rapid traverse override is valid in non-handle or non-step mode. (The data at the
bottom is valid.)
An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid
traverse rate. Select one of the four feedrates with the rapid traverse override
switch during rapid traverse.

The following types of rapid traverse are available. Rapid traverse override can be
applied for each of them.
1) Rapid traverse by G00
2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle
3) Rapid traverse in G27, G28 and G29
4) Manual rapid traverse
5) Rapid traverse in manual reference position return
When the feed rate is 10m/min and this switch is set to the position of 50%, the
actual feed rate becomes 5m/min.

NOTE:
When in AUTO or MDI or JOG mode, press this switch, the LED goes on; release
it , the LED is extinguished.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－6（DRY RUN） 6 - 3

6.5 ANALOGUE SPINDLE OVERRIDE

Analogue spindle override can use the following keys or machine tool soft menu keys to
select.

100%

Analogue spindle override ＋，－ and 100% can be selected. This switch is set to
the position of 100%, the LED goes on.
The override that can be specified ranges from 50% to 120% (10% steps).
NOTE:
This function is valid only when analogue spindle function is selected.

6.6 DRY RUN

4th

Press the dry run switch on the machine operator’s panel during automatic
operation. Turning on or off is via pressing the key repeatedly. The led goes on as it
is in ON.
The dry run feedrate changes as shown in the table below according to the rapid
traverse switch and parameters regardless of the feed specified in the program.
NOTE:
This is a compound key. It is fourth-axis in handle mode. ( It is valid on the
condition that purchasing 4-axis CNC system.)

Program command
Rapid traverse Feed
Manual rapid traverse button
Rapid traverse JOG maximum feedrate
ON
Manual rapid traverse button JOG feedrate or rapid
JOG feedrate
OFF traverse *
*: Rapid traverse can be specified by parameter (RDRN, №.004).
 Ⅲ OPERATION－6（DRY RUN） 6 - 4

6.7 SINGLE BLOCK

Press the single block switch on the machine operator’s panel during automatic
operation. Turning on or off is via pressing the key repeatedly. The led goes on as it
is in ON.
FUCTION EXPLANATION:
Press the single block switch on the machine operator’s panel. The execution of the
program is stopped after the current block is executed. Press the cycle start button
to execute the next block. The tool stops after the block is executed.
NOTE:
1 This is a compound key. It is handle Z-axis direction in handle mode.
2 If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at the intermediate
point.
3 In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of ,(1) (2), and (6)
shown below. When the single block stop is made after the point (1) or (2), the
feed hold LED lights.
1

2 6
Rapid traverse

Feed

3 5

4
4 Single block stop is not performed in a block containing M98P_;. M99; or G65.
However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99
command, if the block contains an address other than O, N or P.

6.8 RESTART
1 Return the mode select switch to the desired operation mode ( AUTO or MDI
mode).
2 Press CYCLE START button
When pressed CYCLE START button, the CYCLE START LED is lit, automatic
operation starts again. The FEED HOLD LED will extinguish if it is lit .
 Ⅲ OPERATION－6（DRY RUN） 6 - 5

6.9 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP（or MACHINE TOOL SOFT

OPERAOTR’S PANEL）

Press the optional block skip switch on the machine operator’s panel during
automatic operation. Turning on or off is via pressing the key repeatedly. The led
goes on as it is in ON.
This is the function which allows the control to skip a block of information in which a
slash “/” is punched, as the first character in the block.

NOTE:
1 The optional block skip function is identified when the block is read into the buffer
storage from the memory. Therefore, this function is not effective to the block
which has been read into the buffer storage.
2 This is a compound key. It is handle Y-axis direction in handle mode.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－7（SAFTY OPERATION） 7 - 1

7. SAFTY OPERATION
7.1 EMERGENCY STOP
If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine
movement stops in a moment. All output such as spindle rotate and coolant will be
closed. All output must restart after releasing the button.
This button is locked when it is pressed. The method of release is turning clockwise
with pushing.
Red

EMERGENCY STOP

NOTE:
1 EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.
2 Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.

7.2 OVERTRAVEL (SOFT LIMIT)

When the tool tries to move beyond the stored stroke limit set by the parameter, an
alarm occurs. the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit and an
OVERTRAVEL is displayed. Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving
the tool to the safety direction by manual operation. For details on operation, refer
to the operator.s manual of the machine tool builder.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－8（ALARM FUNCTION） 8 - 1

8.ALARM FUNCTION
When a unusual operation occurs, affirm the following contents:
(1) an alarm is displayed on the LCD
Refer to APPENDIX 5—error codes list to find the cause of the alarm. The
causes of alarms are classified by error codes. If PS □□□ is displayed, it is
error about program or data setting, an alarm can be cleared by modified
program or setting data.

(2) without an alarm on the LCD

Make sure that the system position and executing content by the display on LCD
screen. Refer to APPENDIX 11— CNC status display to find the cause of the
alarm.

(3) Contacting with KND Ltd.

 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 1

9. PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING

9.1 PREPARATION
(1) Set program protection switch to ON.
(2) Select EDIT mode.
(3) Press the PRGRM to display program.

If communicating with computer, the following is necessary.

(1) Connect PC computer and run KND communication software.
(2) Set the content with respect to RS232. (see 10.2)

NOTE:
A program protection switch is set on 【OPR/INDEX】soft operator’s panel in order
to protect machining program. Editing program is available only in turning on the
switch. Pressing display function keys 【OPR/INDEX】to display machine tool
screen, then press key 【4】to turn on or off program protection switch. It is
necessary to press number key after pressing sub-menu keys twice to enter if using
soft menu keys.

9.2 PROGRAM STORAGE TO MEMORY

9.2.1 MDI mode

(A) Set the mode selection switch to EDIT.

(B) Press the [PRGRAM] button.
(C) Press the address key O.
(D) Press program number.
(E) Press [INSRT] button.

The above procedure is to store program number. Every word in the program is
input by repeating the above procedure.

9.2.2 Transmitted by PC computer

(A) Mode selection（EDIT or AUTO）；

(B) Put CNC program floppy into programmer；
(C) Press 〖PRGRAM〗button to display program screen；
(D) Press the desired program number when there isn’t program number in the
computer floppy or a program number should be changed.
(This step can be ignored when program number shouldn’t be changed.)
1) Press the address key O;
2) Input program number;
(E) Run communication software to be in output mode (see APPENDIX 12)
(F) Press the key [INPUT].

Program is transmitted into memory in this way. “INPUT” displays at the right
bottom of screen during transmission.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 2

9.3 FILE INCLUDING MANY PROGRAMS STORED INTO

MEMORY

This operation is the same as 9.2.2. several programs store into memory with %
end.

The method of program number selection is as follows:

(1) Set program number without using keyboard.
A) “O” value in CNC program is looked as program number. The first block N will
be looked as program number without address O.
B) If there aren’t address O and N in CNC program file, the result of the last
program number add 1will be looked as program number.

(2) If program number is specified by MDI keyboard before CNC program storage,
specified program number will become program number regardless of
address O on the top of the program. The following program number will add
1 in proper order.
9.4 PROGRAM SEARCH
When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. In general,
the program pointed by current program pointer is displayed. The program pointer
can’t lose even if turning off the power. The desired program can be called by
searching (the program pointer will be changed at the same time), the called
program can be edited or execute. This operation is called program search.
There are two methods as follows.
(1) Procedure for searching
(A) Mode selection.(EDIT or AUTO)
(B) Press the [PRGRM] button to display program.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 3

(C) Press the address key O.

(D) Input the desired program number.
(E) Press the CURSOR ↓key.
(F) The searched program displays on the screen and the searched program
number appears at the right of the screen after searching.
(2) Procedure for scanning
(A) Mode selection.(EDIT or AUTO)
(B) Press the [PRGRM] button to display program.
(C) Press the address key O.
(D) Press the CURSOR ↓key. In EDIT mode, press the address key O and
CURSOR ↓key to display the registered program one by one.

NOTE:
When all registered programs are displayed, the first program will appear.

9.5 DELETING PROGRAM

Delete the program registered in the memory.
(1) Set the mode selector switch to EDIT.
(2) Press the [PRGRM] button to display program.
(3) Press the address key O.
(4) Input the desired program number.
(5) Press the key [DELET] to delete the program corresponding to the input
program number.

9.6 ALL PROGRAMS DELETING

Delete all programs registered in the memory.
(1) Set the mode selector switch to EDIT.
(2) Press the [PRGRM] button to display program.
(3) Press the address key O.
(4) Press the keys –9999 and [DELET] key.

9.7 PROGRAM OUTPUT

Transmit the registered program in the memory to computer.
(1) Connect PC computer.
(2) Set the mode selector switch to EDIT.
(3) Press the [PRGRM] button to display program.
(4) Run communication software to be in wait mode.
(5) Press the address key O.
(6) Input the program number.
(7) Press the key [OUTPUT] to transmit the corresponding program to computer.

NOTE:
Press the key [RESET] to stop output.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 4

9.8 ALL PROGRAM OUTPUT

Transmit all registered program in the memory to computer.
(1) Connect PC computer and run KND communication software.
(2) Set the mode selector switch to EDIT.
(3) Press the [PRGRM] button to display program.
(4) Press the address key O.
(5) Press the keys –9999 and the key [OUTPUT].

9.9 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH

Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence
number in the middle of a program so that execution can be started or restarted at
the block of the sequence number. Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the
CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S,
and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values. So, in the first
block where execution is to be started or restarted by using a sequence number
search command, be sure to enter required M, S, and T codes and coordinates. A
block searched for by sequence number search usually represents a point of
shifting from one process to another. When a block in the middle of a process must
be searched for to restart execution at the block, specify M, S, and T codes,
coordinates, and so forth as required from the MDI after closely checking the
machine tool and NC states at that point.
(1) Procedure for sequence number search
(A) Set the mode selector switch to AUTO or EDIT.
(B) Press the key [PRGRM] to display the program.
(C) Select the program including the desired sequence number.
(D) Press the address key N.
(E) Input the searched sequence number.
(F) Press the key CURSOR↓.
(G) The searched sequence number displayed at the top of the right LCD
screen.
NOTE:
1 During search operation, the following checks are made :
•Optional block skip
•P/S alarm (No. 003 to 010)
2 During sequence number search operation, M98Pxxxx (subprogram call) is
not executed. So an alarm (P/S No. 060) is raised if an attempt is made to
search for a sequence number in a subprogram called by the program
currently selected.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 5

O1000 ; Sub-program
O8000 ；

M98 P8000 ; N8888

M99 ;

If an attempt is made to search for N8888 in the example above, an alarm is

raised.

9.10 PROGRAM COMPARATION BETWEEN IN MEMORY AND

IN PROGRAMMER
Turn off the program protect switch, this operation is the same as storing files into
memory. Compare the program registered in memory and in programmer.
(1) Set the mode selector switch to EDIT or AUTO.
(2) Turn off the program protect switch.
(3) Connect the computer and run KND communication software to be in output
mode.
(4) Press the key [PRGRM] to display the program on the LCD screen.
(5) Press the key [INPUT].
(6) There are several programs in the file, checking up to ER(%). “comparison” is
displayed on the screen.

NOTE:
1 Alarm P/S No.79 occurs and check stops when difference appears at the
comparison.
2 Turn on the program protect switch and repeat the above operation, program
is stored in memory but comparison can’t execute.

9.11 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD

The content registered in memory can be modified.
(1) Set the mode selector switch to EDIT;
(2) Press soft key [PRGRM] to display the program.
(3) Select the desired program;
(4) Search for a word to be modified.
• Scan method
• Word search method
(5) Perform an operation such as altering, inserting, or deleting a word.

NOTE:
1 A word is an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the concept
of word is
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 6

ambiguous. So the editing unit is considered here. The editing unit is a unit
subject to alteration or deletion in one operation. In one scan operation, the
cursor indicates the start of an editing unit. An insertion is made after an editing
unit.

Definition of editing unit:

(i) Program portion from an address to immediately before the next address.
Example:
G65 H01 P#103 Q#105 ; Including four-editing unit
(ii) An address is an alphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=,or ; (EOB).

According to this definition, a word is an editing unit. The word “word”, when used
in the description of editing, means an editing unit according to the precise
definition.

2 The cursor is always at the bottom of the editing unit and editing is executing at
the position of the editing unit pointed by cursor. Program execution starts at the
position of the editing unit pointed by cursor in automatic mode. That moving the
cursor to the position of editing or executing is defined as search.

9.11.1 WORD SEARCH

A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text
(scanning), by word search, or by address search.
(1) Word scan
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor is displayed
below the address character of a selected word.
(A) Press the CURSOR→ button

N100 X100.0 Z120.0 ; T06 ; N110 M30 ;

The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursor is displayed
at a selected word. The cursor is positioned to the address of the selected
word.

(B) Press the CURSOR← button

N100 X100.0 Z120.0 ; T06 ; N110 M30 ;

The cursor moves backward word by word on the screen; the cursor is
displayed at a selected word.
(C) Holding down the cursor key↓ or ↑ scans words continuously.
(D) Pressing the page key↓displays the next page and searches for the first
word of the page.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 7

(E) Pressing the page key↑displays the previous page and searches for the
first word of the page.
(F) Holding down the page key↓or↑ displays one page after another.

(2) Word search

A specified words is searched from the current position in the forward or
backward direction.
N100 X100.0 Z120.0 ; S12 ; N110 M30 ;
Cursor current position S12 is searched for.

Search direction

(A) Key in address S .

(B) Key in ‘1’ ‘2’.

NOTE:
• S12 cannot be searched for if only S1 is keyed in.
• S09 cannot be searched for by keying in only S9. To search for S09, be
sure to key in S09.

(C) Pressing the cursor ↓ key starts search operation. Upon completion of
search operation, the cursor is displayed at “S” of S12. Pressing the
cursor key↑ rather than the cursor key↓ performs search operation in
the reverse direction.

(3) Procedure for searching an address

A specified address is searched for from the current position in the forward
direction.

N100 X100.0 Z120.0 ; S12 ; N110 M03 ;

Cursor current position Search for M

Search direction

(A) Key in address M .

(B) Press the cursor key↓ .

Upon completion of search operation, the cursor is displayed at “M” of M03.

Pressing the key↑ rather than the key↓ performs search operation in the
reverse direction.

(4) Heading a program

O0200 ； N100 X100.0 Z120.0 ; S12 ; N110 M03 ;
Search direction Head Current position

(A) Method 1
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 8

Press RESET when the program screen is selected in EDIT mode. When
the cursor has returned to the start of the program, the contents of the
program are displayed from its start on the LCD screen.
(B) Method 2
Execute a Program Number Search.

(C) Method 3
(1) Set the mode selector switch to AUTO or EDIT.
(2) Press the key [PRGRM] to display the program.
(3) Press the address key O
(4) Press CUROSR↑key

9.11.2 Inserting a Word

(1) Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted.
(2) Key in an address to be inserted. (T)
(3) Key in data 15
(4) Press the INSRT key.

Fig.9.11.2 (A) before inserting T15

 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 9

Fig.9.11.2 (B) after inserting T15

Edit insert function A/B:
Edit a program and select insert function A , the operation is as the above.
Insert function B increases as below on the base of insert function A:
The other address keyed in will be inserted automatically after keying in address
and data. The symbol ; or * is keyed automatically with EOB.

Example:
Key in the other address keys after inputting X100, X100 will be inserted
automatically. X100; will be inserted automatically after inputting [EOB].

Edit function A or B is selected by parameter No.012.3: EDTB.

9.11.3 Altering a Word

N1234 X100.0 Z120.0 T15 ; S12 ; N110 M03 ;
Current cursor position
T15 is searched.

(1) Search for or scan a word to be altered.

(2) Key in an address to be inserted. (M)
(3) Key in data.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 10

(4) Press the ALTER key. The input word will replace the word pointed by current
cursor.
(This is, input M15 and press [ALTER] key.

N1234 X100.0 Z120.0 M15 ; S12 ; N110 M03 ;

Current cursor positio
T15 is changed to M1

9.11.4 Deleting a word

N1234 X100.0 Z120.0 M15 ; S12 ; N110 M03 ;
Cursor current position
Z120.0 is searched.
(1) Search for or scan the word to be deleted.
(2) Press the [DELET] button to delete the content pointed by the current cursor.
N1234 X100.0 M15 ; S12 ; N110 M03 ;
Cursor current position
After deletion
9.11.5 Deleting multiple Blocks
Delete the blocks from the current display to the specified sequence number block.

CURSOR CURRENT POSIONT N100 X100.0 M15 ; S12 ;

Delete N100 N110 X50.0

(1) Press the address key N and [DELET] button, the current sequence block will
be deleted;
After deleting the cursor N110 X50.0
current position

(2) Press the address key N , L （the number of block） and [DELET] button, L
blocks dowm the current sequence number will be deleted;
(3) Press the address key N , -L （the number of block） and [DELET] button, L
blocks up the current sequence number will be deleted;

9.12 Sequence Number to be Inserted automatically

Sequence number can be inserted automatically when input programs in EDIT
mode. The incremental values in blocks can be set by parameter No.66(SEQINC)
beforehand.
(1) Set parameter SEQ=1
(2) Mode select (EDIT)
(3) Press the [PRGRM] button to display the program
(4) Input the address N
 Ⅲ OPERATION－9（PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING） 9 - 11

(5) Input the first N value

(6) Press the [INSRT] key
(7) Insert each word of the block
(8) Press the [EOB] button
(9) Press the [INSET] button to store EOB to memory. For example, if the
incremental values of blocks parameter is set to 2, the next sequence number
N12 is inserted automatically and can be displayed.

NOTE:
1 If you don’t want to insert N12 to the next block, press the [DELET] button to
delete N12.
2 In the above example, if the next sequence number is N100 instead of N12, input
N100 and press the [ALTER] button, N100 will be stored and the sequence
number will be changed to N100.

9.13 Number of Registered Program

System can store 128 programs to memory in the standard configuration.

9.14 Storage Capacity

(1) Program storage capacity
Memory: 604KB
External Memory：flash memory（3-memory）

(2) Compensation Data: 32

 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 1

10. DATA DISPLAY AND SET

10.1 OFFSET
10.1.1 Setting and Display of the tool compensation【OFSET 】
Display and setting of the tool compensation values have two methods: absolute
input and incremental input. They can be selected by parameter No.004 IOF.
(1) In absolute mode
1) Press the function button or soft key 〖OFSET〗.
2) Select the desired page by pressing the PAGE button.

3) Move cursor to the offset number to be changed.

A) Scan:
Continuously press the CURSOR key, the cursor will move in
sequence.

B) Search:
Key in P and an offset number and press the INPUT button.

4) Input the offset amount (including decimal) using data keys.

5) Press the key INPUT and display the offset amount on the LCD screen.

(2) In incremental mode

1) Move cursor to the offset number to be changed. (see the above)
2) Input incremental values using data keys.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 2

3) Press the key INPUT and add incremental values to current offset and
display.
Example:
Specified offset amount: 5.678
Incremental by keyboard: 1.5
New offset value: 7.178(=5.678+1.5)
NOTE:
1 When the offset value is changed during automatic operation, the new offset
value does not become valid until the H code followed by the offset number
is commanded.
2 The compensation and offset are the same meaning in this description. That
is to say, compensation number is equal to offset number and compensation
values is equal to offset amount.

10.1.2 Input Offset from PC computer

Prepare
(1) connect the communication cable
(2) run the communication software
(3) edit or loading the offset file

FORMAT:
(A) %LF is at the beginning of the program (LF is input by ENTER key in
programmer and it isn’t displayed on the computer screen.)
(B) Offset number and offset amount
G10 [G90/G91] P__ R__ LF
P-offset number
R-offset amount
G90/G91-absolute/incremental
G90 or G91 can be ignored. At this time, the current G codes of group 03 is
valid. The procedure (B) can be repeated if necessary.
(C) File stop %
When inputting offset number not to be included in the file, the values will not
change.

OPERATION:
The above file can be input by the below procedure.
(1) Mode selection. (EDIT)
(2) Press the button or the soft key OFSET to display the offset screen.
Run KND communication software to be in output mode.
(3) Press the key INPUT to input.
“input” displays at the bottom of the screen during input.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 3

NOTE:
1 Offset amount is in absolute or in incremental mode, it is different between MDI
input and programmer input. One is parameter IOF, the other is G90 or G91.
2 Input will stop when the following alarm occurs.
(1) Input the other address except R and P.
(2) The value of R or P exceeds the range.
3 Press the button RESET to stop in the middle of the program.

10.2 SETTING THE SET PARAMETER

10.2.1 SET1：SET PARAMETER DISPLAY AND SETTING
(1) Mode selection.（MDI）
(2) Press the button or the soft key SET to display the set parameter.
(3) Press the page key or SET1 in the sub-menu to display the set parameter page.

(4) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the modified position.
(5) Input “0” or “1”
(A) X-axis mirror (REVX)
1: X-axis symmetry ON
0: X-axis symmetry OFF
(B) Y-axis mirror (REVY)
1:Y-axis symmetry ON
0:Y-axis symmetry OFF
NOTE:
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 4

When X-axis and Y-axis symmetry ON, the motion of X or Y in automatic

operation will be opposite. But the motion from the middle point to reference
position in reference position return. Symmetry is invalid in manual mode.

(C) Parity check (TVON)

No used.
(D) Inch input
Set input unit.
1: inch
0: mm
(E) Absolute input (ABS)
In MDI mode, it is used to specify in absolute or in incremental.
1: absolute
0: increment
NOTE:
The command in absolute or in incremental mode is regardless of the
command G90 or G91 in MDI mode.

(F) Automatic sequence number (SEQ)

In MDI mode, sequence number setting is automatically or not. (refer to Ⅲ
9.12)
1: automatically insert
0: non-automatically insert
(6) Press the key INPUT to set and display the set parameter.

10.2.2 SET2: SET PARAMETER SWITCH MODE

(1) Press the key SET
(2) Press the page key (or [SET2] in the sub-menu) to display the parameter switch
screen.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 5

Press the cursor key ←、→ to be parameter switch in ON or OFF. CNC displays
P/S 100 alarm in parameter switch on. Input parameter is available at this time, switch
parameter switch to OFF after input completion. Press the button RESET to clear
alarm P/S 100.

10.3 CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES DISPLAY AND SETTING

Display the common variables(#100～#131，#500～#515) on the LCD screen.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 6

When the absolute value for a common variable exceeds 99999999, ******** is
displayed. The values for variables can be set on this screen. Relative
coordinates can also be set to variables.

(1) DISPLAY
1) Press the key OFSET
2) Press the page key or the soft key MSCRO to display macro variables.

(2) SET
1) Display the screen including the variable number to be set.
2) Move the cursor to the variable number to be set (see 10.1.1(1)-3)
3) Input data via the number key.
4) Press the key INPUT to input variables value.

10.4 PARAMETER
When connecting CNC and machine tool, set parameter to make the function of
driver character and machine tool specification well. For details refer to the
description of individual machine tool builder.

10.4.1 Parameter Display

1) Press the button PARAM
2) Press the page key to select display screen.
On the parameter screen, there is details for parameter at the bottom of the LCD
screen.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 7

⑴ Bit parameter
Parameter №004 to 014 is bit parameter, high bit is on the left (BIT7), the
sequence is BIT6 ， BIT5 ， BIT4 and BIT3 ， BIT2 ， BIT1 ， BIT0. So far as
concerns bit parameter, there are two kinds of display methods of the parameter
details. One is English abbreviation for the overall parameter bit, the other is the
detail Chinese display for each bit. Press the key CHANG to shift each other.
As the above example, if pressing the key CHANG , the parameter detail
display is as below:
BIT7: OTFP=1/0 the maximum output frequency is 500/32KPPS.
At this time, Bit 7 is displayed and press the cursor key → to display the details
of bit 6. The details of each bit will be displayed circularly in the sequence of
decrease progressively. If pressing the cursor key ← to display the details of bit
parameter, the details of each bit will be displayed circularly in positive
sequence.

⑵ Data parameter
The display method of parameter details is only one kind. For example, when
the cursor is at the position of No.15, the display is as follows:
X-axis command multiplication rate.

10.4.2 Set Parameter

Parameter can be set on the MDI/LCD panel or be input from programmer.
(1) Set on the MDI/LCD panel
1) Set parameter switch to on. (see 10.2.2)
2) Select MDI mode (or press the emergency button)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 8

3) Press the key PARAM to display the parameter screen.

4) Press the page key to display the parameter to be set.
5) Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set.
Method 1:
Press the cursor key to move the cursor.
Method 2:
Press the address P + parameter number and the key INPUT
6) Press the number key to input parameter value.
7) Press the key INPUT to input and display the parameter.
8) After the completion of the overall parameter setting, select the set screen
and set parameter switch to off.
9) Press the key RESET to reset the alarm. But alarm No. 000 occurs, it
is necessary to turn on or off the power in order to reset the alarm.
(2) Transmit parameter from external computer
It is valid only when selecting input / output interface function.
(A) File start. (%LF)
(B) Format
N__ P__ LF
N_ parameter number
P_ parameter value
The “0” ahead of the parameter data following the address P can be
ignored. The procedure (B) can be repeated if necessary.
(C) File stop. (LF or %)
Data input completes at the point of LF or %.
If input parameter value to the parameter number not to be included in the files,
its value will not change. The parameter formed as the above format can be
input as the following procedure.
1) Set parameter switch to ON.
2) Select EDIT mode.
3) Select the parameter screen. Run KND communication software to enter
output wait state. (Refer to APPENDIX 12)
4) Press the key INPUT to input parameter. At the same time, ‘INPUT’ is
displayed on the status bar.
5) Set parameter switch to OFF after input completion.
6) Press the key RESET
(But alarm No. 000 occurs, it is necessary to turn on or off the power in
order to reset the alarm.)
NOTE:
1 The system will stop automatically when the following alarm occurs.
1) Input the address except the address N and P.
2) The value of N or P is incorrect.
2 Press the key RESET to stop parameter input in the middle of the parameter
input.
3 Some parameter is valid only after power off (alarm No.000 occurs)
4 The parameter about RS232 interface must be set on MDI panel before input.
10.5 Pitch Error Compensation Data
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 9

machine. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. If it is
changed, the machine accuracy is reduced. In principle, the end user must not
alter this data. Refer to APPENDIX 1.

10.6 Diagnose and PLC parameter

The diagnose function can display the following signal status.
• The status of DI/DO signal between CNC and machine tool
• The signal status transmitted between CNC and PC
• The data inside PC
• The CNC inner status
The parameter can output to machine tool directly according to corresponding set.
Auxiliary function parameter can be set in this mode.

10.6.1 Diagnose Display

1) Press the button or the soft key DGNOS
2) Press the page button to select the desired page.
There are three display-bars at the bottom of the LCD screen to display the details
of the diagnose number with the cursor.

Like bit parameter, press the cursor key → to display the details of diagnose message.
The details of each bit will be displayed circularly in the sequence of decrease
progressively. If pressing the cursor key ← to display the details of diagnose message,
the details of each bit will be displayed circularly in positive sequence. For some
diagnose number, the second display-bar is not existing. See examples as below:
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 10

① MT→PC signal
‘input signal of machine tool side’
② PC→MT signal
‘output signal of machine tool side’
③ PC status
‘M code wait time ’and so on.
④ NC status signal

10.6.2 PLC PARAMETER SET

The parameter can be set on the LCDI/MDI panel
1) Select MDI mode.
2) Turn on the program protect switch
3) Press the key DGNOS to display the diagnose screen.
4) Press the page key to display the desired diagnose screen.
5) Move the cursor to the diagnose number to be modified.
Method 1:
Press the cursor key to move the cursor.
Method 2:
Press the address P + diagnose number and the key INPUT
6) Press the number key to input auxiliary function parameter value.
7) Press the key INPUT to input and display the parameter.

10.7 DISPLAY AND SET MACHINE SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S

PANEL
㈠DISPLAY
The machine tool operator’s panel will be displayed on the LCD screen by pressing
the function key OPR . The display is three pages altogether: the first is mode and
program debugging switch; the second is override, federate, AUTO start and stop,
manual axis direction selection and start-up; the last page is spindle CW/CCW,
JOG, coolant switch and some machine tool motion switch. These pages can be
selected by the page key or using the soft-menu key on the right.
Press the soft-menu key OPR twice continuously to enter the sub-menu, at this
time, machine tool operation key will be displayed on the soft-menu and the
corresponding number key and operation key are valid. Press the soft key on the
left to return the main menu.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 11

( Fig. 1 )

BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Mode － MDI←AUTO← EDIT←STEP/ HANDLE← JOG← MANUAL TEACH
←HANDLE TEACH (F1)
Mode ＋ MDI→AUTO→ EDIT→STEP/ HANDLE→ JOG→ MANUAL TEACH
→HANDLE TEACH (F2)
Single block Single block switch (F3)
ZRN switch Reference position return switch (F4)
Dry run Dry run switch (F5)
Key1 Select optional block skip switch (number key 1)
Key2 Machine tool lock switch (number key 2)
Key3 Auxiliary function switch (number key 3)
Key4 Program protect switch (number key 4)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 12

( Fig. 2 )

Key Function
Override - Invalid, determined by override switch on operator’s panel
Override + Invalid, determined by override switch on operator’s panel
Axis motion- Manual motion “-“
Axis motion+ Manual motion “+“
Start/stop Cycle start / feed hold
Number key1 Select handle or manual
Number key2 Manual rapid traverse switch
Number key3 Step/ manual selection (default value is X1)
Number key4 Rapid traverse override changed in negative sequence (default
value is 100%)
Number key5 Rapid traverse override changed in positive sequence
Number key6 Spindle override changed in negative sequence
Number key7 Spindle override changed in positive sequence
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 13

( Fig. 3 )
Key Function
CW Spindle CW start
CCW Spindle CCW start
Stop Spindle stop
Step Spindle step rotate
Cool Coolant on/off
Number key1 No used
Number key2 No used
Number key3 Lubricant on/off
Number key4 No used
Number key5 No used
Number key6 No used
Number key7 No used

㈡ METHOD
All machine software operation keys posses the same function as machine tool
operation button. LED on operator’s panel is lit after selecting soft keys. Display
screen will change correspondingly after selecting operation button on panel. ‘*’
is on machine screen or not. It is no meaning, its setting and clear is as below:
Procedure :
 Ⅲ OPERATION－10（DISPLAY） 10 - 14

. ) Screen selection.
..) Press INPUT and corresponding sub-menu key or number key. [override -] on
Fig. 2 corresponds to feedrate, [override +] corresponds to jog feed. There is
‘*’in front of corresponding key.
...) As above. Replace INPUT with DEL in procedure2, and delete‘*’.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 1

11. DISPLAY
11.1 Status Indication
(1)The status of the system is indicted above the soft keys at the bottom of the
screen. The following indications are displayed.
NOT READY Indicates that the control unit or the servo system is not ready
for operations and this indication is flickering.
ALM Indicates that an alarm was generated, press the ALARM
button to display alarm details (this indication is flickering).
OPR Display the current operation mode: AUTO, EDIT, JOG, ZRN,
STEP/HNDL, MDI, RETURN PROGRAM ZERO.

(2) Dialog box display

BAT ALM This alarm displays when the voltage of the battery is less than
the specified value.
EDIT Indicates that the current editing operation.
A) EDIT: Indicates that editing is being performed.
B) SEARCH: Indicates that searching is being performed.
C) OUTPUT: Indicates that files is outputting via prot.
D) INPUT: Indicates that files is inputting via port.
E) COMP: Indicates that program is being compared via
interface.
F) SAVE: Indicates that system data is being stored to flash
memory.

11.2 DATA DISPLAYING

The inputting values displays above the status indication.
The symbol for prompting: it is existing only on the screen which can be input.
A) Display program in EDIT mode:
ADRS Input address only
DATA Input data only
B) PARAM, OFSET, AGNOS screen:
No.005=… Input parameter values available.
No.005… The input data are invalid.
No.005 Key in the searched sequence
flickering number.
Display the input data behind the symbol for prompting and press the button INSRT
or INPUT , the input values disappears.

11.3 Displaying the Sequence Number and Program Number

The program number and sequence number are displayed at the top right on the
screen as shown below.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 2

The program number and sequence number displayed depend on the screen and
are given below:
On the program screen in the EDIT mode on Background edit screen :
The program No. being edited and the sequence number just prior to the cursor are
indicated.

Other than above screens :

The program No. and the sequence No. executed last are indicated.

Immediately after program number search or sequence number search :

Immediately after the program No. search and sequence No. search, the program
No. and the sequence No. searched are indicated.

11.4 Display the Program Memory Usuage

The display method is as follows.
1) Mode select. (EDIT)
2) Press the button PRGRM or soft key PRGRM twice to enter the sub-menu
PRGRM
3) Press the sub-menu soft key INDEX
(A) Registered program number: the number of registered programs(including
sub-program)
Remainder：the number of programs to be stored
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 3

(B) Used memory: memory capacity taken up by registered

program(expressed by the number of word characters)
Remainder：the number of program memory capacity to be used
(C) Program list: display the registered program No one by one

11.5 Display the command value

(1) Press the function key PRGRM or soft key PRGRM

(2) Press the button PAGE to display the below 4-screen. (or using sub-menu to
select directly)
1) Display the executing block command, the next block command, MDI data
and current modal values.
NOTE:
The page of above described are displayed in the same screen.

2) Display the executing block command and the next block command. (press
the sub-soft key current/next)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 4

11.6 Display the Current Position

(1) Press the button POS or soft key POS
(2) Press the button PAGE to display the below screen (or soft keys in sub-menu)
1) Display the work coordinate position (the soft key ABS)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 5

2) Display the work coordinate position (the soft key REL)

The moving position can be displayed via relative position and be cleared as 0
after turning on the power to start the machine tool.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 6

Procedure to reset the axis coordinate to 0:

1 Key in the address of the axis name (X, Y, etc.) on the relative coordinate
screen. The entered axis address blinks. Two or more axis names can be
input.

2 Press the CAN key. The relative coordinates of the axis having the blinking
address are reset to 0.

1) Overall Position Display (Press the soft key ALL)

The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed
at the same time:
(A) Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine coordinate)
(B) Distance to go (distance to go)
(C) Graphic
(D) Program

In the above screen, the following operation can be executed.

Procedure to reset the machine coordinate to 0:

Key in the address of the axis name (X, Y, Z) on the MDI operator’s panel in
pressing ZRN at the same time. The corresponding coordinate values are reset to
0.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 7

4) Display Program feedrate, override and actual feedrate

Actual feedrate (mm/min) can be displayed on the current position screen.

11.7 Display of Run Time and Parts Count

The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the
current position display screens.(see 11.6)
Program feedrate the feedrate specified by F code in program
Actual feedrate actual machine feedrate after override in actual cutting
Feedrate override override selected by feedrate override switch
G code G codes of group 01 and group 03 in the executing block
Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is
incremented each time M30 specified by parameter
Part count
No.067 is executed. Set the parameter No.067=0, the
value is reset to 0.
Indicates that the total run time during automatic
Cutting time operation. Its unit is hour/minute/ second. It is reset to 0
after turning on the power.
Rapid traverse
Display the current rapid traverse override.
override

More information can be displayed by using the key CHANG.

1. Three-axis system
Analogue spindle function is selected, [spindle override] can be displayed on
the [rapid traverse] by pressing CHANG.
2. Four-axis system
Feed rate G code / S, T code
Actual feed rate Rapid traverse override / part count
Feed rate override Run rime / spindle override
The functions on both sides of “/” on the right can change by the button
CHANG.

11.8 Display Alarm

When an alarm occurs, ALM is flickering at the bottom of the LCD screen. Press
the function key or soft key ALARM to display the alarm number and content. The
meaning of alarm number are list in the APPENDIX.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－11（DISPLAY） 11 - 8

There is an alarm details display at the bottom of the LCD screen on alarm screen
to display the current P/S alarm details. Other alarms such as driver device alarm
and overheat alarm display in the middle of LCD screen.

NOTE:
1 Display screen is changed to alarm screen automatically when an alarm occurs.
2 In feed hold mode and without alarm, “DWELL” will be flickering at the bottom of
the screen instead of “ALARM”.
 Ⅲ OERATION－12 （DATA OUTPUT AND FLASH MEMORY） 12 - 1

12. DATA OUTPUT AND FLASH MEMORY

The system data, such as parameter and program, can transmit to external
computer via RS232 serial port and can be stored in flash memory. If necessary,
they can be input from external computer or can be read from the inner flash
memory.

12.1 DATA OUTPUT

12.1.1 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES
The tool offset amount can be set in compensation memory or output to external
computer. The format of data output is the same as the compensation values input
except G90 and G91.
(1) Set output data interface
Data output interface baud rate can be set by parameter.

(2) Select the mode selector switch to EDIT

(3) Press the function key or soft key OFSET to display the offset data.
Run the communication software to be in receive mode.

(4) Press the key OUTPUT

(5) Display output at the beginning of offset amount output

(6) Press the key RESET to end the offset amount output

12.1.2 PARAMETER
Specified parameter in CNC can output to external computer via interface. The
format of output data is the same as the format of parameter input. (refer to
Ⅲ.10.4.2)
(1) Set output data interface
Output data interface baud rate can be set by parameter.

(2) Select the mode selector switch to EDIT

(3) Press the function key or soft key PARAM to display the parameter screen.
Run the communication software to be in receive mode.

(4) Press the key OUTPUT

(5) Display output at the beginning of parameter output

(6) Press the key RESET to end the parameter output.

NOTE:
1 Tool compensation values and parameter transmit to computer as a file, the file
can be modified and edited on computer.
 Ⅲ OERATION－12 （DATA OUTPUT AND FLASH MEMORY） 12 - 2

2 Computer communication software operation corresponding to input and output

is necessary.
3 Parameter, program and tool offset amount input. (refer to Ⅲ9,10)

12.2. FLASH MEMORY

12.2.1CENERAL
This system adapt flash memory. It is a modal memory.

Flash memory data1(default)

Flash memory data 2 System current data
Flash memory data 3

Initial standard parameter

Program /offset (reset to 0)

There are three disks in a flash memory, each disk includes data such as
parameter, program, offset, PC parameter and so on. The system current data can
be stored in a random disk, in the meantime , system can read data from a random
disk as the current data.
The data can be saved because of the battery on the system board. The data of
turning on the CNC is the same as its turning off. The disk data is read when the
current data is disappeared or necessary.

12.2.2 Read from disk

Read data from a random disk to the working area, the procedure is as below:
1 Press INPUT + 0~3 number key and turn on the power simultaneously
2 The following words are appeared:
insert a disk, press RESET to conform or press CAN to cancel (number)
3 Press the key RESET, the disk data corresponding to the number key are
read into the working area. Press the key 0 to set KND initial standard
parameter, and the data in program area and offset area will be reset to 0, in
order to the first install of new flash memory. Storage is after modifying.
NOTE:
Read is being executed only in power-on, read can’t be executed after turning
on the power.

12.2.3 Storage into Disk

The procedure is as follows.
1 Display the program screen.
2 Mode select.(EDIT)
3 Press the address key N and number key 1~8 and the button OUTPUT.
 Ⅲ OERATION－12 （DATA OUTPUT AND FLASH MEMORY） 12 - 3

“Save” is flickering at right-down of the status indication during storage. The default
value is disk1 when the number key is ignored. The flickering “save” will disappear
after the completion of the storage.
After inputting parameter and program data, “please store” is flickering at right-
down of the screen automatically. The modified data must be stored in order to
remember after power off. “please store” will disappear automatically after storage.
If you don’t want to store or display the flickering “please store”, press CAN to
cancel.

NOTE:
Storage can not be executed when an alarm occurs. Only parameter P013 EAL=1,
storage can be completed when an alarm occurs.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－13（GRAPH FUNCTION） 13 - 1

13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION
Tool path can be displayed on the LCD screen. Therefore, cutting path and
machined shape can be checked on the LCD screen. The tool path can be
reduced and enlarged.
Using graph parameter to select eight coordinate systems:

Y X X Z

(0) (1) (2) (3)

X Y Z X Y

Z Y Z Y

(4) (5) (6) (7)

Y Z X X Z
The dimension of LCD:

57.5mm 76mm

LCD center (Gc)

The maximum dimension of graph on the LCD screen is 152mmX114MM. If the

workpiece shape is large than the maximum graph dimension, the machined graph
must be reduced and enlarged. The range of reduce and enlarge proportion is 0.01
to 100.00. The method of reduce and enlarge in 2-dimensional space is as follows.
Scale Proportion = MIN（horizontal proportion，vertical proportion）；
Horizontal proportion = α/machined length in horizon
Vertical proportion = β/machined length in vertical
α ： 152mm
β ： 114 mm
The basic point of scale is at the center of the LCD screen.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－13（GRAPH FUNCTION） 13 - 2

The path after scale

Programmed path

GC：LCD center

Programmed path
GC

The path after scale

The tool path on the LCD screen is described by the workpiece coordinate values
of the tool moved. The center of LCD corresponding to the workpiece coordinate
values is as below.
GcX = （X max + X min）÷2
GcY = （Y max + Y min）÷2
GcZ = （Z max + Z min）÷2
The maximum or the minimum value in X, Y or Z is set by graph parameter.

13.1 Set Graph Parameter

Graph parameter must be set beforehand in MDI mode before start-up.
(1) Press the key GRAPH, graph parameter is displayed on the first screen. ( or
press the soft key GRAPH twice to enter the sub-menu, then press the soft
key PARAM )
(2) Press the cursor key ↓ , ↑ and move the cursor under the parameter to be set.
(3) Press the number key and the button INPUT. Input graph parameter values.
(4) Repeat the procedure (2) (3) to set parameter to be set.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－13（GRAPH FUNCTION） 13 - 3

13.2 DESCRIPTION OF GRAPH PARAMETER

·Select coordinate system：Coordinate plane selection
（XY=0,YX=1,ZX=2,XYZ=3,YZ=4,ZY=5,XZ=6,XZY=
7）

Y X X Z

(0) (1) (2) (3)

X Y Z X Y

Z Y Z Y

(4) (5) (6) (7)

Y Z X X Z

·Scale proportion：Set drawing proportion.

Set range： 1～10000
1 = 0.01 times
 Ⅲ OPERATION－13（GRAPH FUNCTION） 13 - 4

·Graph center：Set the coordinate values of LCD center in workpiece coordinate

system.

·Maximum and minimum values：Set the maximum and minimum values of each
axis, then corresponding graph center
coordinate values can be set automatically.
EXAMPLE: (2-dimension space)

600.000
(vertical maximum)

LCD center

500.000
200.000 (350.000,500.000) (horizontal maximum)
(horizontal minimum)
400.000
(vertical minimum)
horizontal graph center =(500.000+ 200.000)÷2 = 350.000
Proportion= 152÷300 = 0.507
vertical graph center =(600.000+ 400.000)÷2 = 500.000
Proportion= 114÷200 =0.57
Scale proportion = min｛0.507，0.57｝= 0.507,
It can be set as the values no more than 51.
If graph center parameter need to modify, it can be set after setting the
maximum and minimum values of each axis.

3-dimension space:
End point(Z-axis coordinate value is 100mm)

G90 G01 Z100. F200

(X2,Y2)

(X1,Y1)
Z-axis coordinate value in absolute is 100mm
the corresponding point on LCD may be different.

Thus it can see, Z-axis coordinate value in absolute corresponding point on LCD is
uncertain in three dimensions space. Coordinate X and Y are the same. LCD
center coordinate value in absolute corresponding to each axis can only be set by
 Ⅲ OPERATION－13（GRAPH FUNCTION） 13 - 5

parameter. Scale proportion can’t be calculated easily by the maximum and

minimum, scale proportion coefficient can be set by actual drawing.

13.3 DESCRIPTION OF TOOL PATH

Drawing screen is on the second page of the graph screen, it can be selected by
the key PAGE or the soft key GRAPH in sub-menu.

X Y

① Press the key S (or the soft key START in sub-menu) to enter drawing
mode.
② Move machine tool in AUTO/MDI/JOG mode. When the absolute
coordinate values change, tool path will be displayed correspondingly.
③ Press the key T (or the soft key STOP in sub-menu) to enter drawing stop
mode.
④ Press the key R (or the soft key DELET in sub-menu) to delete drawing.
NOTE:
In program debugging, machine lock and dry run feed rate can be used.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－13（GRAPH FUNCTION） 13 - 6

13.4 EXAMPLE (2-DIMENSION SPACE)

Parameter selection: programmed unit 0.001mm
Drawing plane 2
X
S tart point
（ 130， 150）

30

Z
40
90

(a) Draw overall tool path；

Set the maximum and minimum：
X max = 130000，X min = 0
Z max = 150000，Z min = 0
Graph center is set automatically.（65000，75000）
Scale proportion (horizontal)= 152÷150 = 1.01
Scale proportion (vertical)= 114÷130 = 0.88
Scale proportion coefficient is no more than 0.88 (88)
(b) Draw the thalweg
X max = 30000，X min = 0
Z max = 90000，Z min = 40000
Graph center is set automatically（15000，65000）
Scale proportion (horizontal)= 152÷50 = 3.04
Scale proportion (vertical)= 114÷30 = 3.8
Scale proportion coefficient is no more than 3.04 (304)
(c) Offset on the LCD screen
Change the maximum and minimum with the same data (or change the
graph center directly)
max+ a, min+ a
a＜0， drawing position shift upward or towards the right
a＞0， drawing position shift downward or towards the left
3-dimension space：
a＜0， drawing position shift towards the positive end of axis
a＞0， drawing position shift towards the negative end of axis
 Ⅲ OPERATION－14（DRIVER CHARACTER DESCRIPTION ） 14 - 1

14 DRIVER CHARACTER DESCRIPTION

14.1 UPPER LIMIT FEED
K1000M system can connect stepper motor or number servo motor. When
connecting the stepper motor, feed can be restricted by setting parameter.
During machining, if the specified feed is large than the upper limit feed (No.045),
the upper limit feed will become feedrate automatically. According to the torque-
frequency character of stepper motor, rotational speed improvement and torque
reduction occurs simultaneously. If the cutting force isn’t adequate, loss of step will
generate. Therefore, the proper upper limit feed can avoid loss of step.

n × a × L × c × 1000
F=
6
F ：upper limit feed (mm/min)
n : the maximum frequent allowed by stepper motor in the desired torque
（KPPS）
a : stepper angle (deg)
L : machine tool incremental value corresponding to one rotation of the stepper
motor(mm)
c : stepper motor and guild screw gear ratio (directly connection is 1)

EXAMPLE：
n = 10 KPPS, a = 0.75（deg）， L = 5（mm） c = 1
F = 6250 mm/min

14.2 Setting Rapid Traverse

Rapid traverse is only used in machine tool empty load. At this time, the desired
torque is less than the cutting torque. So the value of n can be increased. The
calculation method of the feed is the same as the above.

EXAMPLE：
n = 15KPPS, a = 0.75（deg）， L = 5（mm） c = 1
F = 9375 mm/min

14.3 Setting Electric Gear Rate

When the guild screw with different pitch and the motor with different stepper angle (or
the servo motor with different pulses rpm) dispose together, or connected by all kinds
of gearshift gears, set CNC electric gear ratio parameter to keep the program path and
tool path identical.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－14（DRIVER CHARACTER DESCRIPTION ） 14 - 2

14.3.1 Stepper Motor

CMR 360
=
CMD a × L × 1000

CMR : command multiple ratio （parameter №015～017）

CMD : command dividing ratio（parameter №018～020）
a : stepper angle (deg)
L : machine tool incremental value corresponding to one rotation of the stepper
motor(mm)
EXAMPLE：
a = 0.75 L = 5
CMR 12
=
CMD 125

system least output increment is CMD/CMR =125/12（unit：0.001 mm）

NOTE:
1 The system least command increment is 0.001mm with an optional stepper
angle motor, but the least output increment is depended on the values of a and L.
That is to say, the less of the value of a and L the better of resolving power, but
the feed will decrease, and vice versa.
2 Set range: 1 to 127.

14.3.2 Servo Motor

CMR P
=
CMD L × 1000

L : machine tool incremental value corresponding to one rotation of the stepper

motor(mm)
P : pulse amount corresponding to one rotation of motor

14.4 Setting Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant

See Ⅱprogramming 5.3 for details. The user can set according to the selected
stepper motor acceleration and deceleration demand.

14.5 Parameter Setting

14.5.1 Output Wave selection (selected by parameter №005 PCMD)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－14（DRIVER CHARACTER DESCRIPTION ） 14 - 3

（PCMD=0）
Square wave：
The maximum output frequent256KPPS

Pulse wave output：（PCMD=1）

The maximum output frequent 512KPPS
Pulse width1ms

14.5.2 Return Reference Position Selection(parameter №014 ZRSZ，

ZRSY，ZRSX)
There are two kinds of reference position return modes to select.
Mode a: no machine origin (no deceleration dog)
① Origin setting：
Move the coordinate axis to an optional point, set this point as machine origin
according to the following procedure:
◇ Select the third page on the position screen—all coordinate.
◇ Press the key CAN and the address axis key on CNC operator’s panel
simultaneously to set corresponding axis machine coordinate as 0.

② procedure：
◇ Select reference position return mode.
◇ Press an optional axis manual switch to move machine tool to the position
specified by procedure ①.
◇ Reference position return completion LED on operator’s panel goes on
after returning reference position.
Work coordinate system setting and pitch error compensation can be executed
by parameter selection.

NOTE:
1 This mode will generate error if loss of step occurs. Error is equal to the
step of loss of step. In this case, pitch error compensation can’t be executed
correctly.
2 Set parameter No. P011 ZRNL to hold.

Mode b：including machine origin (Deceleration dog and one rotation signal are
necessary.)
◇ Select reference position return mode.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－14（DRIVER CHARACTER DESCRIPTION ） 14 - 4

◇ Press manual axis direction switch set by parameter to move machine tool
at rapid traverse before deceleration point, machine tool move to zero
point at the speed of FL after pressing the deceleration switch.
◇ Reference position return completion LED on operator’s panel goes on
after returning reference position.
Work coordinate system setting and pitch error compensation can be executed
by parameter selection.

NOTE:
1 This mode will not generate error if loss of step occurs. That is to say,
machine origin is not variable after retuning zero in this mode. In this case,
pitch error compensation can be executed correctly.

Mode c：including machine origin (need a magne-switch)

See APPENDIX 7 the description of parameter No. P007.

14.5.3 Maximum Output Frequency Selection（parameter №004 OTFP）

According to system different choice, maximum output frequent is 32 KPPS or 512
KPPS. Select square wave output, the output frequent is one half. If the
programmed feedrate is large than the set frequent, driver alarm occurs—specified
feedrate is too large.

14.5.4 Driver Device Ready Signal Voltage Level Selection

(parameter №009 VRY4～X)
Turning on the power, CNC transmits ready signal MRDY to driver device (see
connection manual), driver device ready signal feedback to system after receiving.
If driver device is not ready, driver alarm occurs—driver device not ready.
Set parameter to select driver device ready signal effective voltage level of each
axis.

14.5.5 Driver Device Alarm Signal Voltage Level Selection

（parameter №009 DAL4～X）
If driver device alarm signal occurs, the following will display:
‘driver device alarm: driver device alarm’
Set parameter to select driver device alarm signal effective voltage level of each
axis.

14.5.6 Notes on Parameter Setting Disposing Stepper Motor

 Ⅲ OPERATION－14（DRIVER CHARACTER DESCRIPTION ） 14 - 5

When CNC disposing stepper motor, according to its character, the following
parameter must be set generally according to concrete conditions in order to inhibit
turning irregularly.
1 Backlash Compensation
Compensation frequent is set to the minimum. P010/P011 CPF4，3，2，1 is
set to 0.
P011 ：
BDEC=1 （ Exponential acceleration/deceleration, inhibit lose of step
generating because of backlash compensation output over fast
when motor rotates in opposite direction）
BD8 ＝1 Backlash compensation output frequent is one eighth of parameter
P0100 setting value.

2 Driver Device One-way Pulse

signal：direction＋pulse, set parameter P011：
RVDL＝1 Pulse signal is delayed for a little after direction signal output when
axis motion direction is changed.
KSGN ＝1 Axis motion signal keeps on when it moves in negative direction.

3 Acceleration/ Deceleration Time Constant

Exponential or linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in stepper motor
is always large than in servo motor. Time constant need to set according to
concrete conditions.
G00 linear acceleration/deceleration time constant：200～600。
G01 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant：100～300。

14.6 Driver Alarm

①011，021，031，041 ：X，Y，Z，4 driver not ready. (See 14.5.4)
②012，022，032，042 ：X，Y，Z ，4 driver alarm.
When driver alarm signal (ALM) is on, this alarm occurs.
③013，023，033，043 ：X，Y，Z ，4 specified feed over-large. (see14.5.3)
 Ⅲ OPERATION－15（DESCRIPTION) 15 - 1

15 DESCRIPTION
15.1 Standard Parameter Setting and Memory Clear
Press the key INPUT ＋0 to turn on the power, the following will prompt：
‘fetch disk, press the key RESET to confirm, press the key CAN to cancel
(number)’
At this time press the key RESET to set KND standard parameter automatically,
and clear away program and offset. See APPENDIX 7 standard parameter list.
Parameter setting is corresponding to user’s different configuration, be sure to
backup the corresponding parameter.

15.2 Not Check Soft Over travel

Press the key EOB ＋CAN to turn on the power, system will not execute soft limit
stoke check. There is operation promotion on the first index screen. Set PLC
parameter D200 SOT not to check overtravel alarm.

15.3 Backlash Compensation Description

System will check automatically whether backlash compensation parameter setting
is large or not after power on. If it is too large, system will clear compensation
parameter of working area to 0. The direction of the first backlash compensation is
set by parameter. If there is machine reference point, after returning reference
point, compensation will be executed if machine tool moves to the negative
direction.
EXAMPLE:
If reference point return is in positive direction, the first compensation will be
executed when the first motion in negative direction.
If there isn’t reference position, and not returning reference point, the procedure of
power on and power-off is as following.
Start point and end point

Set positive return zero direction (negative direction

the first compensation). If power-off isn’t at this point ,
compensation won’t be incorrect.

15.4 Keyboard and Input Signal Filter

The filter time of keyboard key and input signal: parameter P024.
Setting time = setting value×16 ms
Standard value is 2 and the maximum value is 8.
If there is disturbed signal, set according to concrete conditions.
 Ⅲ OPERATION－15（DESCRIPTION) 15 - 2

15.5 Turn on the Power not to Enter Normal Screen

Turning on the power, if “not ready” in large font is displayed on the screen, and
CNC don’t enter the normal screen, because of inputting emergency signal in
general, releasing emergency button to be ready. Or pressing the soft key to enter
main screen to observe corresponding signal on diagnose screen.

15.6 ROM Parity Alarm, CMOS data lose，RAM check

1）ROM parity alarm
If the following alarm occurs, contacting with KND Ltd.
MEMORY ALARM : NO.3
ROM PARITY:
0A0
0B0
0D0
F00
2）Memory Data Checking in Power-on
Turning on the power, system will check data of disk data (version 1) or battery
storage data area (version 2) automatically. If these data change, there is the
below display on the LCD screen.
‘ battery storage data not reserved, press RESET to continue.’
At this time, press the emergency button before pressing the key RESET to check
whether data are correct or not. If there is wrong, release the emergency button
after correcting it.

NOTE:
1 System will display ‘not ready’ in large font on the screen after pressing the
emergency button, press an optional soft-menu key to enter normal screen.
2 In order to keep the system normal, correct parameter, program, offset and PC
data (such as counter and time-counter) are necessary. The important data must
be recorded or transmitted from RS232 port to backup after completing machine
tool debugging.

3）Working RAM fixed area regular check

If the following alarm occurs, contacting with KND Ltd.
MEMORY ALARM : NO.2
CMOS RAM ERROR
Ⅳ CONNECTION －1（System Structure） 1－0

Ⅳ CONNECTION
 Ⅳ CONNECTION －1（System Structure） 1－1

Ⅳ CONNECTION
This chapter mainly describe the system structure, connection and machine interface. The
version of system board is 0012I-0000-W01Z-0106.

1 System Structure
1.1.System Configuration
KND 1000MⅠ series CNC system is made up of the following units:
(1) CNC control unit
(2) Additional operator’s panel (optional function)
(3) digital AC servo motor driver device
(4) servo motor
(5) Power transformer
(6) Electrical cabinet

Fig 1.1
 Ⅳ CONNECTION －1（System Structure） 1－2

1.2．Installation Dimension of CNC Control unit

Fig 1.2a front view

80

14
67.5

14

Fig. 1.2b upside view

 Ⅳ CONNECTION －1（System Structure） 1－3

14

14

Fig. 1.2c left view

1.3 Additional Operator’s Panel Dimension

400mm

90 + 0.1
100mm
5
130±0.1 130±0.1 130±0.1

thickness：100mm

fig 1.3
 ⅣCONNECTION－2（Internal connection） 2－1

2. INTERNAL CONNECTION
2.1 System Internal Connection Diagram

XS2
XS20
6
XS2
7
LCD screen
J1 XS3
XS24
XS2
XS21
Keyboard/LCD control board LCD display connection board
XS23

XS3 XS1

XS9 XS10
System Main board
0
0
1
2
1
-
0
XS1 0
0
0
-
W
0
1
Z
-
0
1
0
6
XS4
XS5 XS8

XS60 XS51 XS53 XS50 XS52 XS59

CAN 4axis Zaxis Yaxis Xaxis Spindle coder

XS1
power
Power unit

XS55 XS54 XS56 XS61 XS58 XS57

Anolog spindle DI panel Operator box RS232 DO

System external connection socket Fig.2.1

 ⅣCONNECTION－2（Internal connection） 2－2

SOCKET DESCRIPTION：
1：Keyboard Control Board
XS20：connect with mainboard
XS23：connect with mainboard
XS25：connect with display connection board
XS26：connect with LCD backlight power cable
XS27：connect with LCD backlight power cable
J1 ：connect with keyboard control board
XS3 ：connect with HITACHI LCD

2： Main Control Board

XS1：under develop
XS3：connect with keyboard
XS4：under develop
XS5：connect with keyboard
XS8：connect with power on the system external socket system external socket
XS9：connect with system external socket
XS10：connect with system external socket

3： System External Connection Socket

XS1： power socket
XS57：system output（DO） DB 25- pin female socket
XS54：system input（DI） DB 25- pin male socke
XS52：X -axis driver. DB 15-pin female socket
XS50：Y-axis driver. DB 15-pin female socket
XS53：Z-axis driver. DB 15-pin female socket
XS51：4-axis driver. DB 15-pin female socket (optional function)
XS59：spindle coder, DB15-pin female socket
XS58：RS232－Cseries port. DB 9- pin female socke
XS55：analogue spindle interface. DB 9-pin male socket
XS56：machine tool additional operator’s panel. DB 15-pin male socket
XS61：special operator’s box, DB 15-pin male socket
XS60：CAN, DB 9- pin female socket
 ⅣCONNECTION－2（Internal connection） 2－3

2.2 Power Socket Signal Arrangement

＋
－

＋
＋
0 0 1 0 +
5 5 V 1
2 V 2 V 2
4
V V V V V

Fig.2.2
2.3 CNC Mainboard switch description
2.4.3 mainboard version：0012I-0000-W01Z-0106

XS3－KEY&LCD

SA14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0
0
1
2
1
-
0
0
0
0
SA3 SA5
-
W
0
1
Z
-
0
1
0
6
SA4 XS8－power socket

Setting switch description ---0012I-0000-W01Z-0106

switc setting（★initial setting） remark
h
1－2short the voltage of the X-aixs
SA14 (step) Y-aixs Z-aixs 4-aixs VP is
+5V
2－3short the voltage of the X-aixs
(servo) Y-aixs Z-aixs 4-aixs VP is
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+24V
4 open
Motion command output：
★
Pulse and direction signal
 ⅣCONNECTION－2（Internal connection） 2－4

switc setting（★initial setting） remark

h
Motion command output：
4short
Positive pulse and negative
command pulse signal
The voltage level of
PC(one rotation signal)
5、6、7、8 used for returning
short reference position is +5V，
(servo) each axis can be set
respectivly.
8--X-axis ， 7--Y-axis ，
6--Z-axis，5—4th-axis
The voltage level of
PC(one rotation signal)
5、6、7、8 used for returning
open reference position is
(step) +24V，each axis can be
set respectivly.
8--X-axis ， 7--Y-axis ，
6--Z-axis，5—4th-a
 ⅣCONNECTION－2（Internal connection） 2－5

switch setting（★initial setting） remark

Initial setting, not modify.

SA1 1，2short
3.3V If alter this setting, LCD will be
SA2 ★
damaged.
SA3
SA4 open★ Initial setting, not modify.
SA5
SA6 SA7 SA6
SA6
（1-2short)SA7open Initial setting, not modify.
SA7
★
Manual reset input
SA8 open★
It is open in normal state.
It must be set the same as SA1and
SA9 1-2short★
SA2.
It must be shorted, or program will
SA10 short★
not be excuted.

SA11 open★ Initial setting, not modify.

SA12 2-3short★ Initial setting, not modify.

SA13
open★ Initial setting, not modify.
SA15
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 1

Chap3 EXTERNAL CONNECTION

3.1System External Connection Diagram
3.1.1Connection Diagram (stepper motor)

K1000M series CNC system

XS52 XS50 XS53 XS51 XS60 XS61 XS56 XS54 XS55 XS57 XS58 XS59

W11X W11Y W11Z W114 W420 W600 W310 W300 W410 W320 W330
W400
4th-axis driver

Can bus interface

additional operator’s panel

Y-axis driver

Z-axis driver
X-axis driver

Operator box

Output to MT side signal

MT side input signal

Universal PC computer

Spindle encoder
transducer

W20X W20Y W20Z

W204

Step step

step step

note：spindle encoder is optional function.

Fig.3.1.1
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 2

3.1.2 Connection Diagram (digit AC servo motor)

K1000M series CNC system

XS52 XS50 XS53 XS51 XS60 XS61 XS56 XS54 XS55 XS57 XS58 XS59

W10X W10Y W10Z W104 W420 W600 W310 W400 W300 W410 W320 W330

additional operator’s panel

4th-axis driver
Y-axis driver

Can bus interface

Z-axis driver
X-axis driver

Output to MT side signal

Operator box

MT side input signal

Spindle encoder
Universal PC computer
transducer

W22X W22Y W22Z W224

NOTE：
1、 spindle encoder is optional function;
W214 W204 2、 Connection between X/Y/Z and servo
motor is the same as 4th-axis. The cable
power number is as below:
transfor X power cable W20X
feedback cable W21X
servo Y power cable W20Y
～380V
feedback cable W21Y
Z power cable W20Z
Fig.3.1.2 feedback cable W21Z
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 3

3.2 Interface Signal from CNC to Driver

3.2.1 Interface Signal Diagram

CNC side
AM26LS31
1 CP+
SA14 ， bit5 to bit8 is corresponding
x,y,z,4th 9
CP-
short：the signal voltage of PC is 5V;
2
open：the signal voltage of PC is 24V DIR+
10
DIR-

3
PC+
4.7K 150

11
PC-

+12V
2K

4
DRDY

+12V
2K

5 DALM

7 MRDY1
SA14
1-2short：the voltage of VP is ＋5V;
2-3short：the voltage of VP is ＋24V

8 MRDY2
+24V +5V

1 12,13 VP
14,15
2 0V
3

Fig.3.2.1b
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 4

3.2.2 Connector Signal List

XS52：DB15F（Xaxis） XS50：DB15F（Yaxis）

1 XCP+ 1 YCP+
9 XCP- 9 YCP-
2 XDIR+ 2 YDIR+
10 XDIR- 10 YDIR-
3 XPC+ 3 YPC+
11 XPC- 11 YPC-
4 XDRDY 4 YDRDY
12 VP 12 VP
5 XDALM 5 YDALM
13 VP 13 VP
6 6
14 0V 14 0V
7 XMRDY1 7 YMRDY1
15 0V 15 0V
8 XMRDY2 8 YMRDY2

XS53：DB15F（Zaxis） XS51：DB15F（4thaxis）

1 ZCP+ 1 4CP+
9 ZCP- 9 4CP-
2 ZDIR+ 2 4DIR+
10 ZDIR- 10 4DIR-
3 ZPC+ 3 4PC+
11 ZPC- 11 4PC-
4 ZDRDY 4 4DRDY
12 VP 12 VP
5 ZDALM 5 4DALM
13 VP 13 VP
6 6
14 0V 14 0V
7 ZMRDY1 7 4MRDY1
15 0V 15 0V
8 ZMRDY2 8 4MRDY2

Fig.3.2.2b

3.2.3 Signal Description (n:X/Y/Z/4th)

(1) motion command signal
(a) Single pulse output (the bit4 of SA14 open)
nCP＋，nCP－；nDIR＋，nDIR－。
NCP: command pulse signal，
nDIR: motion direction signal.
They are all differential output.
(b) Double pulse output (the bit4 of SA14 short)
nCP: negative command pulse signal，
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 5

nDIR: positive command pulse signal

(2) Zero point signal of machine tool reference position

Receive circuit of the CNC side

Bit5 to bit8 of SA14

SA14 switch

nPC+
150 4.7k

nPC-

CNC side receive circuit

Fig. 3.2.3b

nPC or nPC+ signal wave provided by user is as below：

Direction of reference point return
Deceleration signal
*DECn

Using encoder PC signal

(one rotation signal)

Using magne-switch signal ignored

(nPC or nPC+)

Reference point
Fig. 3.2.3c

The connection diagram using a magne-switch as deceleration switch and zero signal

of zero return is as below:

 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 6

+24V CNC system side

Magne-switch
+24V
2K

*DECn

nPC(nPC+)

nPC-

External circuit

Fig. 3.2.3d
Reference point return path

Deceleration signal
*DECn

nPC
nPC+
signal

Reference point
Manual zero return direction
Zero return high speed Zero return setting

Zero return low speed

0

Fig. 3.2.3e
NOTE：This is zero return mode C，zero return direction parameter setting is opposite
to manual zero return direction. Refer to parameter description.
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 7

(3) driver device ready signal nDRDY（input）

receive circuit：

CNC system side

+12V

2K

nDRDY

Fog. 3.2.3f

The effective voltage level of input signal can be set to high voltage level or low
voltage level by parameter. This kind of input circuit requires that driver device can
provide the following signal:
S y s t e m s id e
S y s t e m s id e
nD R D Y
nD R D Y

M ode2
M ode1 ( c o n t a c t s ig n a l)
( v o lt a g e le v e l s ig n a l)

0V 0V

Fig. 3.2.3g

(4)Driver device alarm signal nDALM（input）is the same as nDRDY signal，refer to

the description of nDRDY signal.

(5)CNC system ready signal nMRDY1、nMRDY2（relay contact output）

This contact will short after CNC initialization normal. If driver device alarm or
emergency is examined by CNC, this contact will open.
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 8

(6)VP is a kind of driver device voltage type provided by CNC system（+5V or +24V）.
It is determined by the setting of the first, the second, or the third bit of SA3
setting switch.

3.2.4 Description of Cable Making

(1) Cable making of connecting KND－BD3H BD3M series stepper motor driver
DB15-male DB15-fenale
signal pin pin signal
nCP+ 1 1 +PL
nCP- 9 9 -PL
nDIR+ 2 2 +DIR
nDIR- 10 10 -DIR
nDALM 5 6 +READY
0V 14 14 -READY
2
Shielded weld at Wires used：RVVP 6X0.2mm
socket metal (twisted pair shielded wire)
Fig.3.2.4a
(2) Command Cable making of connecting JAPAN YASKAMA AC servo driver Σ－Ⅱ
XS52,XS50,XS53,XS51 SIG X/Y/Z/4
signal pin pin signal
nCP 1 7 PULSE
nCP- 9 8 *PULSE
nDIR 2 11 SIGN
nDIR- 10 12 *SIGN
nPC+ 3 19 PCO
nPC- 11 20 *PCO
0V 14 32 ALM-
nALM 5 31 ALM+
nMRDY1 7 40 SV-ON
nMRDY2 8
0V 15 2 SG
VP=+24V 12 47 +24V
FG 壳 50 FG

Wires used：RVVP 12x0.2mm2(twisted pair shielded wire)

Fig.3.2.4b
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 9

(3) Command Cable making of connecting JAPAN MINAS-A/A4 AC servo driver

XS52,XS50,XS53,XS51 CN1 X/Y/Z/4
signal pin pin signal
nCP+ 1 4 PULS2
nCP- 9 3 PULS1
nDIR+ 2 6 SIGN2
nDIR- 10 5 SIGN1
nPC+ 3 23 OZ+
nPC- 11 24 OZ-
nDRDY 4 35 SRDY+
nALM 5 37 ALM+
nMRDY1 7 29 SON
nMRDY2 8 34 SRDY-
0V 14 36 COM-
0V 15 33 INH
0V 15 41 COM-
0V 14 13 GND
VP=+24V 12 7 COM+
Shielded weld at socket metal
Fig.3.2.4d
(4) Cable making of connecting KND-SD100/200 servo AC servo driver
XS__:DB15-male CN1：S360
signal pin pin signal
XCP+ 1 32 PULS+
XCP- 9 33 PULS-
XDIR+ 2 34 SIGN+
XDIR- 10 35 SIGN-
XPC+ 3 5 OZ+
XPC- 11 6 OZ-
0V 14 27 ALM-
ALM 5 26 ALM+
XMRDY1 7 10 SON
XMRDY2 8
0V 15 25 SRDY-
DRDY 4 8 SRDY+
VP=+24V 13 18 COM+
Shielded weld at socket metal 36 FG
Wires used：RVVP 12x0.2mm2(twisted pair shielded wire)
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 10

3.3 RS232-C Standard Series Port

KND1000M Ⅰ series CNC system can communicate with PC computer via
RS232-C series port. Cable for communication is W132. Connection diagram is as
below.

XS58(DB9-male) COMx(DB9-female)
signal pin pin signal
DCD 1 9
RXD 2 3 TXD
TXD 3 2 RXD
DTR 4 4 DTR
0V 5 5 0V
DSR 6 6 DSR
RTS 7 1 DCD
CTS 8 7 RTS
9 8 CTS
shielded weld
at socket metal Wires used：RVVP 5X0.2mm2

Fig.3.3

3.4 Analogue Spindle Interface Connection （ connect to

transformer）
XS55:(DB9M) CNC control unit

1 transforer
6 DB9M
2 0V
7
3 0V XS55 W130 VOLTAGE
8 INPUT
4 0V
9
5 SVC

Fig.3.4
NOTE：This signal uses twisted pair shielded wire RVVP2X0.5mm2 as far as possible.
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 11

3.5 Connection of Additional Operator’s Panel

3.5.1 Signal List of Connector （XS56：DB15 pins male）

1 KEY
9 0V
2 ST
10 0V
3 @SP
11 +5V
4 *ESP2
12 +5V
5 HA
13 +5V
6 HB
14 0V
*OV8
7 0V
*OV2
15 +12V
*OV4
8 +12V
*OV1

Fig.3.5.1

3.5.2 Signal Description

(1) KEY：key switch signal（for program protect）, high voltage level is valid.
(2) ST： cycle start signal, its function is the same as CYCLE START on operator’s
panel. High voltage level is valid.
(3) @SP：feed hold signal, its function is the same as FEED HOLD on operator’s
panel. Low voltage level is valid.
(4) *ESP2：emergency signal, its function is the same as *ESP1 of DI socket. User
determines concrete application.
(5) HA，HB：manual pulse generator pulse signal.
(6) 0V，＋5V，＋12V: power signal provided by CNC system.

NOTE：
1 If additional operator’s panel don’t connect the following signals KEY，ST and @SP，
they can be shielded by diagnose parameter.
2 *ESP2 is mainly used to emergency switch on additional operator’s panel in order to
connect conveniently. If *ESP1 isn’t connected or series connected, it must be
shorted externally.
3 The common end of KEY，ST，@SP and *ESP2 signal is 0V.
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 12

3.5.3 Signal Connection Diagrammatic

KEY
Connector XS56
KEY
ST

ST

@SP
@SP

*ESP2
*ESP2

0V

+5V +5V

0V 0V

HA HA

HB HB

COM（0V）
0
10
20 Override
30
40 switch
50 connector
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150

*OV8

*OV4

*OV2

*OV1

Fig.3.5.3
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 13

3.6 optional operator ’s panel

3.6.1 connector signal list (XS61: DB15M)

1 KEY
×1
9 0V
H4
2 ST
×10
10 0V
3 @SP
×100
11 +5V
4 *ESP2
*ESP3
12 +5V
HX
5 HA
13 +5V
HY
6 HB
14 0V
*OV8
HZ
7 0V
15 +12V
+24V
8 +12V
+24V

Fig.3.6
3.6.2 signal description
（1） ×1/×10/×100 ：external handle override
（2） *ESP ：emergency signal, as *ESP2 signal of additional panel
（3） HA，HB ：pulse signal of handle
（4） HX/HY/HZ/H4 ：selected-axis input signal
（5） 0V/＋5V/＋24V ：power of CNC system
 ⅣCONNECTION－3（EXTERNAL CONNECTION） 3 － 14

3.7 connecting with spindle encoder（G93）

Signal on CNC side：DB15F
Socket on cable side：DB15M
The spindle encoder of KND initial equip is LF-102.4BM-C05D, 1024RPM, the work
voltage is +5V.

XS59：DB15M encoder
signal pin pin signal
*MPCS 3 *PCS
MPCS 4 PCS
*MPBS 5 *PBS
MPBS 6 PBS
*MPAS 7 *PAS
MPAS 8 PAS
+5V 12 +5V
+5V 13 +5V
0V 14 0V
0V 15 0V

shielded weld at socket Wires used：RVVP 10x0.2mm2(twisted pair shielded wire)

metal
Fig.3.7
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－1

4 MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE

4.1. DESCRIPTION OF INPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE
4.1.1. DC Input Signal A
DC input signal A is a signal from machine tool to CNC. They include push-key,
limitation switch, relay contact and approach switch which come from machine tool
side.
(1) Contact on machine tool according to the following conditions：
a. contact capacity ：more than DC30V、16MA
b. Leakage current in open circuit is less than 1MA（Vmax＝26V）
c. Contact voltage-drop in closed circuit is less than 2V（current 8.5MA,
including cable voltage-drop）.
(2) Signal circuit diagram is as Fig. 4.1.1.

MT side+24V power CNC side power

+24V 0V 0V

4.7 k

M.T side CNC side

Fig. 4.1.1

4.1.2. DC Input Signal B

DC input signal B is a signal from machine tool to CNC. It is used at high speed.
(1) Contact on machine tool according to the following conditions：
a. contact capacity ：more than DC30V、16MA
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－2

b. Leakage current in open circuit is less than 1MA（Vmax＝26V）

c. Contact voltage-drop in closed circuit is less than 2V（current 8.5MA,
including cable voltage-drop）.
(2) Signal circuit diagram is as Fig. 4.1.2a. or Fig. 4.1.2b.

MT side +24V power CNC side power

+24V 0V 0V

4.7k

M.T side CNC side

Fig. 4.1.2a
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－3

MT side +24V power CNC side power

+24V 0V 0V

4.7k

M.T side CNC side

Fig. 4.1.2b

4.2. DESCRIPTION OF OUTPUT SIGNAL INTERFACE

DC output signal is used to drive relay and indicator lamp on machine tool side.
The output circuit of this system is Darlington output.
4.2.1.Specifications of Darlington Output
(1) Output on: the maximum load current, including instantaneous current 200MA
or less
(2) Output on: saturation voltage(at 200MA), the maximum value is 1.6V, typical
value is 1V
(3) Output OFF: max. support voltage (including instantaneous voltage) is 24V＋
20％ or less
(4) Output OFF: leakage current is 100μA or less.
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－4

4.2.2.Output Drive Relay Circuit

CNC power MT side +24V power

0V 0V +24V

relay

CNC side Machine tool side

Fig. 4.2.2

NOTE:
When an inductive load such as a relay is connected with the machine tool, a spark
killer must be inserted as close to the load (within 20 cm) as possible. When a
capacitive load is connected with the machine tool, a current limiting resistor must be
connected in series. Loads must always be below the rated current and voltage
including instantaneous values.
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－5

4.2.3.Output Driver Indicator Lamp

CNC power MT side +24V power

0V 0V +24V

Protect resistor

CNC side MT side

Fig. 4.2.3

NOTE：
When transistor output lights the indicator lamp directly, shock current may be generate,
which may be damage transistor easily. Therefore, a protection circuit must be inserted
as shown above. Loads must always be below the rated current and voltage including
instantaneous values.
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－6

4.3 The table of input and output signal

4.3.1 The diagnose table of input signal

DGN.000 HGEA X16 *DECX X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

ADDR XS54:9 XS54:22 XS54:23 XS54:10 XS54:24 XS54:11 XS54:25 XS54:12
Macro UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
Jog +X -X
Mt limit *LMX *LPX
tool SOLAI
【Explanation】
HGEAR: The input signal of hand shift gear for the analog spindle. Refer to 4－8。
*DECX: The reference position return deceleration signal for X axis. Refer to 4－
7。
UI3-UI0: Macro input signal. Refer to 17－1.
+X/-X: Jog/step feed direction selection signal.
*LMX/*LPX: X direction overtravel signal. Refer to 4－8。
SOLAI: Loosen or tight tool switch signal. Refer to 10－1。

DGN.001 SKP X26 *DECY X24 HE X22 X21 X20

Pin NO. XS54:15 XS54:16 XS54:17 XS54:18 XS54:19 XS54:20 XS54:8 XS54:21

Macro UIB UIA UI9 UI8

Jog +Y -Y

Mt limit *LMY *LPY

【Explanation】
SKP: The input signal of G31skip.
*DECY: The reference position return deceleration signal for Y axis.
UIB-UI8: The Macro instruction inputs signal.
The × 100/× 10: Handel incremental feed signal. Refer to 4－10。
+Y/-Y: Jog/step feed direction selection signal.
*LMY/*LPY: Y direction overtravel signal. Refer to 4－8。
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－7

DGN.002 SPALM X32 *DECZ *ESP OV8 OV4 OV2 OV1

Pin NO. XS54:4 XS54:5 XS54:6 XS54:7 XS56:14 XS56:15 XS56:7 XS56:8

Jog +Z

Mt limit *LMZ
【Explain 】
SPALM: The alarm input signal of principal axis.
*DECZ: The reference position return deceleration signal for Z axis..
*ESP: Emergency stop signal.
OV8-OV1:Feedrate override signal and jog federate signal.
+Z: Jog/step feed direction selection signal.
*LMZ: Z direction overtravel signal.

DGN.003 X47 X46 X45 X44 *ESP2 @SP ST KEY

Pin NO. XS54:14 XS54:1 XS54:2 XS54:3 XS56:4 XS56:3 XS56:2 XS56:1

Return
*DEC4
decelerate

JOG -Z

SHIFT
HIGI LOWI
GEAR

Mt limit *LPZ

tool SLIN
【Explanation】
*DEC4: The reference position return deceleration signal for 4th axis.
*ESP2: The additional Emergency stop signal.
◎SP: The additional front-panel input to automatic operation stop signal.
ST: Automatic operation start signal.
KEY: The procedure protection switch inputs signal.
－Z: Jog/step feed direction selection signal.
HIGI/LOWI: Gear selection inputs signal.
SLIN: The tight tool arrives signal. Refer to 10－1。
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－8

Bit NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DGN.004 *ESP3 H4 HZ HY HX ×100 ×10 ×1
Pin NO. XS61:4 XS61:9 XS61:14 XS61:13 XS61:12 XS61:3 XS61:2 XS61:1

【Explaation】
*ESP3: The third Emergency stop signal.
H4/HZ/HY/HX: Manual handle feed axis selection/override signal. the signal is
valid only if the DGNOS No.198 EHPG =1.

× 100/× 10/× 1: external handle incremental input signal.

4.3.2 Output signal diagnosis table

bit：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DGN.048
ZD VOI M05 M32 M08 M10 M04 M03
Pin NO.
XS57:17 XS57:1 XS57:4 XS57:14 XS57:16 XS57:2 XS57:3 XS57:15

【Explanation】
ZD: The spindle brake output signal.
VOI: The alarm output sigal.
M05: The spindle stop output signal.
M32: The lubricant open.
M08: The liquid of cool off open.
M10: The code M10 outputs signal.
M04: The spindle turns reversely to output signal.
M03:The spindle turns to output signal.

bit：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DGN.049
FNL ENB SRDY M33 M09 M11 STL ALM
Pin NO.
XS57:21 XS57:5 XS57:8 XS57:18 XS57:20 XS57:6 XS57:7 XS57:19

【Explanation】
FNL: The machining finished.
ENB: the analog spindle output directions signal.
SRDY: Drive is ready.
STL: The system is automating.
ALM: The system alarm directions signal.
M33: The lubricant outputs signal.
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－9

M09: The liquid of cool off outputs signal.

M11:The code M11 pulse is pulse outputs signal.
DGN.050bit：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

S08 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01

Pin NO. XS57:25 XS57:9 XS57:12 XS57:22 XS57:24 XS57:10 XS57:11 XS57:23

Macro UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0

Gear HIG LOW

Tool SOLAO

【Explanation】
S08-S01: The spindle shifts gear.
UO7-UO0: The macro instruction outputs signal.
HIG: Gear select signal.
LOW: Gear select signal.
SOLAO: The loose tool outputs signal. Refer to 10－1。
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－10

4.3.3 Input/Output Signal Arrangement between Socket XS54 and XS57

Input signal arrangement at socket XS54 output signal arrangement at socket

X46 1
X47 14 1 VOI
X45 2 14 M32
SKP 15 2 M10
X44 3 15 M03
X26 16 3 M04
SPALM 4 16 M08
*DECY 17 4 M05
X32 5 17 ZD
X24 18 5 ENB
*DECZ 6 18 M33
HE 19 6 M11
*ESP1 7 19 ALM
X22 20 7 STL
X21 8 20 M09
X20 21 8 SRDY
HGEAR 9 21 FNL
X16 22 9 S07
X14 10 22 S05
*DECX 23 10 S03
X12 11 23 S01
X13 24 11 S02
X10 12 24 S04
X11 25 12 S06
13 25 S08
13
XS57
NOTE:
1. The X** and Y** in the table is define by the relevant parameter.
2. 4th system, X35 for the fourth axis machine is the deceleration signals return to zero
(*DEC4).
Input signal align in the XS56 Input signal align in the XS61

1 KEY
KEY 1 KEY
×1
9 0V 9 0V
H4
2 ST 2 ST
×10
10 0V 10 0V
3 @SP 3 @SP
×100
11 +5V 11 +5V
4 *ESP2 4 *ESP2
*ESP3
12 +5V 12 +5V
HX
5 HA 5 HA
13 +5V 13 +5V
HY
6 HB 6 HB
14 0V
*OV8 14 0V
HZ
7 0V
*OV2 7 0V
15 +12V
*OV4 15 +12V
+24V
8 +12V
*OV1 8 +12V
+24V
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－11

4.4 Description of Input and Output Signal

The KND-1000M system have 40 input signals, 24 output signals totally, each input/output
signal may have many function, but system generally define a function only. The method to
use such as:
4.4.1 Input Signal
(1) *DECX、*DECY、*DECZ and *DEC4 deceleration switch signal
These signals are used to return reference point, and they are normal-closed contact.
The procedure of reference point return is as follows.
The movable member of a machine tool moves at a rapid traverse by selecting manual
mode, pressing the zero return key and by pressing a jog feed button to move the
movable member in the direction of the reference point. By pressing the deceleration
limit switch for one of the reference return deceleration signals (*DECX、*DECY、*DECZ
and *DEC4), the feedrate decelerates and after completion of deceleration the movable
member continues moving at a constant low feedrate. When the deceleration limit
switch is switched back to its original position and the CNC system will check one
revolution signal or magne-switch signal (PC signal) of pulse coder. If the signal is from
high voltage level to low voltage level (checking the descent trim of PC signal), feeding
stops and the NC lights zero return indicator lamp of corresponding axis on operator’s
panel. The operation of reference point return completes. Jog feed will continuously be
invalid before releasing zero return button.
The return direction can be set for each axis independently. If the reference point return
is performed from the reverse direction, once the movable member passes over the
reference point, it moves in the reverse direction and returns to the reference point.
The connection diagram is as follows.
MT side +24V power
CNC power
0V +24V
0V

*DECX
*DECY

*DECZ
*DEC4

Control unit

Fig. 4.4.1a
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－12

(2) HGEAR signal

This is a analogue spindle high gear and low gear shift signal.
Low voltage“0”is low-speed gear，
High voltage“1”is high-speed gear.

(3) SKP signal

Skip signal of G31 measure.

(4)The UI0 ～ UI3, UI8 ～ UIB signal

This signal has no special definition, can be define by the customer. These
value is equal to macro variable（＃1000～＃1003、＃1008～＃1011）.
(5)*LMX/*LPX/*LMY/*LPY/*LMZ/*LPZ: The hard limit inputs signal
Circuit as follows:

+24V
CNC Limit switch
-Z
*LMZ
+Z
*LPZ
-Y
*LMY
+Y
*LPY
-X
*LMX
+X
*LPX
This is the over-travel alarm signal. When machine tool is over-travel, the
CNC displays over-travel alarm. The machine tool stops moving after
decelerated motion. Now move to reverse direction, machine tool can quit
over-travel zone. The position is correct, machine tool can continue to
machining.
When set MOT = 0 of DGN.200, the hard limit is invalid. But soft limit is valid.

(6)SPALM signal
The spindle alarm signal, the high level"1" is alarming.

(7)*The ESP1 is the Emergency stop signal

This is a normal-closed contact signal. The control unit resets and machine
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－13

tool comes to a halt when the contact of *ESP opens. This signal is
generally commanded by B contact of button switch. System ready signal
(MRDY) will break and lock motion command output after emergency
occurs.
This system is provided with software limitation function and
overtravel check function, This system has the soft limit function and the hard
limit function, using to over-travel protection. If the X47/X32/X24/X26/X14/X16
be defined to other function，*ESP1 signal can be used for hard limit。
Circuit show as follows:
+X -X +Y -Y +Z -Z
R
e
l
a
y
p
EMG
o
w
e
r Release stop
relay

Spark kill

+24V

EMG1
*ESP1

Control

EMG2 Driver
D
r
i
v
e
r
P
o
w
e
r

Figure 4.4.1 b

(8)*OV1, *OV2, *OV4, *OV8

They are override switch signal on additional operator’s panel.

(9)+X/-X/+Y/-Y/+Z/-Z external JOG axis select signal

 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－14

The manual moves axis on “JOG” mode. When EJOG = 1 of DGN.199, they
are valid.
(10)The HX/HY/HZ/H4/× 1/× 10/× 100: external handle input signal
HX=1 :Choose X axis.
HY=1 :Choose Y axis.
HZ=1 :Choose Z axis.
H 4=1 :Choose 4th axis.
× 100=1 :The handle increment 0.1mm.
× 10=1 :The handle increment 0.01mm.
× 1=1 :The handle increment 0.001mm.
Note:
When the EHPG=1 of DGN.199, they are valid.
(11)HIGI/LOWI: They are auto shift gear signals for analog spindle.
(12)*ESP2
The emergency stop signal come from additional operation front-panel, that
signal is the second emergency stop signal. It can be shielded by
parameter.
(13)@SP: feed keep signal
It come from the additional operation front-panel, and can be shielded by
parameter.
(14)ST: Start signal
It come from additional operation front-panel, and that signal and CNC
operate front-panel has the same function to “start” key , and can be
shielded by parameter。
(15)KEY: The procedure protection switch signal
It come from an additional operation panel, and can be shielded by
parameter.

4.4.2 Output signal

The out signal of this system is provided by DARLINTON(low level is valid). The
public port of all out signals is +24V.
(1) M03，M04，M05 spindle control signal
M03: spindle rotate in clockwise，
M04: spindle rotate in clockwise，
M05: spindle stop

(2) M08，M09 coolant control

M08: coolant open，M09: coolant close
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－15

(3) M10，M11 M code output signal.

M10: open
M11: close

(4) M32，M33 lubricant control

M32: lubricant open，
M33: lubricant close.

(5) S1～S8 spindle speed signal

S1～S8 express 8-level spindle speed, only one is valid simultane

(6) UO0～UO7 signal

These signal can be defined by user, and they can be set “0” or “1” by
macro variables (#1100 to #1107, #1132).

(7) Machine completion indicator signal FNL

FNL=1: M30 instruction is executed
FNL=0: press CYCLE START button or the key RESET.

(8) Analogue spindle output indicator signal ENB

When analogue spindle function is selected,
ENB=0: analogue voltage is 0V. ENB=1: analogue voltage isn’t 0V.

(9) The “Drive is ready” signal: SRDY

When the system received ready signal from drive, the CNC output that
signal.

(10) The system circulates the designation signal STL automatically

When the system auto run, output that signal.
(11)The system alarm signal: ALM
When the system have a alarm, output that signal.
(12)Spindle brake signal ZD
Time charts is as below：
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－16

C W /C C W

STO P
T1

Interlock

Spindle stop T2
T3
Spindle brake

Fig. 4.4.2a
T1：Specified spindle stop instruction (auto or manual) when it is rotating,
axis interlock signal is effective at first. Spindle stop signal is
transmitted after delay time T1. Parameter T1 is set in diagnose No.214,
general setting value is about 200ms.
T2：Delay time from spindle stop signal to spindle brake signal. Set by
diagnose No.215 and No.216.
T3 ： spindle brake time ， set by diagnose No.217 and No.218. setting
range0.5～5s.

(13)External buzzer signal VOI

Alarm occurs：

1S

1S

Fig. 4.4.2b

(14)Shift analog spindle gear output signal: HIG/LOW

Use to shift analog spindle gear.

4.4.3 Description of M code Voltage Level / Pulse Output

M code is voltage level output in default mode. When parameter MPLS is set to
“1”, M code is pulse output. Pulse width is set by diagnose No.208.
(1) Manual push-key on operator’s panel is lock button. They changes as OFF→
ON→OFF…. System will transmit M33, M11, M09 and M05 pulse signal when
 Ⅳ CONNECTION－4（MACHINE TOOL INTERFACE） 4－17

it switches ON to OFF. System will transmit M32, M10, M08, M03 and M04
pulse signal when it switches OFF to ON.
(2) When M33, M11, M09 and M05 are executed in program, if NC is in OFF
mode (memorized automatically by system), system will not transmit M33,
M11, M09 and M05 pulse signal. Under the same condition, when M32, M10,
M08, M03 and M04 are specified, if NC is in ON mode, M32, M10, M08, M03
and M04 pulse signal will not output.
(3) Pressing the emergency button，system will transmit M33, M11, M09 and M05
signal regardless of in any mode.
(4) Pressing the RESET key, if parameter RSJG is set to 1, system will transmit
M33，M11，M09 and M05 signal regardless of in any mode.
When these switches are installed on machine tool side, if executing start-up and
turn-off on machine tool side, the state between machine tool side and NC side
should keep the same after operation completion. Otherwise twice operation is
necessary. For example, if coolant is ON on NC side, but it is OFF on MT side,
transmitting OFF on NC side or pressing RESET
in order to restart.
Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 0

Ⅴ APPENDIXES
Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 1

APPENDIX 1 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATON

FUNCTION
1. FUNCTION
Pitch error can be compensated by the least command increment for each axis.
This function becomes effective after reference point return.

2. SPECIFICATION
The tool position after reference position return is called compensation zero point.
The compensation amount must be set to the parameter corresponding to the
each compensation point.
(A) Compensating axis: X, Y, Z and additional axis
(B) Number of compensation points
Linear axis: 128 points (X,Y,Z)
(C) Compensation amount
0 to ±7× (Compensation magnification) (Least command increment)
Compensation magnification ×1, ×2, ×4, ×8, ×16 (common to all axes)
(D) Compensation interval

Movement unit Min. setting interval Max. setting interval Unit

Metric system 8000 9999999 0.001mm
Inch system 4000 9999999 0.0001inch
(Max. compensation range= Setting interval×128)

Set the proper compensation interval according to the relation between max.
compensation range within the above range and the machine stroke. If the value
less than min. setting value of interval is set in pitch error compensation for linear
axis, the compensation sometimes cannot be performed correctly. In the above
case, lower the feedrate.

3. PARAMETER
Parameter corresponding to pitch error compensation should be set in MDI mode
or in emergency stop status. The parameter contents and parameter number are
as follows.

3-1 Pitch error compensation magnification

0 1 3 × × × × × PML3 PML2 PML1

Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 2

The value, with this magnification multiplied to the set compensation value, is
outputted.
(common to all axes)

PML2 PML1 Magnification

0 0 ×1
0 1 ×2
1 0 ×4
1 1 ×8
PML3=1，the above value×16
Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 3

3-2 Pitch error zero point

1 0 0 PECZRX

3 0 0 PECZRY

5 0 0 PECZRZ

PECZRX, Y, Z pitch error zero point：

Pitch error zero point is the zero point for pitch error compensation. It
corresponds to the reference position in the machine coordinate system. Set
the value from 0 to 127 for each axis according to the machine tool.

3-3 Pitch error compensation interval

0 7 9 PECINTX

0 8 0 PECINTY

0 8 1 PECINTZ

PECINTX, Y, Z: Pitch error compensation interval

This is pitch error compensation interval setting. Set the positive amount 8000 or
more in metric system, or 4000 or more in inch system. When zero is set to these
parameter, compensation is not performed.

3-4 Compensation amount

Compensation amount of each axis and point is set to a corresponding parameter
number.

Axis name Parameter number

X-axis 101 ～ 228
Y-axis 301 ～ 428
Z-axis 501 ～ 628

For the other parameter number shown above, the compensation amount can’t be
set. Setting amount is 0 to ±7 and the other values are neglected.
Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 4

EXAMPLE:

2 2 0 -7

In the above example, this indicates that the compensation data –7 is set to the
setting point 120 of X-axis.
Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 5

4. EXAMPLE
(1) Pitch error zero point=0, Compensation interval=10.000

0 1 2 3 127
Setting point
(0) (+7) (-6) (+4) (+2)
Machine coordinate system
0 +10.000 +20.000 +30.000 +1270.000
(reference point)

The beginning of the compensation table corresponds to the reference point. The
set point 1 is at +10000 position and the other setting points correspond to the
positions on the machine coordinate system which is shifted +10000 each other.
Therefore, setting point 127 is at +1270000. Compensation amount when the
machine moves from 0 to +10000 is set to the setting point 1 and that when the
machine moves from +10000 to +20000 is set to the setting point 2. Generally,
compensation amount when the machine moves from (N-1) × (compensation
interval) to N×(compensation interval) is set to the setting point N.
In the above example, compensation data is

-7 between 0 and 10000

+6 between 10000 and 20000
-4 between 20000 and 30000
If the machine moves from the reference point to +30000, total compensation
amount is as follows.
(+7)+(-6)+(+4)=+5

(2) Pitch error zero point =60, compensation interval=10000

0 58 59 60 61 127
setting point
(+0) (-7) (-7) (+6) (+4) (+1)
Machine coordinate system

-60.000 -20.000 -10.000 0 +10.000 +670.000

（reference point）

The setting point 60 corresponds to the reference point. The setting point 61 is at
Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 6

+10000 position and the other setting points correspond to the position which is
shifted +10000 each other. So setting point 127 is at +670000. And, the setting
point 59 is at –10000 from the reference point and the other setting points
correspond to the positions which is shifted –10000 each other, that is the setting
point is at –60000. Compensation amount when the machine moves from (N-61)×
(compensation interval) to (N-60) × (compensation interval) is set to the setting
point N.

In the above example, compensation data is as follows.

+7 between -30000 and -20000
+7 between -20000 and -10000
-6 between -10000 and 0
-4 between 0 and 10000
If the machine moves from -30000 to +10000, total compensation amount is as
follows.
(-7)+(-7)+(+6)+(+4)=(-4)

(3) pitch error zero point=127, compensation interval=10000

0 124 125 126 127

Setting point
(+0) (+3) (-7) (0) (+2)
Machine coordinate system
-1270.000 -30.000 -20.000 -10.000 0
(reference point)

The end of the compensation table corresponds to the reference point and the
setting point 126 is at –10000 from the reference point and the other setting points
correspond to the position which is shifted –10000 each other. Compensation
amount when the machine moves from –10000 to 0 is set to the setting point 127
and that when the machine moves from –20000 to –10000 is set to the setting
point 126. Generally, compensation amount when the machine moves from (N-128)
×(compensation interval) to (N-127) ×(compensation interval) is set to the setting
point N.

In the above example, compensation data is as follows.

Ⅴ APPENDIX－1（PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION） 1 - 7

-7 between -40000 and -30000

+7 between -30000 and -20000
0 between -20000 and -10000
-2 between -10000 and 0
If the machine moves from -40000 to the reference point, total compensation
amount is as follows.
(+3)+(-7)+(0)+(+2)=(-2)

5. Setting Procedure for Compensation Data

The compensation amount described above do not directly concern the
relationship between the reference point and the compensation zero point, moving
direction of the machine and compensation interval, but mechanical error.
between {N-[(compensation zero point)+1]} X (compensation interval)
and [N-(compensation zero point)] X (compensation interval) for setting point N.

★ Compensation amount input

compensation data can be set by the same procedure of parameter setting on
MDI&LCD.

★ Punch out of compensation amount

They are punched out by the same procedure of parameter punch out.

★ Precautions in setting
1) Compensation interval (parameter number 100, 300, 500)
If the compensation interval is positive value, compensation is performed by
the set value. If it is negative value, compensation is performed by the
absolute value of it. And if it is zero, the compensation for the axis is not
performed. (Even if it is negative value, it is displayed as positive value.)

2) The pitch error compensation becomes effective after reference point return.
If reference point return is not performed, it is not effective after parameter
setting. The parameter setting should be performed after turning power on
and before reference point return. If the parameter for pitch error
compensation is altered after reference point return, perform reference point
return, perform reference point return again.
3) Pitch error compensation amount (parameter number 101～628)
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－2（G FUNCTION TABLE） 2-1

APPENDIX2 G FUNCTION TABLE

G code Group Function

G00 Positioning(rapid traverse)
*G01 Linear interpolation (feed)
01
G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
00
G10 Offset value setting
*G17 XY plane selection
G18 02 ZX plane selection
G19 YZ plane selection
G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G27 Reference point return check
G28 Reference point return
G29 00 Return from reference point
G31 Skip function
G39 Corner offset circular interpolation
*G40 Cutter compensation cancel
G41 07 Cutter compensation left
G42 Cutter compensation right
G43 Tool length offset positive direction
G44 08 Tool length offset negative direction
*G49 Tool length offset cancel
*G54 Work coordinate system 1
G55 Work coordinate system 2
G56 Work coordinate system 3
05
G57 Work coordinate system 4
G58 Work coordinate system 5
G59 Work coordinate system 6
G65 00 Custom macro instruction
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－2（G FUNCTION TABLE） 2-2

G code Group Function

G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring
*G80 Canned cycle cancel
G81 Drilling cycle(spot boring)
G82 Drilling cycle (counter boring)
G83 09 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G93 01 Tapping cycle
*G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 Incremental programming
G92 00 Coordinate system setting
G98 Return initial point in canned cycle
10
G99 Return R point in canned cycle

NOTE:
1 The G code marked with *are initial G codes in each group. That is, when the power
is turned on or when the reset button is pressed when the system parameter
specifying initialization of G codes at reset is effective, those G codes are set. For
G20 and G21, the one in effect before cutting power or pressing the reset button is
selected. For G00 and G01, is selected for the initial G code by setting parameter.
2 The G codes in group 00 are one-shot. They are effective only in the block in which
they are specified.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－3（COMMAND VALUE RANGE TABLE） 3-1

APPENDIX3: TABLE OF RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Input in mm Input in inch Input in mm Input in inch

Output in mm Output in mm Output in inch Output in inch

Least input 0.001mm 0.0001inch 0.001mm 0.0001inch

increment
Maximum ±9999.999mm ±9999.999mm ±999.9999inch ±999.9999inch
stroke
Max. ±9999.999mm ±999.9999inch ±9999.999mm ±999.9999inch
programmable
dimension
Feed per
minute (at 1～ 0.01～
0.01～600.00inch/min 1～15000mm/min
cutting feedrate 15000mm/min 600.00inch/min
override 100%)
Rapid traverse
30～ 3.0～
rate (separate 30～24000mm/min 3.0～600.0inch/min
24000mm/min 600.0inch/min
for each axis)
Upper limit of
6～ 0.6～
value of cutting 6～15000mm/min 0.6～600.0inch/min
15000mm/min 600.0inch/min
federate
Manual 0～1260mm/min 0～49.6inch/min 0～1260mm/min 0～49.6inch/min
federate
Tool offset 0～± 0～±99.9999inch 0～±999.999mm 0～±99.9999inch
amount 999.999mm
Min. value in
incremental 0.001mm 0.0001inch 0.001mm 0.0001inch
feed
Backlash
compensation 0～25mm 0～25mm 0～2.5inch 0～2.55inch
value
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－3（COMMAND VALUE RANGE TABLE） 3-2

Pitch error
compensation
value 0～±0.007mm 0～±0.007mm 0～±0.0007inch 0～±0.0007inch
（override is
1）
Area of stored
stroke
±9999.999mm ±9999.999mm ±999.9999inch ±999.9999inch
limit(value from
reference point)
Dwell 0～9999.999s 0～9999.999s 0～9999.999s 0～9999.999s
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－4（BINARY-DECIMAL CONVERSION） 4-1

APPENDIX4 BINARY-DECIMAL CONVERSION

Dec- Bin- Dec- Bin- Dec- Bin- Dec- Bin-
0 00000000 32 00100000 64 01000000 96 01100000
1 00000001 33 00100001 65 01000001 97 01100001
2 00000010 34 00100010 66 01000010 98 01100010
3 00000011 35 00100011 67 01000011 99 01100011
4 00000100 36 00100100 68 01000100 100 01100100
5 00000101 37 00100101 69 01000101 101 01100101
6 00000110 38 00100110 70 01000110 102 01100110
7 00000111 39 00100111 71 01000111 103 01100111
8 00001000 40 00101000 72 01001000 104 01101000
9 00001001 41 00101001 73 01001001 105 01101001
10 00001010 42 00101010 74 01001010 106 01101010
11 00001011 43 00101011 75 01001011 107 01101011
12 00001100 44 00101100 76 01001100 108 01101100
13 00001101 45 00101101 77 01001101 109 01101101
14 00001110 46 00101110 78 01001110 110 01101110
15 00001111 47 00101111 79 01001111 111 01101111
16 00010000 48 00110000 80 01010000 112 01110000
17 00010001 49 00110001 81 01010001 113 01110001
18 00010010 50 00110010 82 01010010 114 01110010
19 00010011 51 00110011 83 01010011 115 01110011
20 00010100 52 00110100 84 01010100 116 01110100
21 00010101 53 00110101 85 01010101 117 01110101
22 00010110 54 00110110 86 01010110 118 01110110
23 00010111 55 00110111 87 01010111 119 01110111
24 00011000 56 00111000 88 01011000 120 01111000
25 00011001 57 00111001 89 01011001 121 01111001
26 00011010 58 00111010 90 01011010 122 01111010
27 00011011 59 00111011 91 01011011 123 01111011
28 00011100 60 00111100 92 01011100 124 01111100
29 00011101 61 00111101 93 01011101 125 01111101
30 00011110 62 00111110 94 01011110 126 01111110
31 00011111 63 00111111 95 01011111 127 01111111
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－4（BINARY-DECIMAL CONVERSION） 4-2

Dec- Bin- Dec- Bin- Dec- Bin- Dec- Bin-

128 10000000 160 10100000 192 11000000 224 11100000
129 10000001 161 10100001 193 11000001 225 11100001
130 10000010 162 10100010 194 11000010 226 11100010
131 10000011 163 10100011 195 11000011 227 11100011
132 10000100 164 10100100 196 11000100 228 11100100
133 10000101 165 10100101 197 11000101 229 11100101
134 10000110 166 10100110 198 11000110 230 11100110
135 10000111 167 10100111 199 11000111 231 11100111
136 10001000 168 10101000 200 11001000 232 11101000
137 10001001 169 10101001 201 11001001 233 11101001
138 10001010 170 10101010 202 11001010 234 11101010
139 10001011 171 10101011 203 11001011 235 11101011
140 10001100 172 10101100 204 11001100 236 11101100
141 10001101 173 10101101 205 11001101 237 11101101
142 10001110 174 10101110 206 11001110 238 11101110
143 10001111 175 10101111 207 11001111 239 11101111
144 10010000 176 10110000 208 11010000 240 11110000
145 10010001 177 10110001 209 11010001 241 11110001
146 10010010 178 10110010 210 11010010 242 11110010
147 10010011 179 10110011 211 11010011 243 11110011
148 10010100 180 10110100 212 11010100 244 11110100
149 10010101 181 10110101 213 11010101 245 11110101
150 10010110 182 10110110 214 11010110 246 11110110
151 10010111 183 10110111 215 11010111 247 11110111
152 10011000 184 10111000 216 11011000 248 11111000
153 10011001 185 10111001 217 11011001 249 11111001
154 10011010 186 10111010 218 11011010 250 11111010
155 10011011 187 10111011 219 11011011 251 11111011
156 10011100 188 10111100 220 11011100 252 11111100
157 10011101 189 10111101 221 11011101 253 11111101
158 10011110 190 10111110 222 11011110 254 11111110
159 10011111 192 10111111 223 11011111 255 11111111
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－5（ALARM LIST） 5-1

APPENDIX5: ALARM LIST

(1) Operation alarm(P/S Alarm)

Number Content Remarks

000 New Parameter needed poweroff
003 Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was
input
004 A numeral, the sign (-) or a decimal point was input without an
address at the beginning of a block.
005 The address was not followed by appropriate data but was
followed by another address or EOB code.
006 Sign"-" input error.
007 Decimal point “. “input error. Or no decimal point input.
009 An invalid character was input in the significant information zone
010 An invalid G code was specified.
011 The federate was not specified for cutting feed or the federate
was inadequate,
015 The number of the commanded axes exceeded that of
simultaneously controlled axes.
021 The axis not included in the selected plane(by using
G17,G18,G19) was commanded in circular command.
029 An offset value is too large
030 The tool offset number was too large .
031 In an offset value input command (by G10), the numerical value
under the address P specifying an offset number was too large
or P was missing.
032 In an offset value input command (by G10), the specified offset
value was too large.
035 G39 was specified in cutter compensation cancel mode or on the
compensation.
037 G40 was specified outside the compensation plane in tool
compensation.
044 G27/G28/G29 was commanded in canned cycle mode.
059 The selected workpiece number program can’t be found.
(External workpiece number selected function)
060 The specified sequence number was not found in the sequence
number search.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－5（ALARM LIST） 5-2

Number Content Remarks

070 The memory area is insufficient.
The address searched for was not found. Or the specified
071
program was not found.
072 The number of program exceeds.
073 The program number has already used.
074 The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
076 Address P was not specified in a block which including M98.
077 The subprogram was called more times.
078 The program number or the sequence number which was
specified by address P in a block which includes M98 was not
found.
079 Stored program and disk contents do not coincide.
080 Skip signal is not ON in the specified area.
081 T code is not commanded.
082 T code and skip command is the same block.
083 Axis error or incremental command in the skip block.
085 I/O format error
086 I/O ready signal is open
087 I/O input not end
090 No zero saved when program zero return
092 G27 the actual position is not the machine tool zero
100 Parameter switch is on
101 Press the DEL key, the data of the memory will be lose
111 Macro calculate value is too large
112 divisor is zero
114 H code is not defined in macro command
115 Macro variable is out of range
116 Macro value is out of range
119 The variable of the SQRT and BCD function is negative
125 The address in G65 block is out of range
128 Sequence number is error or not searched in goto command
129 Not end command in the last block
130 Macro switch is off, the macro variable is not valid
131 Macro variable address can not be used in program
132 Two decimal points in the same word
133 M30 is used in subprogram
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－5（ALARM LIST） 5-3

Number Contents Remarks

134 M99 can not be specified in main program
135 Erase the flash disk failure
136 The memory capacity is not enough
137 Write to flash disk is not allowed
138 The flash label writing is not allowed
139 The program stack is disorder
140 Program number is exit. The operation will be executed if
deleting the number.
142 The specified word is not found
143 The specified address is not found upside scanning
144 The specified address is not found down scanning
145 Format error , all program can input using 0-9999
146 Program from serial port failure
147 Macro error : goto the current position is error
Macro error:
148
The specified sequence number is not found
149 Recover the program failure, the memory will be lost when power
on.
150 No program can be executed
151 Data format error
152 Parameter is invalid while the serial port
The number 0 and 1 is in the bit parameter while serial port
153
inputting
Data format error:
154
Negative is in the non-zero data
155 Negative is in the bit parameter while serial port inputting
The tool compensation number is not exit while serial port
156
inputting
157 Undefined error
158 Company name check failure while serial port inputting
159 CNC type check failure while serial port inputting
160 System version number check failure while serial port inputting
161 Data type check failure while serial port inputting
162 Format error: many decimal points
163 Format error: the place of decimal points error
164 Format error: decimal point is in bit data
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－5（ALARM LIST） 5-4

165 Format error: the number after decimal point is too long
166 Program switch is off
167 Insert address o firstly as the memory is empty
168 Parameter No.69 is illegal, baudrate 9600 will be used
169 Parameter No.69 is illegal, initial data 722 will be used
170 Serial switch parameter is off
171 Divider is zero
172 Program is full
173 The check program is not in the memory

(2) Soft limit alarm

Number Contents Remarks

1 Exceeding +X soft limit Alarm reset
2 Exceeding -X soft limit through
3 Exceeding +Y soft limit JOG
4 Exceeding -Y soft limit
5 Exceeding +Z soft limit
6 Exceeding –Z soft limit
7 Exceeding +4th soft limit
8 Exceeding –4th soft limit

(3)Driver device alarm

Number Contents Remarks

*1 Driver device not ready alarm *=1/2/3/4,X/Y/Z/4
*2 Driver device alarm
*3 The feedrate is too large

(4) CNC alarm

When system alarm occurs, display‘'MEMORY ALARM : NO. ’which followed
by alarm number

Number Contents Remarks

01 RAM error 1、 the +5 voltage checking
02 CMOS error 2、 check connection of cable
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－5（ALARM LIST） 5-5

03 ROM parity 3、 system grounding checking

06 WATCH DOG alarm 4、 removing the external
07 CPU error (0,3,4,6 alarm) electromagnetic interfere
08 Illegal non-shield break
09 The voltage of FPGA is too low
10 Enlarged-board alarm
11 Battery alarm

(6) External message alarm

Number Contents Remarks

01 M code alarm. Illegal M code was specified in program.
02 S code alarm. Illegal S code was specified in program.
03 T code alarm. Illegal T code was specified in program.
04 The time for tool exchanging is not defined
06 The time of tool exchange is too long
07 M03,M04 was incorrectly specified. While Spindle rotating
CW(CCW), M04 (M03) was commanded without spindle
stop.
08 S code was commanded while spindle rotating.
09 The parameter of tool number is error
010 Safety gate is open while auto starting
011 The tool tight time is too long while tool exchanging
014 The pressure of chunk is too low
015 The spindle is turning when chunk is loose
016 Current version error
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－6（STATUE AT POWER ON, AT RESET） 6-1

APPENDIX6: STATUE AT POWER ON, AT RESET.

○: The status is not changed or the movement is continued
×: The status is canceled or the movement is interrupted.
Item Power on status Reset status
Offset amount ○ ○
Setting data Setting parameter ○ ○
Parameter ○ ○
Program in memory ○ ○
Sequence number display × ○
NC One-shot G code × ×
data Modal G code Initial G code ○
(G20/G21 remains)
F function × ○
S,T,M function × ○
Coordinate ○
Work coordinate value zero
system
Movement × ×
Dwell × ×
Sending M,S,T code × ×
Executing
Tool length compensation × ○ In MDI mode
movement
determined by parameter
“RS43” except MDImode
Cutter compensation × ○ in MDI
×In other than MDI
Call subprogram number × ×(Note)
Output signals Alarm LED(ALM) OFF(NO ALARM) OFF(NO ALARM)
Not ready ○ ×(In emergency stop)
Buffer memory OFF ○ in MDI
×In other than MDI

Reference point return × ○(×In emergency stop)

LED
S or T code × ○
LED status M code × ×
M S T optional signal × ×
Spindle anolog signal ○ ○
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－6（STATUE AT POWER ON, AT RESET） 6-2

CNC ready signal ON ○

LED status Servo ready signal ON(in other than ON(expect driver alarm)
driver alarm)
Cycle start LED × ×
Feed hold LED × ×
NOTE:
When pressing Reset during subprogram execution, program must come back to the
home of main-program. It can’t be executed in the middle of the subprogram.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-1

APPENDIX7 PARAMETERS
Parameters not mentioned in this table must be set by 0.
The parameters are for K1000M 3-axis system, those for K1000M4 please refer to
appendix 12.

0 0 4 OTFP RDRN DECI IOF RS43 DCS SCW

OTFP 1: The highest output pulse frequency is 512Kpps。

0: The highest output pulse frequency 32Kpps。
RDRN 1: Dry run is effective for rapid traverse command.
0: Dry run is not effective for rapid traverse command.
DECI 1: Deceleration signal “1” in reference point return indicates deceleration.
( reference point return B)
0: Deceleration signal “0” in reference point return indicates deceleration.
IOF 1: When using MDI, offset value is incremental value.
0: When using MDI, offset value is absolute value.
RS43 1: Offset vector in G43 and G44 modes are cleared by reset.
0: Offset vector in G43 and G44 modes remain effective after reset.
DCS 0
SCW 1: The least command increment is in inch system (Machine tool: inch
system).
0: The least command increment is in metric system(Machine tool: metric
system).

0 0 5 NFDO TJHD PMXY2 PMXY1 RSJG PPD PCMD

NFDO 1: Constant to be 1
TJHD 1：Handle is effective in Manual Teach Mode.
0：Handle is not effective in Manual Teach Mode.
PMXY2，PMXY1 ：Retracting direction in canned cycle G76 and G87.

PMXY2 PMXY1 Retracting direction

0 0 +X
0 1 -X
1 0 +Y
1 1 -Y
RSJG 0： When pressing RESET，the system automatically switch off M03, M04,
lubricant, coolant.
1 ： When pressing RESET ， M03, M04, lubricant, coolant can not be
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-2
affected.
PPD 1：The indication of the position display unit is preset by G92.
0：The indication of the position display unit is not preset by G92.
PCMD 1：Output wave is pulse.
0：Output wave is square wave.

0 0 6 PRGB TLCP GST OVRI ZMZ ZMY ZMX

PRGB ：Meaningless.
TLCP 1：Tool length compensation can be executed along the axis which
perpendicular
to the plane determined by G17，G18,G19(Tool length compensation
mode B)
0: Tool length compensation can be carried out along Z axis regardless of
the
plane determined by G17，G18,G19 (Tool length compensation mode
A).
GST，OVRT ≡ 0
ZMZ，ZMY，ZMX Reference point return direction of each axis and the initial
backlash
direction When turning on the power.
1: Reference point return and the backlash are performed in the negative
direction.
0: Reference point return and the backlash are performed in the positive
direction.
NOTE：
The backlash compensation is performed for the first time when motion along the axis
moves in the direction opposite to the direction set by this parameter after the power is
turned on.

0 0 7 G93N SMZ ZCZ ZCY ZCX

G93N 0：No acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping

1：With acceleration/deceleration for rigid tapping
SMZ 0：Speed control at the corner of block refer to “Feed Function” of Program
manual.
1：The next block can be executed after the speed of all motion command
decelerates to zero
ZCX～ZCZ
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-3
0：Deceleration switch and zero signal is essential in zero point returning.
1：Magne-switch method。（Effective in having zero point）

Rapid traverse Low speed at reference point return

Reference point
Approach switch
Set №006ZMZ-ZMX to1 if the machine zero point in the positive direction of
the axis(zero return from negative to positive).
Set №006ZMZ-ZMX to 0 if the machine zero point in the negative direction of
the axis(zero return from positive to negative).
Not only the approach switch must be connected with *DECn but also zero
signal. By this zero returning method, set zero signal to + 24V.

0 0 8 PSG2 PSG1 NTHD DIRZ DIRY DIRX

PSG2, 1 Gear ratio of spindle synchronous encoder is 1~8

NTHD 0：Control of spindle speed without thread cutting.
1：Control of spindle speed with thread cutting.

DIRZ～X：Select the motor rotation direction for each axis. Change the motor
rotation direction by this parameter.

0 0 9 MPLS VRYZ VRYY VRYX DALZ DALY DALX

MPLS 0：M code output voltage.

1：M code output pulse.
VRYZ~X：Select the voltage level of driver device not ready alarm for each axis.
DALZ~X：Select the voltage level of driver device alarm for each axis.

0 1 0 EILK .1. .1. .1. CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1

EILK Must be set by zero

.1. ： Always set by 1,otherwise, reference point return can’t execute correctly.
CPF4 ， 3 ， 2 ， 1 Pulse frequency of backlash compensation and pitch error
compensation (common for all axis).
compensation frequency = （setting value +1）Kpps Setting amount =
0 ～15.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-4

0 1 1 BDEC BD8 RVDL ZDIL KSGN ZRNL CM98 JSPD

BDEC 0：Set the fixed frequency (Setting by CPF4,3,2,1and BD8) in backlash

compensation A mode.
1：Set the frequency by acceleration/deceleration method(CPF4,3,2,1 and
BD8 is ineffective)
BD8 0：Backlash compensation is executed by the frequency set by NO.10
1：Backlash compensation is executed by the 1/8 frequency set by NO.10
RVDL 0：Direction and pulse signals are output at same time when the axis
direction is changed.
1： Direction signal exceeds pulse for a time when the axis direction is
changed.
ZDIL 0：Axis interlock dwells when spindle brake signal output.
1：Axis interlock doesn’t dwell when spindle brake signal output.
KSGN 0：Direction signal doesn’t keep on when the axis moves in the negative
direction.
1：Direction signal keeps on when the axis moves in the negative direction.
ZRNL 0：During the reference point return, the axis moving key can’t keep on.
1：During the reference point return, the axis moving key can keep on.
After returning the point, stop movement. In this course, we can stop
the movement by pressing “Reference return ”or “RESET”.
CM98 0：Meaningless.
JSPD 0：Spindle jog is only effective in manual mode.
1：Spindle jog is effective in any mode.
NOTE：
Change the value of CP4,3,2,1,BD8,the system must be turned off.

0 1 2 APRS TMANL SMANL M30 EDTB OFFVY EBCL ISOT

APRS 1：Setting the coordinate system automatically, after the reference point
return is performed.
0：Not setting the coordinate system
TMANL1：T code, tool change in manual mode.
0：T code, tool change automatically.
SMANL1：S code, spindle gear change in manual.
0：S code, spindle gear change automatically.
M30 1：The cursor comes back to the head of program, when M30 is
performed(B type).
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-5
0：The cursor comes back to the head of program after starting program
again, when M30 is performed (A type)。
EDTB 1：Edit insert function A.
0：Edit insert function B.
OFFVY1：Driver device alarm is not generated, even if DRDY is on before MRDY
is output.
0：Driver device alarm is generated, when DRDY is on before MRDY is
output.
EBCL ：Meaningless.
ISOT 1：When power on or emergency, the manual rapid traverse becomes
effective until the reference point return is performed.
0：When power on or emergency, the manual rapid traverse does not
become effective until the reference point return is performed.

0 1 3 G01 SBKM DNCB EDALM PODI PML3 PML2 PML1

G01 1：G01 is selected, when the power is turned on.

0：G00 is selected, when the power is turned on.
SBKM 1：Single block is effective when Marco command is executed.
0：Single block is ineffective when Marco command is executed.
DNCB 1： With program pre-saving when DNC starts.
0：Without program pre-saving when DNC starts.
EDALM1：When P/S alarm, programming or storage can be executed.
PODI 1：Decimal can be ignored in program.
For example：X100 is recognized as X100.(100mm).Notice，100μmust be edited
as X0.1 not X100.
PML3 ， 2,1 Pitch error compensation magnification. The value ,with this
magnification multiplied to the set compensation value, is outputted.

PML2 PML1 Magnification

0 0 ×1
0 1 ×2
1 0 ×4
1 1 ×8
(common for all axis)
When PML3 is 1，the value multiplied 16.

0 1 4 POD G84S FXCO FXCS ZRSZ ZRSY ZRSX

POD 0：Decimal can be programmed randomly or not

 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-6
1：Decimal must be programmed, otherwise, generates alarm.
007：Decimal point “.” Input error (A decimal point was input after an
address with which it can’t be used ).

NOTE:
1 In the case of POD=1,decimal point must be programmed even if F100.=F100,
2 Because of decimal point can be used with address Q, Q must be programmed
with 1.or 001 when set macro DO to 1. Such as we can program as follows.
G65H01P#1132Q0.255(Set the low 8 bit of Marco variable #1132 to 1 )

G84S = 0
FXCO = 0
FXCS = 0
ZRSZ 1: Z axis has reference point （Reference point return B）
0: Z axis has no reference point（Reference point return A）
ZRSY 1: Y axis has reference point （Reference point return B）
0: Y axis has no reference point（Reference point return A）
ZRSX 1: X axis has reference point （Reference point return B）
0: X axis has no reference point（Reference point return A）

0 1 5 CMRX

0 1 6 CMRY

0 1 7 CMRZ

CMRX CMRY CMRZ ： Command multiply for each axis.

Setting range：1～127

0 1 8 CMDX

0 1 9 CMDY

0 2 0 CMDZ

CMDX,CMDY CMDZ ：Command pulse multiplying factor denominator for each

axis.
Setting range：1～127
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-7

0 2 1 Spindle exact stop/gear-shifting speed

Default 50.

0 2 2 CRCDL
CRCDL The tool neglects the limit of small movement under tool radius offset C way.
Set value: 0～16383 Unit: mm/min (output in mm).
0～16383 Unit: Inch/min (output in inch).

0 2 3 SCTTIM
SCTTIM To set the time interval from executing spindle command to expecting the
arrival of spindle speed.
Set value: 0～255 ms.

0 2 4 WLKTMZ

WLKTME: Width of input signal to remove dither. Set range: 1~15.

0: 0～16ms, 1: 16～32ms, 2: 32～48ms ……

Percentage of pre-saved programs in

0 2 7
buffer when DNC starts.
Default 50.

0 3 7 PLPGVL
PLPGVL: Interval for interrupting interpolation.
0-8 ms, 1-4ms, 2-2 ms, 3-1ms.

0 3 8 RPDFX

0 3 9 RPDFY

0 4 0 RPDFZ

RPDFX RPDFY RPDFZ Rapid traverse of each axis.

Setting amount: 30～15000 Unit: mm/min(MM output).
30～6000 Unit: 0.1inch/min(inch output).

0 4 1 LINTX
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-8

0 4 2 LINTY

0 4 3 LINTZ

LINTX LINTY LINTZ

Time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of each axis(for rapid traverse).
Setting amount: 8～4000(Unit :ms)

0 4 4 PSANGN

PSANGN Data adjustment for gain in spindle analog output（S analog output）.
Standard value：625
Setting method：
1 Setting standard value 625
2 Command Max. value of S analog signal（10V）
3 Measure the output voltage
4 Resetting PSANGN by the formula
PSANGN = 10.00×625÷testing voltage
5 Setting new value, verify the max output voltage is 10V or not.

0 4 5 FEDMX

FEDMX Upper speed of cutting speed

Setting amount： 0～15000 Unit ：mm/min(mm output)
6～6000 Unit ：0.1inch/min(inch output)

0 4 6 SPDLC

SPDLC ： Set spindle speed offset compensation value, that is, compensation
value of zero offset of spindle speed command voltage.
Setting amount：0～±8191 Unit: VELO。

0 4 7 FEEDT

FEEDT Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration in feed.

Setting amount：0 ～4000 Unit：ms
When set by zero, the function of exponential acceleration/deceleration is
ineffective
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7-9

0 4 8 FEDFL

FEDFL The lower limit speed on exponential acceleration/deceleration in

feed.
Setting amount：0 ～15000 Unit：mm/min (mm output)
0～6000 Unit：0.1inch/min(inch output)
This parameter is set to 0 in general.

0 4 9 CYCR

CYCR Setting of relief amount in canned cycle G73(High speed peck drilling
cycle)
Setting amount：0～32767 Unit： mm/min (mm output)
0～32767 Unit：0.1inch/min(inch output)

0 5 0 CYCD

CYCD Setting of the cutting start point in canned cycle G83(peck drilling
cycle)
Setting amount：0～32767 Unit： mm/min (mm output)
0～32767 Unit：0.1inch/min(inch output)

0 5 1 RPDFL

RPDFL The least speed of rapid traverse override (FO)(Common to all

axis),
Setting amount：6～15000 Unit：mm/min(mm output)
6～6000 Unit：0.1inch/min(inch output)

0 5 2 ZRNFL

ZRNFL Low feed speed at reference point return(Common to all axis)。

Setting amount：6～15000 Unit：mm/min (mm output)
6～6000 Unit：0.1inch/min (inch output)

0 5 3 BKLX

0 5 4 BKLY
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 10

0 5 5 BKLZ

BKLX BKLY BKLZ Backlash amount of each axis

Setting amount：0～2000 Unit：0.001mm (mm output)
0～2000 Unit：0.0001inch(inch output)

0 5 6 GRHMAX

GRHMAX Setting of the high Max. spindle speed at high speed gear(Set the
spindle speed when the velocity is 10V)
Setting amount：1～9999 Unit：rpm

0 5 7 GRHMIN

0 5 8 GRLMAX

0 5 9 SPDMAX

0 6 0 SPDMIN

GRHMIN Setting of the lower limit of the spindle speed at high speed gear
Setting amount：1～9999 Unit：rpm
GRLMAX Setting of the high Max. spindle speed at low speed gear。
Setting amount：1～9999 Unit：rpm
SPDMAX Setting of the upper limit of output value to the spindle motor
Setting as follows：
Upper limit of spindle motor
X 4095
Max.spindle motor speed
Setting amount： 1～4095
SPDMIN Setting of the lower limit of output value to the spindle motor
Setting as follows：
Lower limit of spindle speed
X 4095
Max.spindle motor speed
Setting amount：1～4095

0 6 1 Initial value of analogue spindle speed in JOG

Default 100.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 11

0 6 2 Increment of analogue spindle speed in JOG

Default 50.

0 6 4 JOGFL

JOGFL The lower limit speed (FL) on exponential acceleration/deceleration in

manual feeding
Setting amount：0～15000 Unit：mm/min (mm output)
0～6000 Unit：0.1inch/min(inch output)

0 6 5 PFINT
PFINT The first exponential feed speed when power on

0 6 6 SEQINC
SEQINC The increment of sequence number increasing
Setting amount：0～9999

0 6 7 Low limit of spindle speed controlled by

constant linear velocity
Unit: mm/min.

0 6 8 BRATE0

BRATE0 Baudrate set for RS232 interface.

Set value: 1200～115200 (BPS).(1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400
57600 1152). Note: Setting 1152 = 115200

0 6 9 COMDEF
BRATE1 Definition of features for RS232 interface.
Set value: BCD input, BCD codes in lower three bits (B2—BO) will specify different
features of serial ports,
B0: Parity check (0-no check, 1- odd check, 2- even check);
B1: Data stop bit (1, 2);
B2: Data bit (5,6,7,8)

0 7 0 LT1X1
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 12

0 7 1 LT1Y1

0 7 2 LT1Z1

0 7 3 LT1X2

0 7 4 LT1Y2

0 7 5 LT1Z2

Represent nth top in square zone（1or2 point）

Represent axis（X，Y 0r Z）

Setting amount：0～±9999999 (Unit：0.001MM or 0.0001inch).

Setting the distance from zero point to stroke limit. Out of the setting area is
called inhibit area. We often set stoke limit in Max. stroke. Over travel alarm
will be occurred if the machine move in inhibit area.
An allowance must be calculated in a moving interval. It is one fifth of the rapid
traverse (Unit：mm). For example, if rapid traverse= 10m/min, allowance= 10
× 1/5 = 2mm. There is an allowance between the CNC position and the
machine’s because of step losses, so that zero point return must be carried
out before machining. Otherwise, over-travel checking point will include this
allowance.
Note: When both the +/- soft limit parameters of an axis are set as 0, the soft limit of
the axis will not work.

0 7 6 PRSX

0 7 7 PRSY
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 13

0 7 8 PRSZ

PRSX PRSY PRSZ It sets the coordinates for automatic coordinate system
setting after zero return is executed.
Setting amount 0～ 9999999

0 7 9 PECINTX

0 8 0 PECINTY

0 8 1 PECINTZ

PECINTX，Y，Z Pitch error compensation interval for each axis.

Setting amount：8000～9999999 Unit：0.001mm (mm input)
4000～9999999 Unit：0.0001inch (inch input)
NOTE：
When zero is set to this parameter, the compensation is not performed.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 14
Attachment 1: Parameter and setting for pitch error compensation in K1000M 3-axis CNC system

1 0 0 PECORGX

PECORGX Pitch error compensation zero point for X axis.

Setting amount： 0～127

1 0 1

Setting of pitch error compensation amount for X axis

Setting amount：0～±7

2 2 8

3 0 0 PECORGY

PECORGY Pitch error compensation zero point for Y axis.

Setting amount： 0～127

3 0 1

Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Y axis

Setting amount：0～±7

4 2 8

5 0 0 PECORGZ

PECORGZ Pitch error compensation zero point for Z axis.

Setting amount： 0～127
5 0 1

Setting of pitch error compensation amount for Z axis

Setting amount：0～±7

6 2 8
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 15
NOTE1：Standard value and meaning of K100M3 CNC system
Standard Standard
No. Meaning No. Meaning
value value
1 X 47 50 Exponential acc/dec constant
2 X 48 0 Low limit of exponent acc/dec
3 X 49 1000 Relief amount of G73
4 11000000 Bit parameter 50 1000 Cutting start point of G83
5 10000100 Bit parameter 51 400 Rapid traverse override min. feed
6 00000000 Bit parameter 52 200 Low speed of zero return
7 01000000 Bit parameter 53 0 Backlash compensation value X
8 00000000 Bit parameter 54 0 Backlash compensation value Y
10 01110001 Bit parameter 56 9999 High-gear spindle speed at 10V
11 00000000 Bit parameter 57 99 Low limit rotation of high gear
12 10000110 Bit parameter 58 9999 Spindle speed of low gear at 10V
13 01000000 Bit parameter 59 4095 upper limit of spindle command
14 00001111 Bit parameter 60 41 Low limit of spindle command
15 1 CMR for X-axis 61 100 Initial value of analogue
spindle speed in JOG
16 1 CMR for Y-axis 62 50 Incremental value of analogue
17 1 CMR for Z-axis spindle speed in JOG
18 2 CMD for X-axis 63 0 No used
19 2 CMD for Y-axis 64 0 Low speed of manual acc/dec
20 2 CMD for Z-axis 65 200 Cutting feed initial value
21 50 Spindle speed at gear shifting 66 10 Auto sequence No. increment
22 0 Limit neglected for mini 67 0 Low limit of spindle speed
movement at tool offset C
23 255 Delay time for SAR controlled by constant linear velocity
24 2 Signal filter time 68 9600 Baud rate of serial port
25 20 No used 69 722 Definitions of the serial’s feature
26 20 No used 70 9999999 Soft stroke limit for +X
27 50 Percentage of pre-saved 71 9999999 Soft stroke limit for +Y
programs in buffer when DNC
starts
28 6000 No used 72 9999999 Soft stroke limit for +Z
29 6000 No used 73 -9999999 Soft stroke limit for -X
30 6000 No used 74 -9999999 Soft stroke limit for -Y
31 0 No used 75 -9999999 Soft stroke limit for -Z
32 0 No used 76 0 Return zero X auto coordinate
33 0 No used 77 0 Return zero Y auto coordinate
34 896 No used 78 0 Return zero Z auto coordinate
35 896 No used 79 0 Compensation interval of X-axis
36 896 No used 80 0 Compensation interval of Y-axis
37 0 Interval for interrupting 81 0 Compensation interval of Z-axis
interpolation
38 8000 Rapid traverse rate for X-axis 100 0 Pitch error zero point of X-axis
39 8000 Rapid traverse rate for Y-axis 300 0 Pitch error zero point of Y-axis
40 8000 Rapid traverse rate for Z-axis 500 0 Pitch error zero point of Z-axis
41 100 Linear ACC/DEC constant X-
axis
42 100 Linear ACC/DEC constant Y-
axis
43 100 Linear ACC/DEC constant Z-
axis
44 1000 Analogue spindle output adjust
45 4000 Upper limit of cutting feed
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－7（PARAMETER TABLE） 7 - 16
46 0 Zero shift compensation for
spindle analogue
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-1

APPENDIX 8 PLC PARAMETER AND DIAGNOSE

MESSAGE
PLC parameter display and set on the diagnose screen. One is the diagnose data
which can’t be set, the other is PLC parameter which can be set.
PLC parameter setting condition：Mode：MDI mode
Switch：Program key is on
1 Diagnose Data
1.1 Input signal

0 0 0 HGAR X16 *DECX X14 XI3 XI2 XI1 XI0

0 0 1 SKP X26 *DECY X24 HE X22 X21 X20

0 0 2 SPALM X32 *DECZ *ESP OV8 OV4 OV2 OV1

0 0 3 X47 X46 X45 X44 *ESP2 @SP ST KEY

Note: Bit 5 of diagnosis 003 is *DEC4 for 4-axis system.

1.2 Output signal

0 4 8 ZD VOI M05 M32 M08 M10 M04 M03

0 4 9 FNL ENB SRDY M33 M09 M11 STL ALM

0 5 0 S08 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01

1.3 Interface signal of CNC

0 1 6 RFZ RFY RFX PCZ PCY PCX

PCX～4： The status of PCn when executing zero return. In the course of zero return,
when deceleration limit switch is pressed and released, and PCn signal
comes to system, PCn turns 1and keeps on 1.
RFX～4：No used.

0 1 7 RDYZ RDYY RDYX ALMZ ALMY ALMX

RDYX～RDY4：Signal of driver device ready
ALM4～ALMX：Signal of driver device alarm
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-2

0 1 8 HANDLDATA
Data of handle

0 1 9/20 SPVALUE
Spindle analogue output data

1.4 Inner operator’s panel

№024～031：The keys of inner operator’s panel

1.5 Diagnose signal of keyboard

№032～039 ：Diagnose CNC keyboard
№040～047 ：Diagnose operator’s panel
When press the key on MDI operator’s panel, the corresponding bit displays
“1”. If release this key, the corresponding bit displays “0”.

1.6 The inner control relay of PLC

№128～145：The inner control relay of PLC

1.7 PLC – NC CNC signal

These signals are transmitted between PLC and CNC inside CNC system. They
can be used by operator to understand CNC system working statue. They have no
relation with hardware circuit.

1.7.1 Signal from PLC to NC

If axis can’t be moved or program not be executed, you can check these signals.
The other diagnose signals are middle relay between PLC and machine or PLC
inner relay. They are output to CNC after dealt with by PLC

Diagnosis number Meaning

0 9 6 HX/ROV1 *DECX -X +X *LMX *LPX
Handle X-axis /Rapid X-axis Feed axis & X axis X axis
traverse override1 deceleration direction select Negative Positive
limit limit

0 9 7 HY/ROV2 *DECY -Y +Y *LMY *LPY

 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-3

Handle Y-axis /Rapid Y-axis Feed axis & Y axis Y axis

traverse override2 deceleration direction select negative positive
limit limit

0 9 8 HZ/DRN *DECZ -Z +Z *LMZ *LPZ

Handle Z-axis /dry run Z-axis Feed axis & Z axis Z axis
deceleration direction negative positive
select limit limit

0 9 9 MLK *ILK SBK BDT SM01

Machine Axis Single Optional block skip
lock iinterlock block

1 0 0 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST MP2 MP1

Zero return Spindle Spindle Speed M,S,T Cycle Increment
stop orienta- arrival functio operation handle feed
tion n finish start

1 0 1 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

External reset Manual Cycle Emergency Override
rapid operation stop
traverse panel

1 0 2 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1

External work number select Program Operation mode
protect select

1 0 4 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

12bit output for S code

1 0 5 SIND SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

Spindle voltage generated Spindle voltage 12bit input for S code
by CNC/PLC pole

1 0 6 CDZ SMZ AFL OVC SOVC SOVB SOVA

 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-4

Chamferin Error signal Auxiliary Override Spindle

g signal function cancel override
lock

1 0 7 SKIP DLK ZNG *ABSM MIRY MIRX

Skip Display Z axis cancel Manual Mirror Mirror
signal lock absolute image image
signal for Y for X

1 0 8 *INTX *INTY *INTZ

Interlock of
X，Y，Z

1 1 0 UI07 UI06 UI05 UI04 UI03 UI02 UI01 UI00

1 1 1 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI09 UI08
16bit of Macro variable input

1.7.2 Signals from PC to NC

1 1 2 OP SA STL SPL ENB ZPZ ZPY ZPX

1 1 3 MA DEN RST AL

1 1 4 DST TF SF MF

1 1 5 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11

1 1 6 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11

1 1 7 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11

1 2 6 UO07 UO06 UO05 UO04 UO03 UO02 UO01 UO00

1 2 7 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO09 UO08
16bit of Macro variable output
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-5

2 PLC Parameter
To modify PLC parameters, it’s necessary to turn on program switch.
1 6 0 T1

1 6 1 T2

1 6 2 T3
T1, T2, T3: time for spindle to shift automatically, unit: 64ms. (Details refer to
PROGRAMMING 9-2)

1 6 8/9 RHTIME1
RHTIME1: time for automatic lubrication ON (15-bit binary).Unit: sec.161 is high byte,
the highest byte shall not be set as 1.

1 7 0/1 RHTIME2
RHTIME1: time for automatic lubrication OFF (15-bit binary).Unit: sec.163 is high byte,
the highest byte shall not be set as 1.

1 9 7 MESP3 MESP1 MESP2

MESP3 1: ES signal *ESP3 is masked.
MESP1 1: ES signal *ESP1 is masked.
MESP2 1: ES signal *ESP2 is masked.

1 9 9 OVRI EHPG EHOP EJOG MZRZ MZRY MZRX

OVRI 1: Reverse feed override signal, for special override switch.

EHPG 1: Select external handwheel.
EHOF 0: When external handwheel is selected, the handwheel on system panel is
invalid.
1: When external handwheel is selected, the handwheel on system panel is
valid. When input signal for external handwheel is HE=0, the handwheel,
incremental keys and axis-selection keys on system panel is valid.
EJOG 1: It’s possible to control manual feed by signal from input interface. Refer
to CONNECTION 4-10.
MZRZ～X：Setting axis motion key effective in negative or positive direction.
0 ： Disable negative direction motion key. That is, negative direction
motion key is ineffective in the course of zero return.
1：Disable positive direction motion key. That is, positive direction motion
key is ineffective in the course of zero return.
Note: To modify diagnosis no. 199 parameter, it’s necessary to turn on parameter switch.

2 0 0 SLCD MST M@SP MOT MESP MPWE SKEY SOVI

SLCD 0/1：Display data is transmitted to LCD controller in scan fly-back interval or

full time.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-6

MST 1：Disable ST(3.1) . That is, ST is ineffective and not cycle operation start
key.
M@SP 1：Disable @SP(3.2). @SP is ineffective and not cycle operation panel
key.
MOT 1：Not check soft stroke for axis
MESP 1：Disable *ESP1/2 . That is, *ESP1/2 is ineffective. Only used in testing.
MPWE 1：Disable Parameter switch. Used under special condition.
SKEY 1：Program protect key is from external signal(3.0). Used under special
condition.
SOVI 1：OV8～OV1 are override signals.

NOTE：Data of DGN200 can be modified when program protect key is off.

2 0 1 SOT JOGS SOLA AURH SINC SUOS

SOT：Setting soft stoke limit to be effective immediately or zero return executed

when power on,.
0： Soft stoke limit is immediately effective after power on.
1： Soft stoke limit is effective after zero return is executed.

JOGS ： Setting spindle speed control method in manual mode when spindle
analogue function is effective.
0： Spindle speed is defined by parameter.
1：Spindle speed is defined by S code command. It is zero if S code isn’t
programmed when power on. The speed is equal to which in auto mode.
NOTE：
See Ⅱ.9 Spindle function
SOLA 1: Can control the unclamping/clamping of tools.
AURH 1: Auto lubrication is valid. Diagnosis 168~171 set switching time.

SINC 1：Disable 0.1 and 1 increment value of step/handle. It can protect step
motor from losing step because of rapid motion.
SUOS 1：S8～S1 turn on Macro output signals(UO7～UO0)。

NOTE：
Macro output is automatically selected when spindle analogue function is effective.

2 0 2 MPOF KEYI MD4 MD2 MD1

MPOF 1: Mask low-voltage alarm.

KEYI 1： Program protect key is on when power on.
MD4~1 ：Setting initial operation mode when power on
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－8（PLC PARAMETER） 8-7

2 0 3 Current tool no.

2 0 8 MTIME
Processing time for M code or M-code pulse width (8-bit binary).Unit: 128 ms.

2 0 9 STIME
Processing time for S code (8-bit binary).Unit: 128 ms.

2 1 4 SPSTOPT1
Delay T1 from issuing Spindle Stop command to giving Spindle Stop signal (8-bit binary).
Unit: 16 ms.

2 1 5/6 SPZDDLT
Delay from issuing Spindle Stop single to giving Spindle Brake signal (16-bit binary).
Unit: 16 ms.

2 1 7/8 SPZDTIME
Time for outputting spindle brake (16-bit binary).Unit: 16 ms.

2 1 9 VOITIME
Time for sending out output signal from outer buzzer (8-bit binary)Unit: 32 ms.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－9(OPERATION LIST ) 9-1

APPENDIX9. OPERATION LIST

Classifi- Function PRGR PARA Mode Display Operation
cation M M function
switch switch button
Clear Setting original power on INPUT+0
parameter and
clear other data
Read disk Read from disk power on INPUT+1～3
Parameter input ○ Edit mode Parameter INPUT
Input by Offset input Edit mode Offset INPUT
Compu- Program store ○ Edit /Auto Program INPUT
ter
Store flash disk Edit mode Program N→1～3→OUTPUT
Input by Parameter input ○ MDI mode Parameter P→parameter number
MDI →INPUT→data→
INPUT
mode Offset input ─── Offset P→offset number→
INPUT→offset
number →INPUT
Setting MDI mode Set data（0/1）→INPUT
parameter input
Parameter Edit mode Parameter START
output
Transmit Offset output Edit mode OffsetSTART
to All program Edit mode Program O→-9999→START
output
computer One program Edit mode Program O→program number→
output START
Program Edit /Auto Program O→program number→
number index ↓(cursor)
Index Sequence Auto mode Program Search for N→
number index sequence number→↓
(cursor)
Word index Edit mode Program Word index→↓(cursor)
Address index Edit mode Program Address index→↓
(cursor)
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－9(OPERATION LIST ) 9-2

All programs ○ Edit mode Program O→-9999→DELETE

delete
One program ○ Edit mode Program O→program number→
delete DELETE
EDIT Word delete ○ Edit mode Program Search word to be
deleted DELETE
Word alter ○ Edit mode Program Search word to be
altered, new data→
ALTER
Word insert ○ Edit mode Program Search insert word, new
data→INSRT
Verify × Edit /Auto Program INPUT

NOTE：
○ is on 。× is off 。
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－10（SPECIFICATION TABLE） 10 - 1

APPENDIX 10 SPECIFICATION TABLE

@：optional function
*: function included in optional function

Name Specification
Control axes 3~4 axes(X,Y,Z，4)
Simultaneously controlled axes @3~4 axis
Least command unit 0.001mm/0.0001inch
Least increment unit 0.001mm/0.0001inch
Max. command ±8 bit
Rapid traverse rate 24m/min , 600inch/min
Rapid traverse rate override FO, 25,50,100%
Feed rate range 1～15000mm/min
Feed per min 0.01～600inch/min
Automatic acceleration/deceleration Provided
Feed rate override 0～150%
Simultaneously 1 axis
Manual continuous feed
@ Simultaneously 2 axis
Positioning Provided
Interpolation linear / circular
Reference point return Provided
Reference point return check Provided
LCDT/MDI 7.5-inch LCD
MDI soft key 5+2个
Incremental feed ×1，×10，×100
I/O device RS232C
Dwell (second ) Provided
Machine lock All axes
Stored stroke limit check Provided
Dwell status Provided
Dwell Provided
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－10（SPECIFICATION TABLE） 10 - 2

Stored pitch error compensation @Provided

MDI mode run Provided
Reset Provided
Dry run Provided
Single block Provided
Program protect signal Provided
Name Specification
Self diagnose function provided
Emergency stop provided
CNC ready signal
Servo ready signal
NC alarm signal
Distribution end signal
Status output Cycle operation signal
Cycle operation start signal
Cycle operation end signal
Power ready end signal
Reset signal
Single phase AC220V+10%, -15%
Power
50HZ±1HZ

Item Specification
Coordinate system setting Provided
Auto coordinate system setting Provided
Work coordinate system setting Provided
Decimal point input Provided
Compensation value input @Provided
Custom macro @Provided
Inch/metric shift @Provided
Cutter compensation B and
Provided
corner circular interpolation
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－10（SPECIFICATION TABLE） 10 - 3

Cutter compensation C Provided

Canned cycle Provided
Backlash compensation Provided
Circular radius R specifying Provided
Mirror function Provided

·AUXILIARY FUNCTION

Name Specification
Miscellaneous function M 2-digit
Auxiliary function lock Provided
·SPINDLE FUNCTION

Name Specification
Spindle function S 2-digit
Analogue spindle output @Provided
Spindle override 50～120%

·TOOL FUNCTION

Name Specification
Tool function @T01～08
Tool compensation memory 32 memories ±6 bit
Tool length compensation Provided

·EDIT, OPERATION

Name specification
Tape storage length 640KB
Storage program 128 programs
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－10（SPECIFICATION TABLE） 10 - 4

Flash memory Provided，8 disks

Program No. display Provided
Sequence No. search Provided
Program No. search Provided
Optional block skip 1
External workpiece No. Provided (15)
search
Program protect Provided

·DISPLAY

Name Specification
Display Chs/ENG
Cutting time, number of @Provided
workpiece display
Feed display Provided
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－11（CNC STATUS DISGNOSE MESSAGE） 11 - 1

APPENDIX11 CNC STATUS DIAGNOSE MESSAGE

The machine tool can’t move and no alarm occurs in CNC auto operation. CNC
current status can be known from diagnose number No.700 to No.823 on diagnose
screen.

7 0 0 CSCT CITL COVZ CINP CDWL CMTN CFIN

When a digit is a 1, the corresponding status is effective.
CFIN : The M, S or T function is being executed.
CMTN : A move command in the cycle operation is being executed.
CDWL : Dwell (G04) is being executed.
CINP : An in-position check is being executed.
COVZ : Override is at 0%.
CITL : Interlock signal (STLK) is turned on.
CSCT : Speed arrival signal of spindle is turned on.

7 0 1 CRST CTRD CTPU

When a digit is a 1, the corresponding status is effective.
CTPU： RS232 interface is being output.
CTRD： RS232 interface is being input.
CRST： One of the following : The reset button on the MDI panel or
emergency stop
is on.

7 1 0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
710：WCHAREX
Data is read from the series port.

7 1 2 STP REST EMS RSTB CSU

Indicates automatic operation stop or feed hold status. These are used for
troubleshooting.
STP： Motion stops.
REST： Reset is ON.
EMS： Emergency stop is ON.
RSTB： This is set when the reset button on MDI panel is ON.
CSU： This is used for inside.

8 0 0~2 SUERRX～Z
SUERRX～Z：X～Z axis acceleration/ deceleration control.
NOTE：4th-axis is selected, the corresponding data is at diagnose number D803.
 Ⅴ APPENDIX－11（CNC STATUS DISGNOSE MESSAGE） 11 - 2

8 2 0~2 OUTPSX～Z
OUTPSX～Z：The number of pulse is output from CNC to driver device by
electric-gear.
NOTE：4th-axis is selected, the corresponding data is at diagnose number D803.
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 1
Appendix 12 Additional Description for K1000M 4-axis System
Appendix 12.1 Standard Parameters and Meanings of K1000M 4-axis CNC System

Para
Standard
mete Meaning
value
r no.
1 X Par
2 X ame Standard
Meaning
3 X ter value
4 11000000 Bit parameter No.
th
5 10000100 Bit parameter 4 axis linear acceleration/deceleration
52 100
6 00000000 Bit parameter constant
7 01000000 Bit parameter 53 1000 Adjustment of spindle analogue output
8 00000000 Bit parameter 54 4000 Up limit for cutting feed speed.
9 00000000 Bit parameter 55 0 Zero shift compensation of analogue spindle
10 00000000 Bit parameter Exponential acceleration/deceleration time
56 50
11 01110001 Bit parameter constant
12 00000000 Bit parameter Low limit for exponential
57 0
13 10010110 Bit parameter acceleration/deceleration
14 01000000 Bit parameter 58 1000 Retracting amount for G73
15 00001111 Bit parameter 59 1000 Cutting start point for G83
16 1 Ｘ-axis command multiplier 60 400 Min. rate for rapid override
17 1 Y-axis command multiplier 61 200 Low speed for homing
18 1 Z-axis command multiplier 62 0 Backlash compensation value for X-axis
19 1
th
4 axis command multiplier 63 0 Backlash compensation value for Y-axis
64 0 Backlash compensation value for Z-axis
Ｘ -axis command frequency- th
20 2 65 0 Backlash compensation value for 4 axis
division coefficient 66 9999 Speed for high gear at 10V spindle command
Y-axis command frequency- 67 99 Low limit of spindle speed at high gear
21 2
division coefficient 68 9999 Speed for low gear at 10V spindle command
Z-axis command frequency- 69 4095 Up limit of spindle command
22 2
division coefficient 70 41 Low limit of spindle command
th
4 -axis command frequency- Initial value of analogue spindle speed under
23 2 71 100
division coefficient manual mode
24 50 Spindle speed at shifting Increment of analogue spindle speed under
Limit neglected for mini 72 50
25 0 manual mode
movement at tool offset C 73 0 Not used
26 255 SAR delay time 74 0 Not used
27 2 Signal filtering time 75 0 Manual acceleration/deceleration low speed
28 4 Not used 76 200 Initial cutting speed
29 5 Not used 77 10 Increment for automatic S/N
Percentage of pre-saved 78 0 Not used
30 50 programs in buffer when DNC 79 9600 Baudrate for serial port
starts. 80 722 Feature of serial port
31 20 Not used 81 9999999 +X soft limit
32 6000 Not used 82 9999999 +Y soft limit
33 6000 Not used
83 9999999 ＋Z soft limit
34 6000 Not used
35 6000 Not used 84 9999999 ＋4th soft limit
36 0 Not used 85 -999999 －X soft limit
37 0 Not used 86 -999999 －Y soft limit
38 0 Not used 87 -999999 －Z soft limit
39 0 Not used 88 -999999 －4th soft limit
40 896 Not used 89 0 Automatic X coordinate value after homing
41 896 Not used 90 0 Automatic Y coordinate value after homing
42 896 Not used 91 0 Automatic Z coordinate value after homing
42 896 Not used Automatic 4
th
axis coordinate value after
43 896 Not used 92 0
homing
44 0 Interpolation interval 93 0 X-axis pitch error compensation interval
45 8000 X-axis traverse rate 94 0 Y-axis pitch error compensation interval
46 8000 Y-axis traverse rate 95 0 Z-axis pitch error compensation interval
47 8000 Z-axis traverse rate 96 0
th
4 -axis pitch error compensation interval
th
48 8000 4 -axis traverse rate 200 0 Origin for X-axis pitch error compensation
X-axis linear 400 0 Origin for Y-axis pitch error compensation
49 100 acceleration/deceleration 600 0 Origin for Z-axis pitch error compensation
constant 800 0
th
Origin for 4 -axis pitch error compensation
Y-axis linear For details, refer to 3-axis system.
50 100 acceleration/deceleration
constant
Z-axis linear
51 100 acceleration/deceleration
constant
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 2
Appendix 12.2 Bit Parameters and Their Meanings of K1000M 4
When a bit parameter is same with that for 3-axis system, its meaning is same with
that for 3-axis system.
0 0 4 OTFP RDRN DECI IOF RS43 DCS SCW

0 0 5 NFED TJHD PMXY2 PMXY1 RSJG PPD PCMD

0 0 6 PRGB TLCP GST OVRI ZM4 ZMZ ZMY ZMX

0 0 7 G93N NTHD SMZ ZC4 ZCZ ZCY ZCX

0 0 8 VRY4 VRYZ VRYY VRYX DIR4 DIRZ DIRY DIRX

0 0 9 TSUB TJOG ADW2 ADW1 ADW0 PSG2 PSG1 MPLS

TSUB 0: The execution of T code will be determined by CM98 of parameter 012.
1: When executing T code, the system calls up automatically
subprogram O9200, meanwhile variable #131 will set automatically
data after T code.
TJOG 1: Manual tool changing or specified tool-changing function is active.
ADW2～0 : Select the address for displaying the 4th axis (A,B,C,U,V,W).

0 1 0 OTZN CROT DAL4 DALZ DALY DALX

OTZN 1: Don’t check soft limit of Z axis.
CROT 0: Selected 4th axis is a linear axis.
1: Selected 4th axis is a rotary axis.

0 1 1 EILK .1. .1. .1. CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1

EILK 1: Interlocking of axes is active.
When diagnosis 199 QJSL is set as 1, i.e. the controlling function for rotary indexing
head clamped/unclamped pneumatically is selected, if the pneumatic unclamping in
position signal is not input, the 4th axis will be interlocked.
In this case, the interlock signal for the axis is 0, under a manual mode, the 4th axis
can’t move; and under automatic mode, if there is 4th axis command, then all axis-moving
commands will pause. For example: To carry out interpolation for X-/4th-axis under Auto
mode, if the 4th-axis interlock signal is active, the movement will pause, after canceling the
signal, the program will continue. If there is no command for 4th axis to move in the program,
it will execute as normal regardless the 4th-axis interlock signal.
When the axis is interlocked and can’t move, by observing CITL bit of DGN700, you
can know state of the system. Or by observing DGN108, you can know whether the axis is
interlocked.
Diagnosis info
1 0 8 *ILK4 *ILKZ *ILKY *ILKX
th
*ILK4: normal when it is 1; means the 4 axis is interlocked when it is 0. *ILKX,Y,Z:
always 1.
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 3
0 1 2 BDEC BD8 RVDL ZDIL KSGN ZRNL CM98 JSPD

0 1 3 APRS TMANL SMANL M30 EDTB OFFVY EBCL ISOT

0 1 4 G01 SBKM DNCB EALM PODI PML3 PML2 PML1

0 1 5 POD G84S FXCO FXCS ZRS4 ZRSZ ZRSY ZRSX

Appendix 12.3 I/O Signal List
Appendix 12.3.1 diagnosis list for input signal
Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
no. HGEAR X16 *DECX X14 S@SOLA UI2 UI1 UI0
Socket pin XS54:9 XS54:22 XS54:23 XS54:10 XS54:24 XS54:11 XS54:25 XS54:12

Indexing PSWI QFSI M11I M10I

【Description】
HGEAR: Input signal for manual shifting for the analogue spindle.
*DECX: Input signal for deceleration for X-axis mechanical homing.
S@SOLA: Input signal for unclamping/clamping tool.
UI2-UI0: Input signal for macro command.
th
PSWI/QFSI/M11I/M10I: Input signal for controlling the rotary indexing head of the 4 axis,
for details, refer to appendix 12.6.

Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
no. SKP X26 *DECY X24 UIB UIA M21I M20I
001 pin
Socket XS54:15 XS54:16 XS54:17 XS54:18 XS54:19 XS54:20 XS54:8 XS54:21
no.
Hard limit *LM *LP

【Description】
SKP: Input signal for G31 measurement.
*DECY: Input signal for deceleration for Y-axis mechanical homing.
UIB/UIA: Input signal for macro command.
M21I: Input signal for unclamping rotary table.
M20I: Input signal for Go To Clamping.
*LM/*LP: Input signal for hard limit.

Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
no. SPALM X32 *DECZ *ESP OV8 OV4 OV2 OV1
002pin
Socket XS54:4 XS54:5 XS54:6 XS54:7 XS56:14 XS56:15 XS56:7 XS56:8

【Description】
SPALM: Input signal for spindle alarm.
*DECZ: Input signal for deceleration for Z-axis mechanical homing.
*ESP: Input signal of emergency stop.
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 4
OV8-OV1: Input signal of override switch.

Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
no. HIGI SOLA *DEC4 LOWI *ESP2 @SP ST KEY
003
Socket pin XS54:14 XS54:1 XS54:2 XS54:3 XS56:4 XS56:3 XS56:2 XS56:1
【Description】
HIGI: in-position signal for high gear of analogue spindle is detected.
LOWI: in-position signal for low gear of analogue spindle is detected.
SOLA: in-position signal for unclamping/clamping tool is detected.
*DEC4: Input signal for deceleration for 4th-axis mechanical homing.
*ESP2: Input signal of Emergency Stop switch at attached panel.
◎SP: Input signal of Feed Hold switch at attached panel.
ST: Input signal of Cycle Start switch at attached panel.

Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
*ESP3 H4 HZ HY HX ×100 ×10 ×1
no
Socket
004 pin XS61:4 XS61:9 XS61:14 XS61:13 XS61:12 XS61:3 XS61:2 XS61:1
no.

【Description】
*ESP3 : Input signal of emergency stop switch.
H4/HZ/HY/HX : Input signal for selecting external handwheel axis. Active when
EHPG=1 for diagnosis parameter 198.
×100/×10/×1 : Input signal for increment for external handwheel.

Appendix 12.3.2 Diagnosis list for output signal

Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
ZD VOI M05 M32 M08 M10 M04 M03
no.
Socket
048 pin
XS57:17 XS57:1 XS57:4 XS57:14 XS57:16 XS57:2 XS57:3 XS57:15
no.
【Description】
ZD: Output signal for spindle braking.
VOI: Output signal to external buzzer at alarm.
M05: Output signal for spindle stopping.
M32: Output signal for lubricant ON.
M08: Output signal for coolant ON.
M10: Output signal of code M10 or of pneumatic clamping.
M04: Output signal for spindle CCW.
M03: Output signal for spindle CW.
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 5
Bit no.：7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Diagnosis
FNL ENB JOGO M33 M09 M11 M21 M20
no.
Socket
049 pin
XS57:21 XS57:5 XS57:8 XS57:18 XS57:20 XS57:6 XS57:7 XS57:19
no.
【Description】
FNL: Indicative signal for finishing machining.
ENB: Indicative signal for analogue spindle outputting.
JOGO: Indicative signal for manual/handwheel/single step/homing way.
M33: Pulse output signal for lubricant OFF.
M09: Pulse output signal for coolant OFF.
M11: Pulse output signal for code M11.
M21: Output signal for unclamping rotary table.
M20: Output signal for clamping rotary table.

Bit no.：7
Diagnosis 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
no. SOLAO Y36 Y35 UO4 UO3 UO2 HIGO LOWO
050
Socket pin XS57:25 XS57:9 XS57:12 XS57:22 XS57:24 XS57:10 XS57:11 XS57:23

Macro UO1 UO0

Spindle S05 S04 S03 S02 S01

Indexing M11O
【Description】
SOLAO: Output signal for unclamping/clamping tool.
S05-S01: Output signal for spindle mechanical shifting.
UO4-UO0: Output signal for macro command.
HIGO: Output signal for high gear of analogue spindle.
LOWO: Output signal for low gear of analogue spindle.
M11O: Output signal for the pneumatic unclamping for controlling the indexing head. For
detail, please see appendix 12.6.
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 6
Appendix 12.3.3 Arrangement of I/O signals in socket XS54 and XS57

Arrangement of input signals in socket XS54 Arrangement of output signals in socket

XS57

SOLA 1 1 VOI
HIGI 14 14 M32
*DEC4 2 2 M10
SKP 15 15 M03
LOWI 3 3 M04
X26 16 16 M08
SPALM 4 4 M05
*DECY 17 17 ZD
X32 5 5 ENB
X24 18 18 M33
*DECZ 6 6 M11
UIB 19 19 M20
*ESP1 7 7 M21
UIA 20 20 M09
M21I 8
M20I 21 8 JOGO
HGEAR 9 21 FNL
X16 22 9 Y36
X14 10 22 UO4
*DECX 23 10 UO2
UI2 11 23 LOWO
S@SOLA 24 11 HIGO
UI0 12 24 UO3
UI1 25 12 Y35
13 25 SOLAO
13

Arrangement of input signals in socket XS56 Arrangement of input signals in socket

XS61

1 KEY
KEY 1 KEY
×1
9 0V 9 0V
H4
2 ST 2 ST
×10
10 0V 10 0V
3 @SP 3 @SP
×100
11 +5V 11 +5V
4 *ESP2 4 *ESP2
*ESP3
12 +5V 12 +5V
HX
5 HA 5 HA
13 +5V 13 +5V
HY
6 HB 6 HB
14 0V
*OV8 14 0V
HZ
7 0V
*OV2 7 0V
15 +12V
*OV4 15 +12V
+24V
8 +12V
*OV1 8 +12V
+24V

Switch signal S@SOLA

Output signal SOLAO

 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 7
Appendix 12.4 Descriptions on I/O Signals
KND-100M 4-axis system has totally 40 input signals and 24 output signals. Most of
them have definition and operation way same with that for K100M 3-axis system, and the
following will only introduce those different.
Appendix 12.4.1 Control for unclamping/clamping tools ——S@SOLA/SOLAI/SOLAO
（1） Input interface
S@SOLA : Input interface for unclamping/clamping tool.
SOLAI : in-position signal for unclamping/clamping tool is detected.
（2） Output interface
SOLAO : Output signal for unclamping/clamping tool.
（3） Function description
At cycle start, the system will check whether the In-position Signal SOLAI is
1. If yes, it will alarm, and will not start the automatic cycle. Alarm info: “015:
song-la tool error.”
The output signal for unclamping/clamping tool SOLAO will be controlled by input
interface S@SOLA. The sequential figure is as follows:

Appendix 12.4.2 Output in manual way ——JOGO

The output interface JOGO is 1 when the system is under Manual, Handwheel/Single
Step, and Home mode, otherwise it is 0.

Appendix 12.4.3 Function for clamping and unclamping rotary table——

M20I/M21I/M20/M21
Special M program codes M20 and M21 are added in the system. M20 is for controlling
the clamping of rotary table, and M21 for unclamping. Process flow is:
M20 : Output signal M20 (rotary table clamps), wait and when input signal M20I
is high level, close M20 output, the program block ends.
M21: Output signal M21 (rotary table unclamps), wait and when input signal
M21I is high level, close M21 output, the program block ends.

Appendix 12.4.4 Function of hardware limit——*LM/*LP

The system is of hardware limit function when setting MOT=0 for diagnosis parameter
200.
Input interface *LM is negative limit, and *LP is positive limit for the axis. At connection,
one shall connect in serial the negative limit switches of 4 axes with *LM, the positive limit
switches of 4 axes with *LP. When the limit of an axis is active, the 4 axes can move in
reverse direction manually, so as to move out the limit area.
Note: Please note the difference between hard and soft limit, when both the +/- soft limit parameters of
an axis are set as 0, the soft limit of the axis will not work.

Appendix 12.4.5 Automatic shifting of analogue spindle——HIGI/LOWI/HIGO/LOWO

 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 8
The analogue spindle can shift automatically high and low gear. The max. speed
of high gear of the spindle is set at parameter 056, the min. speed of that is at
parameter 057, the max. speed of low gear of the spindle is set at parameter 058.
At initial stage after turning on, the system defaults low gear (but it has no output
from the low-gear output port). When the specified analogue spindle speed exceeds
the max. speed of the low gear, it shifts automatically.
Gears-shifting procedure:
（1） Axis stops movement, the analogue spindle outputs speed set by parameter
021.
（2） After delaying a time set by diagnosis parameter 160, it outputs shifting signal
HIG (or LOW).
（3） Check whether the gear signal HIGI (LOWI) is in position.
（4） After it is in position, delay a time set by diagnosis parameter 161.
（5） The spindle rotates in programmed speed.
（6） After delaying a time set by diagnosis parameter 162, axis stop is cancelled,
the gear-shifting ends.
When the analogue spindle rotates at high gear, and the newly specified speed is
lower than the lowest speed of the high gear of the spindle, it will automatically shift
from high gear to low gear. The shifting procedure is same with above mentioned.
Note: Note: when the parameter setting P056≤P058, the system has no automatic shifting function, it
will output in speed set by P056.

Appendix 12.4.6 Function of external handwheel

Relative parameters: EHPG, EHOF of diagnosis 199.
Input interface: H4/HZ/HY/HX/×100/×10/×1.
For details of operation way, refer to CONNECTION 4-10, APPENDIX 8-4.

Appendix 12.5 Calling up Subprogram by T Code (for Controlling Tool

Changing)
If setting TSUB=1 for system parameter 009, when executing T code, the system will
call up automatically subprogram (no. is fixed as O9200), meanwhile variable #131 will set
automatically data after T code.
Application example:
1． Auto tool changing
Tool-changing code: T××；
Tool-changing procedure: when executing T code, variable #131 will be set
automatically as tool no. (e.g.: for executing T02, the system variable #131 =2),
meanwhile the system calls up automatically subprogram O9200. The tool-
changing process is prepared by macro code in subprogram O9200.
2． Manual tool changing
If setting TJOG = 1 for system parameter 009, the manual tool changing or
specified tool-changing function is active.
Process flow is:
Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 9
（1） Set tool No. to be changed in macro variable #100. If it is to change the
next tool in sequence, set it as 0.
（2） Under Auto way, when pressing down〖Change Tool〗on the panel, the
indicator lamp on the key will light up.
（3） Press Cycle Start, the system will automatically search program O9201 and
execute it. Program for manual tool changing is in subprogram O9201.
Description for programming subprogram O9201:
O9201；
Ⅰ: Judge whether variable #100 is 0. If not, execute II; if yes, go to III.
Ⅱ: Specified tool changing.
T#100； (Assign ＃131＝＃100, call up tool-changing
subprogram O9200)
Ⅲ: Changing tool in sequence.
Make ＃515＝＃515＋1, (Assuming current tool no. is saved in variable
＃515)
T#515； (Assign ＃131＝＃515, call up tool-changing
subprogram O9200)
M30; (Subprogram ends)
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 10
Appendix 12.6 Controlling Function for Rotary Indexing Head
Clamped/Unclamped Pneumatically in 4th Axis
(1) Select parameter
Diagnosis 199 QJSL
QJSL 1: Controlling function for rotary indexing head clamped/unclamped
pneumatically is selected.
The following functions will be active if setting QJSL=1.
(2) Relative functions
2.1 Manual clamping/unclamping control
Under manual mode (Manual Continuous, Jog, Handwheel), pressing once manual
clamping button will output M10 point and turn off M11 output.
Under manual mode (Manual Continuous, Jog, Handwheel), pressing once manual
unclamping button will output M11 point and turn off M10 output.
2.2 Auto clamping/unclamping control
M10: When executing M10, it outputs M10 point, turns off M11 output, after
time set by parameter DGN166 expires, the execution ends. The output still holds.
M11: When executing M11, it outputs M11 point, turns off M10 output, after the
system receives pneumatic ‘unclamp’ in-position (QFSI) input signal, the execution ends.
The output still holds.
2.3. Alarm in external pneumatic pressure detection
When signal (PSWI) pneumatic-pressure alarm inputs, the system generates external
alarm 014: outer pneumatic pressure is low, it generates internally emergency stop
(not ready).
2.4 Control signal for the 4th axis driving (SV-ON) MRDY4 changes into control of
output point.
In addition to former MRDY4, if: receiving no pneumatic “unclamp” in-position input
signal (QFSI) (signal is of 0 level), MRDY4 has no output.
The former MRDY4 signal is inactive, and is changed into system output signal:
MRDY4.
(3) Relative I/O signals
Input signal
Diagnosis 000 X17 X16 *DECX X14 SW@SOLA UI2 UI1 UI0
D199 QJSL=1 PSWI QFSI M11I M10I
After selecting the controlling function for rotary indexing head clamped/unclamped
pneumatically
M10I: Input point for manual clamping button. M11I : Input point for manual unclamping
button..
QFSI: Input signal for pneumatic “unclamp” in-position. PSWI : Pneumatic Pressure
Arrival signal
Output signal
 Ⅴ Appendices －12（Additional description for 4-axis system） 12 － 11

Diagnosis M10
048

Diagnosis Y36 Y35

050
D199 QJSL=1 M11O MRDY4
M10: output signal for pneumatic clamp.
M11O: output signal for pneumatic unclamp.
MRDY4: outputs MRDY signal for the 4th axis.

(4) Interlock function for the 4th axis

1. Select parameter
Parameter 011 EILK
EILK 1: Interlocking of axes is active.
When diagnosis 199 QJSL is set as 1, i.e. the controlling function for rotary
indexing head clamped/unclamped pneumatically is selected, if the pneumatic
unclamping in position signal is not input, the 4th axis will be interlocked.
In this case, the interlock signal for the axis is 0, under a manual mode, the 4th
axis can’t move; and under automatic mode, if there is 4th axis command, then all
axis-moving commands will pause. For example: To carry out interpolation for X-
/4th-axis under Auto mode, if the 4th-axis interlock signal is active, the movement will
pause, after canceling the signal, the program will continue. If there is no command
for 4th axis to move in the program, it will execute as normal regardless 4th-axis
interlock signal.
When the axis is interlocked and can’t move, by observing CITL bit of DGN700, you
can know state of the system. Or by observing diagnosis 108, you can know whether
the axis is interlocked.
Diagnosis info
Diagnosis *ILK4 *ILKZ *ILKY *ILKX
108
*ILK4: normal when it is 1; means the 4th axis is interlocked when it is 0.
*ILKX,Y,Z: always 1.
 Ⅴ Appendix －13（Communication Software） 13 － 1

Appendix 13 Instructions On KND Communication Software

1．DOS Version
Copy the necessary files into computer, and run KND.BAT. The following figure shows
the user interface:
KND CNC-Talker V3.20 Com0:2400

STCom Trans Reciv K-DNC Kedit Esc-Exit

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
STCom（F1）： Setting port number（serial port 0 or 1）and baud rate. Default value:
port number: 0, baud rate:2400.
Trans（F2）： Transmitting data from PC to NC. When press F2, the software prompts:
“S/C：File name to transmit: ：”, then input the path and name of data
file(The path can be omitted in the case of same directory). Press enter, the
software prompts: “S/C: Transmitting *****… Esc :Stop”(***** is the file
name). After these, operate NC to receive data.
Reciv（F3）： Receiving data from NC. When press F3, the software prompts: “S/C：File
name to store: ：”, then input the path and name of data file(The path can
be omitted in the case of same directory). Press enter, the software
prompts: “S/C: Receiving *****… Esc :Stop”(***** is the file name). After
these, operate NC to transmit data.
K-DNC（F4）： DNC operation. This command is used to transmit data from PC to NC in
DNC mode. When press F4, the software prompts: “S/C：File name to
transmit: ：”, then input the path and name of data file(The path can be
omitted in the case of same directory). Press enter, the software prompts:
“S/C: K-DNC Transmitting ****… Esc :Stop”(***** is the file name). After
these, operate NC into DNC mode.
Kedit（F5）： Text editor-PE2. you can use it to edit program or parameters. Please refer
to the manual of PE2.
Esc-Exit ：Press ESC to exit.
Notes：Do not run this software in windows. For the reliable communication, you should enter into DOS
mode by pressing F8 in Windows starting procedure.
 Ⅴ Appendix －13（Communication Software） 13 － 2

2．Windows Version
（1） Install
Run setup file: KNDSCom XX Setup.exe.
Use version 5.0 for K1000 and later NC systems, and version 3.0 for other NC
systems.
（2） Platform requirement
Platform requirement: Windows 98 / Windows Me / Windows2000 / Windows XP
（3） User interface

（4） Setting serial port

Click the 〖Setup〗 button on the toolbar to setup the serial port corresponding to
current window. If there isn't a opened window, you should open one firstly. The
following figure shows the communcation setup dialog.

The setup dialog provides the following

settings:
Port number：COM1－COM4
Baud rate：2400/4800/7200/8800
14400/38400/56000/57600/115200bps
Data bit：5 / 6 / 7 / 8
Stop bit：1 / 2
Verify：Odd/Even/None
 Ⅴ Appendix －13（Communication Software） 13 － 3

Notes：The above figure shows the default settings, and you should not change the parameters except
Port number and Baud rate if not necessary.
（5） Receiving data
Click the 〖Receive〗 button on the toolbar to set the program into receiving
status, as shown in the following figure:

Then, operate NC system to send data, The receiving data are shown
synchronously in the window as shown in the following figure:

（6） Sending data

Firstly, set NC system into receiving status. Then, click the 〖Send〗button on the
toolbar. The three indicators which are receiving status, sending status and pause
status, indicate the operating status, as shown in the following figure：

The operating time is shown on status bar, as shown in the following figure：

The sending procedure can be interrupted and resumed by click the three
operating buttons which are shown in Figure:
 Ⅴ Appendix －13（Communication Software） 13 － 4

A indicator indicates the current sending line when pause the sending procedure,
as shown in the following figure.

（7） DNC
Set the KND NC system into DNC running status firstly, and start it. Then, click the
〖Send〗 button on the toolbar. The data in the edit area are sent to NC line by line.
You can interrupt and resume the sending as the sending data procedure.